How to use Revilope

Revilope helps you turn the customer emails you already send into automatic Google review follow-ups. Once your business is set up, you can request reviews in two ways:

Add your private Revilope address to the BCC field of a customer email.
Enter customer email addresses manually from your Revilope dashboard.

Use the sections below to set up your account, send your first request, understand request statuses, manage your plan, and troubleshoot common issues.

Getting Started

Revilope helps your business send professional Google review requests without adding a complicated new process to your day.

Once your account is set up, you can request reviews by adding your private Revilope address to the BCC field of an email you are already sending to a customer. Revilope then sends the customer a separate review request after the follow-up delay you selected.

You do not need to remember or manually type your private Revilope address. Each business card includes a Save Contact button that allows you to save the address as a contact in your email or contacts application.

You can also send review requests manually through your Revilope dashboard when you do not have an original customer email to send.

This section explains how Revilope works, what information you should prepare, how to complete your initial setup, how to save your private BCC contact, and how to send your first review request successfully.

Revilope in One Sentence

Send the customer email you were already going to send, add your saved private Revilope contact to BCC, and Revilope will send a separate review request after your selected delay.

What Revilope Does

Revilope is a review-request automation service for businesses that want a simple and consistent way to ask customers for feedback.

Businesses often provide a great product or service but forget to ask the customer for a review afterward. Revilope helps solve that problem by making the review follow-up part of the email workflow your business already uses.

Each business you add to Revilope receives its own private BCC address. When you send an eligible email directly to a customer and add that private address to the BCC field, Revilope checks the message information, identifies the correct business and customer, and schedules a separate review request.

The review-request email uses the settings saved for that business, including:

The business name.
The owner or representative name.
The email subject.
The review-request message.
The review button text.
The Google review link.
The reply-to email address.
The business mailing address.
The selected follow-up delay.

The customer does not see your private Revilope BCC address. The customer receives a separate review-request email at the scheduled time.

The Two Ways to Send Review Requests

Revilope gives you two ways to create review requests. Both methods use the same business template and count toward the same monthly request allowance.

BCC Review Automation

Use BCC automation when you are already sending a normal email directly to a customer.

Write your normal customer email.
Place the customer’s email address in the To field.
Add your saved private Revilope contact to the BCC field.
Send the email from a verified authorized sender.
Revilope checks the email and schedules the separate review request.
The review request is sent after the business’s saved delay.

BCC automation can be used with customer emails such as:

Receipts.
Invoices.
Thank-you emails.
Appointment follow-ups.
Completed-service notices.
Project completion emails.
Order completion messages.
Customer support follow-ups.
Other emails you already send after completing a customer interaction.

Manual Review Requests

Use manual requests when you want to contact a customer but do not have an original customer email to send through the BCC workflow.

Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the appropriate business.
Open the manual request form.
Enter one or more customer email addresses.
Choose whether to send the requests as soon as possible or use the business’s saved delay.
Submit the request.
Check the Activity section to confirm the result.

Manual requests are useful for:

In-person customers.
Phone transactions.
Previous customers.
Customers imported from another system.
Customers from a booking or scheduling platform.
Customers who did not receive a normal business email.

What You Need Before You Begin

Gather the following information before creating your first business profile. Preparing this information in advance will make the setup process easier and reduce the chance of an incorrect review link, unverified sender, or incomplete email template.

Your Business Information

You will need:

Your public business name.
Your business website.
The name of the owner, manager, or representative who should appear in the review request.
A valid business mailing address.
A reply-to email address that your team checks regularly.

Use information that customers already recognize. Accurate business details help customers understand who sent the review request.

Your Google Review Link

You need the direct Google review link for the business you are adding.

Before saving the link in Revilope, open it in a private or incognito browser window and confirm that:

It opens the correct business.
It opens the correct location if your business has multiple locations.
The displayed business name is accurate.
The customer can begin leaving a review.
The link does not require access to your private Google Business Profile management account.

Do not use a general Google search-results link or an unrelated Google Maps search page. The direct Google review link gives the customer a clearer and easier experience.

The Email Address You Use to Contact Customers

The email address that sends the original customer email must be added to Revilope as an authorized sender.

Revilope sends a verification email to that address. The address must be verified before it can trigger automatic BCC requests.

Use the exact address that appears in the From field of your customer emails. Similar addresses, aliases, shared mailboxes, and forwarding addresses may be treated as separate senders.

For example, the following are different email addresses:

hello@example.com
sales@example.com
support@example.com

If you normally send from sales@example.com, verifying hello@example.com will not necessarily authorize sales@example.com.

Your Review-Request Message

You will need an email subject, a review-request message, and review button text.

A strong review request should:

Thank the customer.
Ask for honest feedback.
Explain that leaving a review should only take a moment.
Include one clear review button.
Avoid pressuring the customer to leave a particular rating.

Each business can use its own custom email template.

Your Preferred Follow-Up Delay

The follow-up delay controls how long Revilope waits before sending the review request.

Available delay options include:

1 hour.
4 hours.
12 hours.
24 hours.
2 days.
3 days.
7 days.

A 24-hour delay is a practical starting point for many businesses. It gives the customer time to complete or reflect on the experience while the interaction is still recent.

Recommended Setup Order

Complete the following steps in order. Each step prepares an important part of your Revilope review-request workflow.

1. Create Your Revilope Account

Create your account using an email address that you check regularly.

Revilope may use this address for:

Account messages.
Password resets.
Subscription notices.
Security notifications.
Support communication.
Test emails.

Use a secure and unique password. Do not share your account password with unrelated users.

2. Select a Plan

Every Revilope plan includes custom email templates and all core features. Plans differ based on the number of businesses, monthly requests, and authorized senders included.

Starter includes 1 business, 5 requests per month, and 1 authorized sender.
Pro includes 1 business, 100 requests per month, and 1 authorized sender.
Pro Plus includes up to 3 businesses, 350 requests per month, and 3 authorized senders.
Agency includes up to 10 businesses, 1,500 requests per month, and 10 authorized senders.

View Revilope Plans

3. Add Your First Business

Create a business profile and enter the information customers should see in the review request.

Each business has its own:

Private Revilope BCC address.
Google review link.
Email template.
Reply-to email address.
Mailing address.
Authorized senders.
Follow-up delay.
Request activity.

If you manage multiple businesses or locations, create a separate profile for each one. Do not reuse a single business profile for unrelated companies.

4. Save Your Private Revilope Contact

After creating the business, select Save Contact on its business card.

The contact contains the business’s complete private Revilope BCC address, so you do not need to remember, copy, or manually type the address each time.

Save the contact in the email account or contacts application your staff use to communicate with customers.

Use a clear contact name that identifies the business or location, such as:

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Oakville
Revilope Reviews – Northside Auto Repair

When sending a customer email, begin typing the saved contact name in the BCC field and select the correct Revilope contact.

5. Add and Test Your Google Review Link

Paste the direct Google review link into the business profile.

Open the link in a private browser window before sending any live requests. Confirm that it directs customers to the correct business and location.

6. Customize the Review Request

Write the subject, message, and review button text your customers will receive.

Keep the message short, recognizable, and focused on one action. Ask for honest feedback rather than asking for a specific star rating.

7. Add Your Authorized Sender

Enter the exact email address your business uses to contact customers.

Revilope sends a verification email to that address. Open the verification message and complete verification before attempting to trigger an automatic BCC request.

8. Select Your Follow-Up Delay

Choose how long Revilope should wait before sending the review request.

BCC-triggered requests automatically use the saved business delay. Manual requests can use the saved delay or be sent as soon as possible.

9. Send Yourself a Test Email

Use the Send Test option before contacting customers.

Review the email on desktop and mobile. Click the review button and confirm that it opens the correct Google Business Profile.

Reply to the test email and confirm that the reply goes to the correct business inbox.

Test emails do not count toward your monthly request allowance.

10. Send Your First Live Request

Choose either BCC review automation or the manual request form.

For your first BCC request, send an email directly to one eligible customer from the verified sender and add the saved Revilope contact for the correct business to BCC.

For your first manual request, enter one eligible customer email address and choose the sending option.

11. Check the Activity Section

Do not assume that a request was accepted simply because the original email was sent.

Open the Activity section and confirm whether the request is:

Scheduled.
Sending.
Sent.
Failed.
Cancelled.
Skipped as a duplicate.
Blocked by the plan limit.
Suppressed.
Rejected because of an unauthorized sender.
Rejected because of an invalid recipient.

Save Your Private Revilope Address as a Contact

Your private Revilope address is intentionally unique. You are not expected to memorize or manually type it.

Use the Save Contact button on the business card to save the address in your normal contacts or email application.

How to Save the Contact

Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the correct business.
Select Save Contact next to Edit.
Open the contact file or contact prompt provided by your device.
Review the contact name and email address.
Save the contact to the account used for sending customer emails.
Create a new email and begin typing the contact name in BCC.
Confirm that the complete private Revilope address appears.

Recommended Contact Names

Use a name that makes the business and location immediately clear.

Revilope BCC – Business Name
Revilope BCC – Business Name – Location
Revilope Reviews – Business Name

If your account contains several locations, do not save every address using the same generic name.

For example, avoid saving all contacts simply as:

Revilope

Instead, use:

Revilope BCC – Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Oakville
Revilope BCC – Burlington

Why Saving the Contact Is Recommended

Saving the private address helps:

Prevent typing mistakes.
Prevent missing characters.
Reduce the need to open the Revilope dashboard for every email.
Make the BCC workflow faster for staff.
Reduce the chance of using the wrong location.
Keep the complete private address available without memorizing it.

Save the Contact in the Correct Email Account

Save the contact in the same email account or contact list your authorized sender uses.

If several employees use Revilope, each employee may need to save the appropriate contact in their own email account.

Only share a private Revilope contact with staff who are approved to use the business’s review-request workflow.

Do Not Edit the Saved Email Address

The private address must remain exactly as provided by Revilope.

Do not:

Shorten the address.
Remove part of the address.
Change the characters after the plus sign.
Add spaces.
Replace the domain.
Attempt to create a more memorable version.

Changing any part of the address may prevent Revilope from identifying the correct business.

Update Saved Contacts After Business Changes

If a business is deleted and recreated, the old private BCC address may no longer work.

Remove the old contact and use Save Contact on the new business card.

If you rename a business or location, the contact name saved in your email application may not update automatically. Rename the saved contact or save a new copy so staff can identify it correctly.

Understanding Your Dashboard

Your Revilope dashboard is the main place to manage your businesses, send requests, monitor usage, and review request activity.

Plan and Usage Summary

The plan area may show:

Your current plan.
The number of businesses used and allowed.
The number of requests used and remaining.
A progress indicator for your request allowance.
A link to view or manage your plan.

Scheduled requests may reserve capacity from your allowance before they are sent. This prevents several submissions made at the same time from exceeding your plan limit.

Business Cards

Each business card may display:

The business name.
The business website.
The current business status.
The private Revilope BCC address.
A copy icon for the BCC address.
A Save Contact button.
The business’s current request usage.
The number of verified senders.
The saved follow-up delay.
A manual request button.
An Edit button.
A Send Test button.
Pause, resume, and delete controls.

Activity Section

The Activity section shows requests created through BCC automation and manual submissions.

A request record may show:

The date and time it was created.
The associated business.
A masked customer email address.
Whether the request came from BCC automation or a manual submission.
The current request status.
The scheduled sending time.
The sent time, when available.

Customer email addresses are masked in the visible Activity list to reduce unnecessary exposure of complete customer information.

How to Send Your First BCC Request

Open your normal business email account.
Create a new email.
Place one eligible customer email address in the To field.
Write the normal customer email you intended to send.
Open the BCC field.
Begin typing the saved Revilope contact name for the correct business.
Select the correct Revilope contact.
Confirm that the complete private Revilope address appears in BCC.
Confirm that the email is being sent from a verified authorized sender.
Send the email.
Allow several minutes for mailbox processing.
Open Revilope and check the Activity section.

If you have not saved the contact yet, copy the private address from the correct business card and paste it into BCC.

If the request is accepted, it should appear as Scheduled and display the expected sending time in your selected timezone.

How to Send Your First Manual Request

Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the correct business.
Select the manual request option.
Enter one eligible customer email address.
Choose whether to send as soon as possible or use the saved delay.
Submit the request.
Review the confirmation or submission result.
Check the Activity section.

After you are comfortable with the process, you can enter multiple customer addresses in a manual submission. Revilope processes each eligible address as an individual request.

Important Rules for Your First Requests

Send BCC Emails to One Customer at a Time

The BCC workflow is designed for an original email sent directly to one customer.

If multiple customer recipients appear in the original email, Revilope may reject the request because it cannot safely determine which person should receive the review follow-up.

Use the Correct Saved Revilope Contact

Every business has a different private Revilope address.

The address determines which business name, email template, Google review link, sender list, and follow-up delay Revilope uses.

Always select the saved contact for the correct business or location.

Before sending, confirm the contact name and complete BCC address.

Do Not Rely on Memory

Do not attempt to remember or manually recreate the private BCC address.

Use one of the following methods:

Select the saved Revilope contact.
Use Save Contact from the business card.
Use the copy icon and paste the address into BCC.

Send From a Verified Address

An address showing Verification Pending is not ready for BCC automation.

Complete sender verification and confirm that the dashboard shows the sender as verified before sending your first automatic request.

Send Requests Only to Genuine Customers

Revilope should be used to request honest feedback from people who had a real experience with your business.

Do not use Revilope for:

Purchased email lists.
Rented email lists.
Scraped email addresses.
Unrelated marketing prospects.
Fake customers.
Employees pretending to be customers.
People who previously unsubscribed.

Do Not Ask for a Specific Rating

Ask customers for honest feedback.

Do not require a positive review, ask specifically for five stars, offer a reward in exchange for a review, or direct only satisfied customers to Google.

Check Activity After Sending

Adding Revilope to BCC does not guarantee that a request will be created.

Revilope may skip or reject a request because of:

An unverified sender.
An unauthorized sender.
An inactive or paused business.
An invalid or inactive BCC address.
Multiple customer recipients.
A duplicate or recent request.
A customer unsubscribe.
A plan limit.
An invalid recipient.
An automated, bulk, bounced, or suspicious message.

How Monthly Request Usage Works

BCC requests and manual requests share the same monthly allowance.

For example, the Pro plan includes 100 requests per month. If you create 70 BCC requests and 20 manual requests, you have 10 requests remaining for the billing period.

A request may count against your available allowance when it is accepted and scheduled, not only after it has been sent. This reserves the capacity needed to send the request later.

Unused requests do not roll over to the next billing period.

Requests that are cancelled or permanently fail before successful handoff may be returned to the allowance, depending on the final request status.

How Revilope Protects Customer Information

Revilope is designed to process the minimum information required for the BCC workflow.

Revilope may process email-header information such as:

The sender’s email address.
The direct customer recipient.
The private Revilope BCC address.
The message identifier.
Routing and authentication information.
Indicators that the message may be automated, bulk, bounced, or suspicious.

Revilope does not intentionally retrieve or use the body of the original customer email or its attachments to create the review request.

The inbound mailbox copy is designed to be deleted after processing.

Customer email addresses stored in request and suppression records are encrypted, and customer addresses shown in the visible dashboard are masked.

Do not place sensitive personal information in email subject lines, recipient display names, or other email headers.

Common Setup Mistakes to Avoid

Entering a general Google search link instead of the direct review link.
Sending from an email address that has not been verified.
Using an email alias that does not match the authorized sender.
Placing multiple customer addresses in the original email.
Using the private BCC address for the wrong business.
Typing the private BCC address manually.
Saving several locations using the same generic contact name.
Selecting the wrong saved Revilope contact.
Continuing to use an old contact after a business was deleted and recreated.
Publishing the private BCC address publicly.
Forgetting to include the review button in the email template.
Using an unmonitored reply-to email address.
Selecting a delay that regularly causes inconvenient delivery times.
Sending live requests before testing the Google review link.
Assuming a request was scheduled without checking Activity.
Attempting to send after reaching the monthly plan limit.

Getting Started Checklist

Account Setup

Create your Revilope account.
Choose the appropriate plan.
Confirm that your account email is accurate.
Select the correct account timezone.

Business Setup

Add your business name.
Add the owner or representative name.
Add the business website.
Add a monitored reply-to email address.
Add the complete business mailing address.
Add and test the direct Google review link.
Select Save Contact on the business card.
Save the contact using a clear business or location name.

Email Setup

Write the email subject.
Write the review-request message.
Add the review button where required.
Choose the review button text.
Select the follow-up delay.

Sender Setup

Add the exact email address used to contact customers.
Open the sender verification email.
Complete verification.
Confirm that the dashboard shows the sender as verified.

Saved Contact Setup

The contact was saved in the email account used to contact customers.
The contact name includes the business or location.
The complete private Revilope address was saved without changes.
The contact appears when its name is entered in the BCC field.
Staff know which saved contact belongs to each business.

Final Testing

Send yourself a test email.
Check the desktop layout.
Check the mobile layout.
Click the review button.
Confirm that the correct Google Business Profile opens.
Reply to the test email.
Confirm that the reply reaches the correct inbox.

First Live Request

Choose BCC automation or a manual request.
Use one eligible customer for the first request.
Use the correct business profile.
Send from a verified sender.
Select the correct saved Revilope contact in BCC.
Check the Activity section after submission.
Confirm the scheduled time and request status.

You Are Ready to Continue When

Your business profile is complete.
Your Google review link opens the correct business.
Your authorized sender is verified.
Your private Revilope BCC contact has been saved.
The saved contact clearly identifies the correct business or location.
Your email template looks correct.
Your reply-to address works.
Your follow-up delay is selected.
Your test email was received successfully.

Next Step

Continue to the Add Your First Business section for a detailed explanation of every business-profile field and how each setting affects the review request your customer receives.

Compare Revilope Plans

Need Help Getting Started?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include your account email, business name, and a clear description of the step you are having trouble completing.

Do not send customer passwords, payment-card information, private BCC addresses, or unnecessary sensitive information.

Add Your First Business

Your business profile controls how Revilope identifies your company, who is permitted to trigger review requests, what customers receive, where replies are sent, which Google review page opens, and how long Revilope waits before sending each request.

Every business you add receives its own private Revilope BCC address. That address connects incoming customer emails to the correct business profile, email template, Google review link, authorized senders, and follow-up delay.

After creating the business, use the Save Contact button on the business card to save the private BCC address in your email or contacts application. You are not expected to remember or manually type the private address each time you contact a customer.

Complete each field carefully before sending live requests. Incorrect information can cause customers to receive the wrong business name, an invalid review link, or replies to be directed to the wrong inbox.

Before You Add the Business

Have the following information ready:

The public name of the business.
The name of the owner, manager, or representative who should appear in the review request.
The business website.
A monitored reply-to email address.
The business mailing address.
The direct Google review link.
The email address used to contact customers.
The email subject customers should see.
The review-request message.
The text that should appear on the review button.
The delay Revilope should use before sending requests.

You should also confirm that your current plan has room for another business.

Revilope business limits are:

Starter includes 1 business.
Pro includes 1 business.
Pro Plus includes up to 3 businesses.
Agency includes up to 10 businesses.

View Revilope Plans

How to Add a Business

Sign in to your Revilope account.
Open your Revilope dashboard.
Select the option to add a business.
Enter the business information.
Add the direct Google review link.
Choose the reply-to email address.
Enter the business mailing address.
Choose the follow-up delay.
Write the review-request subject and message.
Choose the review button text.
Add at least one authorized sender.
Save the business.
Select Save Contact on the new business card.
Save or import the private BCC contact into the email account used to contact customers.
Open the authorized sender verification email.
Complete sender verification.
Send yourself a test email.
Confirm that the business information and Google review link are correct.

Business Name

Enter the public name customers already recognize.

The business name may appear in the review-request email, the sender name, your dashboard, template placeholders, and the contact generated by the Save Contact button.

Use the customer-facing business name rather than an internal account number, legal abbreviation, or location code that customers may not understand.

For example, use:

Greenway Dental
Northside Auto Repair
Oakridge Physiotherapy

Avoid entries such as:

Client 14
Location B
Store 0047
Internal Operations Account

If the business has multiple locations, include enough location information to distinguish them.

For example:

Greenway Dental Mississauga
Greenway Dental Oakville

This reduces the risk of using the wrong review link, template, or saved BCC contact for a customer.

Owner or Representative Name

Enter the name of the person or team that should appear in the review request.

You may use:

The business owner.
A manager.
A customer-service representative.
A department name.
A team name.

Examples include:

Sarah
Michael, Owner
The Greenway Dental Team
Customer Care

Choose a name that customers will recognize and trust.

Do not use a person’s name without permission or create the impression that a specific person personally sent the request when that would be misleading.

Business Website

Enter the main website for the business.

Use the complete website address, including https://.

Example:

https://example.com

The website may be used in your review-request template if you include the business website placeholder.

Before saving:

Open the website in a new browser tab.
Confirm that the address is spelled correctly.
Confirm that it belongs to the business you are adding.
Confirm that the website uses a secure https:// address.

Do not enter a social media profile unless it is the business’s primary website and you intentionally want customers directed there.

Reply-To Email Address

The reply-to email address is where customer replies should be delivered.

When a customer replies to a Revilope review-request email, the reply should go directly to the business rather than to Revilope.

Use an inbox that is:

Actively monitored.
Owned or controlled by the business.
Appropriate for customer questions or concerns.
Protected by a secure password.

Examples include:

hello@example.com
support@example.com
office@example.com
customerservice@example.com

Avoid using:

An inbox no one checks.
A former employee’s email address.
A personal email address unrelated to the business.
A no-reply address unless you intentionally do not want customers to reply.

After saving the business, send yourself a test email and reply to it. Confirm that the reply arrives in the correct inbox.

Business Mailing Address

Enter the valid mailing address associated with the business.

The mailing address may appear in the footer of review-request emails and helps identify the business responsible for the message.

Use the complete address, including:

Street number and street name.
Unit or suite number when applicable.
City.
Province or state.
Postal code or ZIP code.
Country when appropriate.

If the business does not receive mail at its public storefront, use a valid business mailing address that the business is legally permitted to use.

Do not enter an incomplete, fictional, or unrelated address.

Google Review Link

Enter the direct Google review link for the exact business and location being added.

This is the destination customers reach when they select the review button.

Before saving the link:

Copy the review link from the business’s Google Business Profile.
Open a private or incognito browser window.
Paste the link into the browser.
Confirm that it opens the correct business.
Confirm that it opens the correct location.
Confirm that the customer can begin writing a review.

Do not use:

A general Google search-results page.
A Google Maps search for the business name.
A link to the business website.
A private Google Business Profile management link.
A review link belonging to another location.

If the business has several locations, test each review link separately before adding it to Revilope.

A wrong review link can cause customers to review the wrong location or another business entirely.

Follow-Up Delay

The follow-up delay determines how long Revilope waits before sending the review request.

Available options include:

1 hour.
4 hours.
12 hours.
24 hours.
2 days.
3 days.
7 days.

BCC-triggered requests automatically use the saved delay for the business.

Manual requests may allow you to choose between sending as soon as possible and using the saved delay.

Choosing the Right Delay

Choose a delay based on how long customers need to complete or evaluate the experience.

Use 1 to 4 hours for short, completed experiences such as pickups, quick appointments, or simple in-person services.
Use 12 to 24 hours for general customer service, appointments, completed repairs, and professional services.
Use 2 to 3 days when customers need more time to evaluate the result.
Use 7 days for services or products that require a longer experience before meaningful feedback can be provided.

Consider when your business normally sends customer emails.

For example, a 12-hour delay applied to an email sent at 5:00 p.m. may schedule the review request for approximately 5:00 a.m. the next day.

A 24-hour delay is a practical starting point for many businesses because it generally delivers the request at a similar time on the following day.

Email Subject

The email subject is the first part of the review request customers see.

Keep it short, recognizable, and connected to the customer’s experience.

Examples include:

How was your experience with {business_name}?
Thank you for choosing {business_name}
Could you share your feedback?
We would appreciate your review
Tell us about your experience

Avoid subject lines that:

Ask specifically for five stars.
Promise a reward.
Create false urgency.
Suggest that the customer has already left a review.
Impersonate a warning, invoice, or account notice.
Use excessive capitalization or punctuation.

The subject should make it clear that the email is a request for feedback from a business the customer recognizes.

Review-Request Message

The review-request message should thank the customer and make it easy to understand what you are asking them to do.

A strong message usually includes:

A short thank-you.
A request for honest feedback.
A brief explanation of why feedback matters.
One clear review button.

Keep the message focused. Long promotional emails can distract customers from the review request.

A recommended message is:

Thank you for choosing {business_name}. We hope you had a great experience with us.

If you have a moment, we would appreciate your honest feedback. Your review helps us understand what we are doing well and where we can improve.

{review_button}

Thank you for your time.

Ask for Honest Feedback

Your message should invite genuine feedback from eligible customers.

Do not:

Ask only happy customers to leave a public review.
Request a five-star rating.
Tell the customer what to write.
Offer a discount, gift, refund, contest entry, or other reward for a review.
Pressure the customer to change or remove a negative review.
Redirect dissatisfied customers away from the public review page.

Revilope is intended to support honest review requests, not review gating or rating manipulation.

Template Placeholders

Revilope supports the following placeholders in your review-request template:

{business_name}
{owner_name}
{business_website}
{review_button}

Placeholders are replaced with the saved business information when Revilope prepares the request.

For example:

Thank you for choosing {business_name}.

May appear to the customer as:

Thank you for choosing Greenway Dental.

Enter placeholders exactly as shown.

Changing the brackets, capitalization, spelling, or underscores may prevent the placeholder from working.

The Review Button Placeholder

Place {review_button} where you want the review button to appear in the email.

The button uses:

The Google review link saved for the business.
The review button text entered in the business settings.

If the review button placeholder is omitted, the email may not display the main review button where expected.

Review Button Text

The review button text should clearly explain what happens when the customer selects it.

Recommended examples include:

Leave a Review
Share Your Feedback
Review Us on Google
Write a Review

Avoid vague text such as:

Click Here
Continue
Learn More
Submit

The customer should understand that the button opens the business’s review page.

Authorized Senders

An authorized sender is an email address permitted to trigger BCC review requests for the business.

Add the exact email address your business uses to contact customers.

Examples include:

hello@example.com
sales@example.com
office@example.com

After the business is saved, Revilope sends a verification email to each newly added sender.

The sender must open the email and complete verification before BCC requests can be triggered reliably.

Use the Exact Sending Address

Email aliases and shared inboxes may send from a different underlying address.

For example, an employee may believe they are sending from sales@example.com while the message headers identify employee@example.com.

If an automatic request is rejected as unauthorized, inspect the actual From address used by the original email.

Authorized Sender Limits

Your sender limit depends on your plan:

Starter includes 1 authorized sender.
Pro includes 1 authorized sender.
Pro Plus includes 3 authorized senders.
Agency includes 10 authorized senders.

Compare Revilope Plans

Only Add Approved Team Members

Authorized senders may include:

Business owners.
Managers.
Sales staff.
Customer-service staff.
Office administrators.
Approved contractors or representatives.

Do not add an address unless the person is authorized to trigger review requests for the business.

What Happens After You Save the Business

After the business is created, Revilope generates a unique private BCC address for it.

The business card may then show:

The business name.
The website.
The business status.
The private BCC address.
A copy icon for the BCC address.
A Save Contact button.
The number of requests associated with the business.
The number of verified senders.
The selected follow-up delay.
A manual request option.
An Edit option.
A Send Test option.
Pause, resume, and delete controls.

Saving the business does not automatically mean BCC automation is ready.

You must still:

Save or import the private BCC contact.
Complete sender verification.
Send a test email.
Test the Google review link.
Confirm the reply-to address.
Review the follow-up delay.

Save Your Private BCC Contact

Select Save Contact on the business card after creating the business.

The Save Contact action allows you to save the complete private Revilope BCC address in your email or contacts application.

This means you can select a recognizable contact name in the BCC field instead of remembering, copying, or manually typing the private address every time.

How to Save the Contact

Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the business you just created.
Select Save Contact next to Edit.
Open the contact file or contact prompt provided by your browser or device.
Review the contact name.
Confirm that the complete private Revilope email address is included.
Save or import the contact into the account used for customer emails.
Create a new email.
Open the BCC field.
Begin typing the saved contact name.
Select the correct contact.
Confirm that the complete private address appears in BCC.

The exact process may vary depending on your browser, device, contacts application, and email provider.

Recommended Contact Names

Use a contact name that clearly identifies the business or location.

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Oakville
Revilope Reviews – Northside Auto Repair

Do not save several different business addresses under one generic name such as:

Revilope

A generic name makes it easier for staff to select the wrong location.

Why Saving the Contact Is Recommended

Saving the private address helps:

Prevent typing mistakes.
Prevent missing characters.
Reduce the need to open the dashboard before every customer email.
Make BCC automation faster for staff.
Identify the correct business or location.
Reduce the risk of using the wrong review link.

Save It in the Correct Account

Save the contact in the email account or contacts application used by the verified authorized sender.

If several employees contact customers, each employee may need to save the contact in their own account.

A contact saved on one employee’s device or Google, Microsoft, or Apple account may not automatically appear for another employee.

Do Not Change the Private Email Address

You may rename the visible contact, but do not edit the private email address stored inside it.

Do not:

Shorten the address.
Remove part of the address.
Change the characters after the plus sign.
Add spaces.
Replace the domain.
Create your own memorable variation.

Changing any part of the address may prevent Revilope from identifying the correct business.

If the Contact Does Not Appear in Your Email

Check:

Which contacts account received the saved contact.
Which email account is currently open.
Whether contact synchronization is enabled.
Whether the email application needs to be refreshed.
Whether the contact was saved only on another device.

You can use the copy icon on the business card while resolving the saved-contact issue.

Your Private Revilope BCC Address

The private BCC address connects an incoming email to the correct business.

When Revilope receives a message at that address, it can identify which business settings should be used.

The private address should only be used by approved members of the business.

Do not:

Publish it on your website.
Post it on social media.
Add it to a public directory.
Use it as a customer-support address.
Subscribe it to newsletters or mailing lists.
Share it with unauthorized people.
Publish or publicly share the downloaded contact file.

Use Save Contact for regular use and the copy icon when you need to paste the address directly.

Do not type the address manually unless there is no other option.

Send a Test Email

Send yourself a test before using the business with live customers.

The test should allow you to confirm:

The business name is correct.
The subject line is correct.
The message is formatted properly.
The placeholders were replaced correctly.
The review button is visible.
The button text is correct.
The Google review link opens the correct business.
The reply-to address works.
The mailing address is accurate.
The email looks good on desktop and mobile.

Test emails do not count toward your monthly request allowance.

The test subject may include [Test] so that it is not confused with a live customer request.

Verify the Authorized Sender

Check the inbox of the email address you added as an authorized sender.

If the verification email is not visible, check:

Spam.
Junk.
Promotions.
Quarantine.
Shared mailbox folders.

Open the verification email and select the verification link.

Return to Revilope and confirm that the sender shows as verified.

Do not begin relying on BCC automation while the sender still shows as pending.

Review the Business Before Sending Live Requests

Before using the business with customers, confirm all of the following:

The business name is customer-facing and accurate.
The owner or representative name is appropriate.
The website works.
The reply-to inbox is monitored.
The mailing address is complete.
The Google review link opens the correct location.
The email subject is clear.
The message asks for honest feedback.
The review button appears correctly.
The authorized sender is verified.
The follow-up delay is appropriate.
The test email was received successfully.
The private BCC contact has been saved.
The saved contact name identifies the correct business or location.
The private email address inside the contact has not been edited.

Send a Controlled BCC Test

After saving the contact and verifying the sender, send one controlled BCC request before making the workflow part of your normal business process.

Open the verified business email account.
Create a new email.
Place one eligible customer in the To field.
Open the BCC field.
Begin typing the saved Revilope contact name.
Select the contact for the correct business.
Confirm that the complete private address appears.
Send the email.
Wait several minutes.
Open Activity in Revilope.
Confirm that the request appears for the correct business.
Review its status and scheduled time.

Adding Multiple Businesses

Create a separate Revilope business profile for each distinct business, brand, or location that requires its own review link or customer-facing identity.

Separate profiles are recommended when businesses have different:

Google Business Profiles.
Review links.
Business names.
Locations.
Reply-to inboxes.
Mailing addresses.
Email templates.
Authorized senders.
Follow-up delays.

Each business receives its own private BCC address and its own Save Contact action.

Using the wrong business’s BCC contact can cause the customer to receive the wrong template or be directed to the wrong review page.

Save Each Business Under a Different Contact Name

For example:

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Oakville
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Burlington

Before sending a customer email, confirm that the saved contact matches the location the customer visited.

Editing the Business Later

You can edit a business after it has been created.

Use Edit when you need to change:

The business name.
The owner or representative.
The website.
The reply-to address.
The mailing address.
The Google review link.
The subject line.
The message.
The button text.
The delay.
The authorized senders.

After making a significant change, save the business and send another test email.

Requests that were already scheduled may continue using the template and settings captured when they were created.

Make important changes before scheduling additional live requests.

Editing the Business Name and Saved Contact

Changing the business name in Revilope may not automatically rename the contact already saved in Gmail, Outlook, Apple Contacts, or another contacts application.

After renaming a business:

Open the existing saved contact.
Rename it to match the updated business or location.
Confirm that the private email address remains unchanged.
Notify staff who use the contact.

You may also remove the old saved contact and select Save Contact again.

If a Business Is Deleted and Recreated

If you delete a business and later create a replacement, the replacement may receive a different private BCC address.

The old saved contact may no longer work.

After recreating a business:

Remove the old Revilope contact from your email and contacts applications.
Remove the old address from saved drafts and email templates.
Open the new Revilope business card.
Select Save Contact.
Save the new contact using a clear business or location name.
Send a controlled BCC test.
Confirm the result in Activity.

Common Business Setup Mistakes

Using the legal corporate name when customers know a different public brand name.
Entering a general Google search link instead of the direct review link.
Using the review link for the wrong location.
Entering an inbox that is not monitored as the reply-to address.
Adding an incomplete mailing address.
Adding a sender but not completing verification.
Adding an alias that does not match the actual From address.
Forgetting to include the review button placeholder.
Writing a message that asks specifically for five stars.
Selecting a delay that causes requests to arrive at inconvenient times.
Sending live requests before testing the review button.
Creating one profile for several locations that have different review pages.
Typing the private BCC address manually.
Saving several business contacts under the same generic name.
Editing the private address inside the saved contact.
Saving the contact to an account staff do not use.
Continuing to use an old contact after deleting and recreating a business.
Assuming a Revilope business-name change automatically renames saved contacts.

Saved Contact Troubleshooting

The Save Contact Button Downloads a File

Open the downloaded contact file and follow the prompts provided by your device or contacts application.

Choose the contacts account connected to the email account used for customer messages.

The Contact Does Not Appear in BCC

Confirm that:

The contact was successfully saved.
It was saved to the correct Google, Microsoft, Apple, or device account.
The email application uses the same contacts account.
Contact synchronization is enabled.
The email application has been refreshed.

The Contact Opens the Wrong Business

The wrong business contact may have been saved or selected.

Compare the private address inside the contact with the address shown on the correct Revilope business card.

Delete the incorrect contact and select Save Contact from the correct business.

The Saved Address Was Edited

Delete the edited contact and save a new copy from the Revilope business card.

Do not attempt to repair or recreate the private address manually.

An Old Contact Is Still Being Suggested

Email applications may remember previously used recipient addresses.

Remove the old contact and delete the outdated autocomplete suggestion when your email provider allows it.

Then select Save Contact on the current business card and test the new contact.

Business Setup Checklist

The correct public business name has been entered.
The owner or representative name is appropriate.
The website address opens correctly.
The reply-to inbox is monitored.
The mailing address is complete.
The direct Google review link opens the correct location.
The follow-up delay has been selected.
The email subject is clear.
The message is short and asks for honest feedback.
The review button placeholder has been added.
The review button text is clear.
The correct sending address has been added.
The authorized sender has completed verification.
The Save Contact button has been used.
The contact was saved to the correct email or contacts account.
The saved contact name clearly identifies the business or location.
The private address inside the contact has not been edited.
A test email has been received.
The review button has been tested.
The reply-to address has been tested.
A controlled BCC request appeared in Activity.

You Are Ready to Continue When

The business profile is complete.
The Google review link opens the correct business and location.
The authorized sender is verified.
The review-request template has been tested.
The reply-to address works.
The follow-up delay is appropriate.
The private Revilope contact has been saved.
The saved contact clearly identifies the correct business or location.
The complete private address appears when the contact is selected in BCC.

Next Step

Continue to the Find Your Google Review Link section for detailed instructions on locating, testing, and adding the correct Google review link for your business.

Need Help Adding a Business?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include your account email, the business name, and a clear description of the field or step you need help with.

If the issue involves Save Contact, also include the email or contacts application you are using and whether the contact was downloaded, imported, or saved successfully.

Do not send account passwords, customer passwords, payment-card details, private contact files, private BCC addresses, or unnecessary sensitive information.

Find Your Google Review Link

Your Google review link is the destination Revilope places behind the review button in your customer emails. When a customer selects the button, the link should take them directly to the correct Google Business Profile so they can share their experience.

Adding the correct link is one of the most important parts of setting up your business. Revilope sends the link you provide and does not automatically search for, select, or verify your Google Business Profile.

Before sending live review requests, copy the official review link from Google, add it to the correct Revilope business, and test it carefully.

What Is a Google Review Link?

A Google review link is a shareable link connected to a specific Google Business Profile.

It allows customers to move from your Revilope email to the Google review experience without having to:

Search for your business manually.
Choose between businesses with similar names.
Search for the Reviews section.
Navigate through several Google Maps screens.

The review link should belong to the exact business and location for which the customer received service.

If your company has several locations, each location may have its own Google Business Profile and its own review link. Create a separate Revilope business profile for each location that uses a different review destination.

Why the Correct Review Link Matters

Revilope uses the Google review link saved in your business profile whenever it prepares a review request.

If the link is incorrect, customers may be sent to:

The wrong business.
The wrong location.
A general Google search page.
A Google Maps listing without a clear review prompt.
A private business-management page.
A broken or incomplete address.

A customer who reaches the wrong page may leave the review for the wrong location, abandon the process, or become confused about which business contacted them.

Always test the link before sending live requests and test it again whenever the business listing, location, name, or Google Business Profile changes.

Use Google’s Official Review Link

Google provides an official tool inside your Business Profile for copying a review-request link.

For Google’s current instructions, visit:

Google Business Profile Help: Create a Google Link or QR Code to Request Reviews

Google may update the appearance or wording of its Business Profile controls over time. If the buttons in your account look different from the steps below, refer to the official Google help page for the most current instructions.

How to Get Your Google Review Link

Sign in to the Google account that manages the business’s Google Business Profile.
Open the Google Business Profile for the correct business and location.
Select Read Reviews.
Select Get More Reviews.
Find the review link provided by Google.
Select Copy.
Keep the link available so you can paste it into Revilope.

Make sure you are managing the correct business before copying the link. This is especially important if your Google account manages several companies or locations.

Confirm the Correct Business and Location

Before copying the link, check the business information shown in Google.

Confirm:

The business name.
The street address or service area.
The city.
The phone number.
The website.
Any location name used to distinguish one branch from another.

Businesses with similar names can easily be confused. A company with locations in several cities should not use one location’s review link for every customer unless all customers are intentionally meant to review that same profile.

Example

Suppose Greenway Dental has locations in Mississauga and Oakville.

The Mississauga Revilope business should use the review link for the Mississauga Google Business Profile.

The Oakville Revilope business should use the review link for the Oakville Google Business Profile.

Each location should have its own:

Revilope business profile.
Private Revilope BCC address.
Google review link.
Business mailing address.
Email template when different wording is required.
Authorized senders when different team members are involved.

Do Not Copy a General Search Link

A general Google search-results link is not the same as the official review-request link.

For example, do not search for your business on Google and copy the entire address from the browser simply because the business appears in the results.

A search-results link may:

Contain unnecessary search terms.
Behave differently on another device.
Show several businesses with similar names.
Open a general results page rather than the review form.
Depend on your current browser session or location.

Use the link provided through the Get More Reviews option in your Google Business Profile.

Do Not Use Your Business Website Link

Your website address and your Google review link serve different purposes.

A website link may take customers to your homepage, contact page, or services page, but it does not necessarily take them to the Google review experience.

Enter your website in the Business Website field and enter the Google review link in the Google Review Link field.

Do not place the same website address in both fields unless the website genuinely redirects customers to the intended Google review page and you have intentionally chosen that setup.

Do Not Use a Private Google Management Link

Make sure you copy the public review-request link provided by Google rather than a private page used to manage your Business Profile.

A private management page may:

Ask the customer to access an account they do not manage.
Display business-management controls instead of a review form.
Fail for anyone not signed in to your Google account.
Reveal an incorrect or confusing page.

The safest approach is to use Google’s Get More Reviews tool and select Copy from the link Google provides.

Add the Google Review Link to Revilope

After copying the link from Google, add it to the appropriate Revilope business.

Sign in to Revilope.
Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the correct business.
Select Edit.
Find the Google Review Link field.
Remove any old or incorrect link currently in the field.
Paste the link copied from Google.
Confirm that there are no extra spaces before or after the link.
Save the business.
Send yourself a test review request.
Select the review button in the test email.
Confirm that the correct Google Business Profile opens.

If you are adding a new business rather than editing an existing one, paste the link into the Google Review Link field during the initial business setup.

Paste the Complete Link

Copy and paste the entire link provided by Google.

Do not:

Delete part of the link.
Change its letters, numbers, or symbols.
Add punctuation to the end.
Include quotation marks.
Include introductory text in the link field.
Insert a line break in the middle of the link.

The Google Review Link field should contain only the complete web address.

Correct

Paste the complete link by itself into the Google Review Link field.

Incorrect

Do not enter text such as “Click here to review us” in the link field.

The customer-facing wording belongs in your email message or Review Button Text field. The Google Review Link field should contain only the destination address.

Avoid Unnecessary Link Shorteners

Use the official link supplied by Google whenever possible.

An unnecessary third-party link shortener adds another service between the customer and Google. If that service is unavailable, changes its policies, or flags the link, the customer may not reach the review page.

A direct Google link also makes the destination easier to recognize when testing your email.

How to Test the Review Link

Do not rely only on the fact that the link works while you are signed in to the Google account that manages the business.

Test the link in a way that more closely resembles the customer’s experience.

Copy the link from the Revilope business settings.
Open a private or incognito browser window.
Paste the link into the address bar.
Allow the page to load completely.
Confirm that the correct business name appears.
Confirm that the correct location appears.
Confirm that the page provides a clear path to leave a review.
Repeat the test on a mobile device.
Send a Revilope test email.
Select the review button inside the email.
Confirm that it opens the same correct destination.

Google may ask a customer to sign in before submitting a review. That is controlled by Google and does not necessarily mean the link is incorrect.

What to Check During Testing

Business Name

Make sure the public business name shown by Google matches the company the customer dealt with.

Location

Confirm the city, street address, service area, or other location details.

Review Experience

The customer should be able to reach the area where a review can be written without searching for the business again.

Desktop and Mobile

Test the link on both a computer and a phone. Many customers will open the review request from a mobile email application.

Signed-Out Experience

Use a private browser window to check that the link does not depend on your private Business Profile management session.

Send a Revilope Test Email

Testing the Google link directly is important, but you should also test it from the actual Revilope email.

Save the Google review link in the correct business profile.
Return to the Revilope dashboard.
Find the business.
Select Send Test.
Open the test email sent to your Revilope account email address.
Read the subject and message.
Select the review button.
Confirm that the correct Google Business Profile opens.
Repeat the test on a mobile device.

Test emails do not count toward your monthly request allowance.

Do not begin sending live requests until the review button has been tested successfully.

Google Review Links for Multiple Businesses

If your Revilope account manages several businesses, do not assume that one review link can be reused for all of them.

Each business should have the link for its own Google Business Profile.

Before saving each profile, compare:

The Revilope business name.
The Google Business Profile name.
The business location.
The private Revilope BCC address.
The Google review link.

Using the wrong private Revilope BCC address can cause the wrong business profile and review link to be used.

Recommended Naming for Multiple Locations

Use clear Revilope business names that make each location easy to identify.

Examples include:

Greenway Dental – Mississauga
Greenway Dental – Oakville
Greenway Dental – Burlington

Clear location names reduce errors when copying BCC addresses, sending manual requests, editing templates, or reviewing Activity.

Google Review Links for Service-Area Businesses

A service-area business may not display a public storefront address in the same way as a retail location.

Confirm the business name, service area, website, phone number, and other identifying details before copying the link.

The link should still connect customers to the correct Google Business Profile for the business that served them.

Google Review Links and QR Codes

Google may also allow you to create a QR code connected to your review link.

A QR code can be useful for:

Printed receipts.
Counter displays.
Business cards.
Invoices.
In-store signage.

Revilope does not require the QR code. Revilope uses the copied review link behind the email’s review button.

If you also want a QR code for printed material, follow the instructions on Google’s official help page. Google currently states that review QR codes must be generated from a computer browser rather than a mobile device.

Read Google’s Review Link and QR Code Instructions

Ask for Genuine Reviews

The Google review link should be shared with genuine customers who had a real experience with the business.

Do not use the link to:

Create fake reviews.
Ask people without a genuine customer experience to review the business.
Write reviews on behalf of customers.
Require customers to leave a positive rating.
Offer free or discounted goods or services in exchange for reviews.
Offer gifts, refunds, loyalty points, or contest entries in exchange for reviews.
Pressure customers to change or remove negative reviews.
Send only satisfied customers to Google while directing dissatisfied customers elsewhere.

Your Revilope message should ask for honest feedback rather than a particular rating.

Google states that reviews must reflect genuine experiences and prohibits offering incentives in exchange for posting, changing, or removing reviews.

When to Check Your Link Again

Test your Google review link periodically and whenever an important business change occurs.

Check it again after:

Changing the business name.
Moving to a new address.
Changing the service area.
Opening or closing a location.
Creating a new Google Business Profile.
Merging or separating business listings.
Changing who manages the Google Business Profile.
Making major changes to the business listing.
Receiving a customer report that the link is not working.

After replacing a link in Revilope, send another test email before sending additional live requests.

What Happens After You Change the Link?

After editing the Google Review Link field and saving the business, new requests should use the updated business settings.

Requests that were already created or scheduled may continue using information captured when they were originally created.

Make important link changes before creating additional live requests.

If you discover that an already scheduled request contains the wrong review destination, cancel the pending request where possible and create a new request after correcting and testing the link.

Troubleshooting the Google Review Link

The Link Opens the Wrong Business

You may have copied the link while managing another business or location.

Return to the Google account that manages the intended Business Profile.
Open the correct business and location.
Select Read Reviews.
Select Get More Reviews.
Copy the newly provided link.
Edit the correct Revilope business.
Replace the old link.
Save the business.
Send another Revilope test email.

The Link Opens a Google Search Page

You may have copied a search-results address rather than the official review-request link.

Return to your Google Business Profile and use the Get More Reviews option to copy the proper link.

The Link Opens Google Maps but Not a Clear Review Prompt

Confirm that you copied the review link supplied through the Get More Reviews option rather than a general Maps share link.

Replace the link in Revilope and test it again.

The Link Does Not Open

Check for:

Missing characters.
Extra spaces.
Quotation marks.
Punctuation added to the end.
A line break inserted into the link.
An incomplete copy.
A temporary Google or internet issue.

Copy a fresh link directly from Google rather than attempting to repair the broken link manually.

The Link Works for You but Not for Someone Else

Test it in a private browser window and on a device that is not signed in to the Google account that manages the business.

Make sure you did not use a private Business Profile management link.

The Customer Is Asked to Sign In

Google controls its own review-submission process and may require the customer to sign in to a Google account before posting a review.

Revilope cannot bypass Google’s account or review requirements.

The Review Button in the Email Does Nothing

Confirm that:

The Google Review Link field contains a complete link.
The business was saved after the link was added.
The review button placeholder is included in the email message where required.
You are viewing the most recent test email.
Your email application is not blocking links.

Edit the business, save it again, and send a fresh test email.

The Review Button Opens Another Revilope Business

Check whether the wrong business profile was edited or whether the wrong private BCC address was used.

Review each business separately and confirm that its saved Google review link matches its public business name and location.

The Business Does Not Appear in Google

Confirm that you are signed in to the Google account that manages the Business Profile and that you are viewing the intended business.

For assistance with Business Profile availability or access, use Google Business Profile Help.

Open Google Business Profile Help

Common Review Link Mistakes

Copying a general Google search address.
Copying a Google Maps directions link.
Copying a link to the business website.
Copying a private management page.
Using one location’s link for every location.
Editing or shortening the Google link unnecessarily.
Adding text or quotation marks to the link field.
Leaving spaces before or after the link.
Failing to save the business after pasting the link.
Testing only while signed in as the Business Profile manager.
Sending live requests before testing the email button.
Continuing to use an old link after the business listing changes.

Google Review Link Checklist

You are signed in to the Google account that manages the correct business.
You opened the correct Business Profile.
You confirmed the correct location.
You selected Read Reviews.
You selected Get More Reviews.
You copied the link supplied by Google.
You pasted the complete link into the correct Revilope business.
You removed any extra spaces or punctuation.
You saved the business.
You tested the link in a private browser window.
You tested the link on a mobile device.
You sent a Revilope test email.
You selected the button in the test email.
The correct business name appeared.
The correct location appeared.
The customer had a clear path to leave a review.

Next Step

Continue to the Verify Your Authorized Sender section to learn how to approve the email address that will trigger your automatic BCC review requests.

Need Help With Your Review Link?

For instructions on locating the link inside your Google Business Profile, visit Google’s official help page:

Create a Google Link or QR Code to Request Reviews

For help adding the link to Revilope, contact hello@revilope.com.

Include your Revilope account email, business name, and a description of what happens when you open the link. Do not send your Google password, Revilope password, payment details, or unnecessary customer information.

Verify Your Authorized Sender

An authorized sender is an email address that Revilope allows to trigger automatic review requests for a specific business.

Before Revilope accepts a BCC-triggered request, it checks the email address that sent the original customer message. The detected sender must be listed on the correct business profile and must have completed verification.

This verification step helps protect your private Revilope BCC address from being used by unknown or unauthorized people.

Why Sender Verification Is Required

Your private Revilope BCC address is designed to create review requests when approved members of your business use it.

Without sender verification, anyone who discovered or received the private BCC address could potentially attempt to trigger requests for your business.

Sender verification helps Revilope confirm that:

The sending address belongs to a person or inbox approved by the business.
The sender has access to the email account being authorized.
The original customer email came from a recognized business address.
Unknown senders cannot freely activate the business’s review workflow.
Each business can control which team members are permitted to trigger requests.

A sender that has not completed verification should not be expected to create automatic BCC requests.

What Counts as an Authorized Sender?

An authorized sender is the exact email address that appears as the sender of your original customer email.

Examples include:

hello@example.com
sales@example.com
support@example.com
appointments@example.com
owner@example.com

Each email address is treated separately.

For example, verifying hello@example.com does not automatically authorize sales@example.com.

If several employees send customer emails from different addresses, each address that needs to trigger Revilope requests must be added and verified, subject to your plan limit.

Authorized Sender Limits by Plan

The number of authorized senders available depends on your current Revilope plan.

Starter includes 1 authorized sender.
Pro includes 1 authorized sender.
Pro Plus includes 3 authorized senders.
Agency includes 10 authorized senders.

Each authorized sender is connected to a business profile.

View Revilope Plans and Sender Limits

Choose the Correct Sender Before Adding It

Before entering an authorized sender, confirm which email address your business actually uses to contact customers.

Do not assume that the email address visible in your email application is always the exact address identified in the outgoing message headers.

This is especially important when using:

Email aliases.
Shared mailboxes.
Delegated Gmail accounts.
Microsoft 365 shared inboxes.
Forwarding addresses.
Contact forms.
Customer relationship management systems.
Invoicing platforms.
Booking systems.
Support desk software.
Website-generated emails.

A system may display one address to the customer while sending the message through another underlying address.

Revilope evaluates the sender information contained in the email it receives. The address detected there must match a verified authorized sender for the business.

How to Add an Authorized Sender

Sign in to your Revilope account.
Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the business that the sender should be allowed to represent.
Select Edit.
Find the Authorized Senders field.
Enter the exact email address used to send customer emails.
Check the spelling carefully.
Save the business.
Open the inbox of the newly added sender.
Find the Revilope verification email.
Select the verification link.
Return to the Revilope dashboard.
Confirm that the sender now shows as verified.

The verification message is sent to the address you added. Access to that inbox is required to complete verification.

Enter the Exact Email Address

Sender verification applies to the exact address entered.

These addresses are different:

hello@example.com
sales@example.com
support@example.com
john@example.com

These addresses may also be treated differently depending on your email provider:

info@example.com
Info@example.com
info+sales@example.com
info@subdomain.example.com

Most email systems treat capitalization as equivalent, but you should still enter the address exactly as your business uses it.

Do not add:

A misspelled address.
An inbox that no longer exists.
An address you cannot access.
A customer’s email address.
The private Revilope BCC address.
An unrelated personal address unless it is genuinely used for the business.

What Happens After You Add the Sender?

When a new authorized sender is saved, Revilope sends a verification email to that address.

The sender remains unverified until the verification link is used successfully.

While verification is pending:

The sender may appear in the business settings.
The sender may be marked as pending.
Emails from that address may be rejected as unauthorized.
The address should not be relied upon for live BCC automation.

After successful verification:

The sender should display as verified.
The address can trigger BCC requests for that business.
The sender still remains subject to all other request checks.

Verification does not override:

Business status.
Plan limits.
Customer suppression.
Duplicate protection.
Cooldown protection.
Recipient validation.
Automatic or bulk-message filtering.

Finding the Verification Email

The verification email should be sent to the exact address added to the business profile.

Check the following locations:

Inbox.
Spam.
Junk.
Promotions.
Quarantine.
Clutter or Other folders.
Shared mailbox folders.
Security filtering portals.

Search the mailbox for:

Revilope.
Sender verification.
Verify your email.
hello@revilope.com.

Your organization’s email-security system may hold the message in quarantine even when it does not appear in the regular spam folder.

Complete Verification

Open the Revilope verification email and select the verification link.

The link confirms that the person completing verification has access to the authorized sender inbox.

After selecting the link:

Allow the verification page to load completely.
Confirm that the page reports a successful result.
Return to your Revilope dashboard.
Refresh the page if necessary.
Open the business settings.
Confirm that the sender is marked as verified.

Do not assume verification is complete simply because the email was opened. The verification link must be selected successfully.

Verified and Pending Statuses

Verification Pending

Verification Pending means the address has been added but has not yet completed the verification process.

A pending address is not ready to trigger automatic review requests.

Possible reasons include:

The verification email has not been opened.
The verification link has not been selected.
The email went to spam or quarantine.
The address was entered incorrectly.
The inbox does not exist.
The verification link did not load successfully.

Verified

Verified means the address completed the verification process and is approved to trigger requests for that business.

A verified sender must still:

Send from the exact approved address.
Use the correct business’s private BCC address.
Send to one eligible customer at a time.
Operate within the account’s plan limits.
Comply with duplicate and cooldown rules.
Avoid sending to suppressed customers.

Test the Verified Sender

After the sender shows as verified, test the BCC workflow before relying on it for normal customer activity.

Open the verified business email account.
Create a new email to one eligible test recipient.
Place the recipient in the To field.
Open the BCC field.
Copy the private BCC address from the correct Revilope business.
Paste the address into BCC.
Confirm that the From field shows the verified sender.
Send the email.
Allow several minutes for mailbox processing.
Open the Revilope Activity section.
Confirm that the request was accepted and scheduled.

For testing, use an eligible address that has not recently received a request and is not one of the business’s own sender or reply-to addresses.

Confirm the Actual From Address

The address selected in your email application may not always be the address Revilope detects.

This commonly occurs with:

Shared mailboxes.
Send As permissions.
Send on Behalf Of permissions.
Aliases.
Email forwarding services.
Website forms.
Automated invoicing tools.

For example, your customer may see:

sales@example.com

But the message may technically be sent by:

employee@example.com

If Revilope detects employee@example.com and only sales@example.com is verified, the request may be rejected as unauthorized.

Email Aliases

An alias is an additional email address that delivers to or sends through another mailbox.

Aliases can behave differently depending on the email provider.

Some providers place the alias in the From field. Others reveal the main mailbox address in the sender or routing headers.

If you use an alias:

Add the address customers normally see.
Complete verification.
Send a BCC test.
Check Revilope Activity.
If the sender is rejected, review the actual sender address used by the email provider.
Add and verify the actual detected address if appropriate and permitted by your plan.

Do not assume an alias will work until it has been tested.

Shared Mailboxes

A shared mailbox may be used by several employees while presenting one business address to customers.

Examples include:

sales@example.com
office@example.com
support@example.com

When using a shared mailbox, confirm whether messages are sent:

Directly from the shared address.
On behalf of the shared address.
From the employee’s personal business address.

If different employees produce different sender information, you may need to add and verify each actual sender, subject to the plan limit.

Delegated Email Accounts

Some email systems allow one person to send from another person’s inbox.

Delegated messages may identify:

The delegated inbox.
The person who sent the message.
Both addresses.

Test the exact workflow your staff will use.

A successful test from one employee does not guarantee that another employee’s delegated setup will produce the same sender information.

Automated Systems and Third-Party Platforms

Emails sent through customer-management, invoicing, booking, or support platforms may not come from the address you expect.

The system may use:

A provider-owned sending domain.
A bounce-management address.
A no-reply address.
A delegated service account.
Your business address only as the reply-to address.

Revilope also filters messages that appear automated, bulk, bounced, or system-generated.

For the most reliable BCC workflow, send the original customer email directly from the verified business mailbox.

Do not assume that adding Revilope to an automated platform’s BCC field will work unless you have tested that exact system and confirmed the result in Activity.

Adding Additional Team Members

If your plan includes more than one authorized sender, you can add approved team members to the business.

Each sender must:

Be added separately.
Receive a verification email.
Complete verification independently.
Send from the exact verified address.

Suitable authorized senders may include:

The business owner.
A manager.
A receptionist.
A sales representative.
A customer-service employee.
An office administrator.
An approved contractor.

Only add people who are permitted to trigger review requests for the business.

Sender Verification for Multiple Businesses

A sender may need to be added separately to each business profile it is permitted to represent.

For example, an agency employee managing three client businesses may need authorization on each relevant client profile.

Do not assume that verification on one business automatically grants access to another business.

Each business has its own:

Private BCC address.
Authorized sender list.
Email template.
Google review link.
Follow-up delay.

Removing an Authorized Sender

Remove a sender when that person or inbox should no longer be permitted to trigger review requests.

Common reasons include:

An employee leaves the company.
A contractor’s work ends.
A shared mailbox is retired.
An email address is replaced.
An inbox may have been compromised.
The sender was added to the wrong business.
You need to free capacity for another sender.

To remove a sender:

Open the Revilope dashboard.
Find the business.
Select Edit.
Find the Authorized Senders field.
Remove the email address.
Save the business.
Confirm that the address is no longer listed.

After removal, new BCC messages from that address should no longer be accepted as authorized requests for the business.

Change an Authorized Sender

If your business changes the inbox used for customer communication, update the sender before relying on the new address.

Add the new sender to the business.
Save the business.
Complete verification for the new address.
Send a test BCC email from the new address.
Confirm that the request appears in Activity.
Remove the old sender when it is no longer needed.

Do not remove the old sender before the new one is verified if your business still needs uninterrupted BCC automation.

What Unauthorized Sender Means

An Unauthorized Sender status means Revilope did not recognize the sender as a verified address for the business connected to the private BCC address.

Possible causes include:

The sender was never added.
The sender is still pending verification.
The email came from an alias not listed in Revilope.
The email provider used another underlying address.
The sender is authorized for a different business.
The wrong private BCC address was used.
The address was removed from the business.
The sender contains a spelling difference.

An unauthorized message does not create a live review request.

Troubleshooting a Missing Verification Email

If the verification email does not arrive, complete the following checks.

Confirm that the sender address was entered correctly.
Check the inbox.
Check spam and junk folders.
Check promotions or other filtered folders.
Check the organization’s quarantine system.
Search the mailbox for Revilope.
Confirm that the mailbox exists and can receive external email.
Ask the email administrator whether revilope.com is blocked.
Confirm that the business was saved after adding the sender.

Revilope currently sends sender verification when a new address is added. There may not be a separate resend-verification control in the dashboard.

If the address was entered incorrectly, remove it, add the correct address, save the business, and check the corrected inbox.

If the address is correct and the message still does not arrive, contact hello@revilope.com.

Troubleshooting a Verification Link

If the verification link does not work:

Make sure the entire link opened.
Try opening it in a standard browser.
Try copying and pasting the full link into the browser address bar.
Disable any email-security preview that may have altered the link.
Confirm that the verification email belongs to the correct sender.
Refresh the Revilope dashboard after using the link.

Do not forward the verification email to an unrelated person and ask them to approve an inbox they do not control.

Troubleshooting an Unauthorized Sender Status

If a BCC request shows Unauthorized Sender:

Open the business in Revilope.
Confirm that the sender is listed.
Confirm that it shows as verified.
Check which private BCC address was used.
Confirm that the private address belongs to the same business.
Check the From address in the original customer email.
Check whether the email was sent from an alias or shared mailbox.
Check whether a third-party platform sent the message.
Send a new test directly from the verified mailbox.
Check Activity again.

If a directly sent test works but a message from another platform does not, the third-party platform is likely using different sender information or producing a message Revilope identifies as automated.

Troubleshooting a Shared Mailbox

If staff use a shared address but requests are rejected:

Send a direct test from the shared mailbox.
Check whether the email application says From, Sent by, or On behalf of.
Review the actual sender shown in the original message details.
Add and verify the actual sending address if appropriate.
Repeat the BCC test.

If each employee sends through a separate underlying address, you may need a plan that supports additional authorized senders.

Compare Authorized Sender Limits

Troubleshooting a Sender That Was Previously Working

If a verified sender suddenly stops creating requests, check:

Whether the sender was removed from the business.
Whether the email account changed aliases.
Whether the email provider changed the From address.
Whether the business was paused.
Whether the business became plan-limited.
Whether the wrong BCC address was used.
Whether the message was sent through a new automated platform.
Whether the customer was suppressed or within the cooldown period.

The request status in Activity can help distinguish a sender problem from another type of rejection.

Protect Your Authorized Senders

An authorized sender can trigger review requests for your business. Protect access to every verified inbox.

Recommended security practices include:

Use a strong and unique password.
Enable multi-factor authentication where available.
Remove former employees promptly.
Review authorized senders regularly.
Do not share mailbox passwords.
Do not post verification links publicly.
Report suspected account compromise immediately.

If you believe a verified sender account has been compromised:

Change the email account password.
Sign out active sessions.
Enable or review multi-factor authentication.
Remove the sender from Revilope temporarily.
Review recent Revilope Activity.
Contact Revilope support.

Authorized Sender Best Practices

Add only the addresses that genuinely need to trigger requests.
Use business-controlled inboxes.
Verify every sender before live use.
Test each sender individually.
Test aliases and shared mailboxes before relying on them.
Remove former employees immediately.
Review the sender list whenever roles change.
Do not use personal addresses unless they are officially authorized for the business.
Do not share one mailbox password among several people.
Check Activity after the first BCC request from each sender.

Authorized Sender Checklist

The sender belongs to the correct business.
The email address is spelled correctly.
The inbox can receive external email.
The business was saved after adding the sender.
The Revilope verification email was received.
The verification link was selected.
The dashboard shows the sender as verified.
The actual From address matches the verified address.
The correct private BCC address was used.
A direct BCC test was completed.
The test request appeared in Activity.
Former or unnecessary senders have been removed.

You Are Ready to Continue When

Your intended customer-sending address is listed on the correct business.
The sender shows as verified.
You confirmed the actual From address.
You successfully sent a BCC test from that address.
The test request appeared in Activity without an Unauthorized Sender status.

Next Step

Continue to the Customize Your Review Request section to create the subject, message, button text, and business details your customers will receive.

Need Help Verifying a Sender?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The sender address you added.
Whether the sender shows as pending or verified.
Whether the verification email was received.
The request status shown in Activity.
Whether you are using an alias, shared mailbox, or third-party email platform.

Do not send your email password, Revilope password, verification token, payment details, or unnecessary customer information.

Customize Your Review Request

Your review-request template controls the separate email customers receive after Revilope accepts a BCC or manual request.

Each business can have its own subject line, message, review button text, Google review link, reply-to address, owner or representative name, website, mailing address, and follow-up delay.

Customizing the message allows the review request to sound like your business while Revilope handles the scheduling and delivery process.

Before sending live requests, review every field carefully and send yourself a test email. The customer should immediately recognize the business, understand why they are receiving the message, and have one clear way to leave honest feedback.

What Customers Receive

Revilope sends a separate review-request email using the settings saved for the selected business.

The email may include:

The business name.
The owner or representative name.
Your custom subject line.
Your custom review-request message.
A prominent review button.
The Google review link saved for the business.
The business reply-to address.
The business mailing address.
An unsubscribe link.
Revilope sending or branding information.

The review request is not a forwarded copy of the original email you sent to the customer.

Revilope creates a separate email using the template and business information you configured.

How to Customize the Review Request

Sign in to your Revilope account.
Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the business you want to customize.
Select Edit.
Review the business name and owner or representative name.
Confirm the reply-to email address.
Confirm the business website and mailing address.
Confirm the Google review link.
Enter the email subject.
Write the review-request message.
Add the review button placeholder where you want the button to appear.
Choose the review button text.
Select the follow-up delay.
Save the business.
Send yourself a test email.
Review the email on desktop and mobile.
Click the review button and confirm that it opens the correct business.
Reply to the test email and confirm that the reply reaches the correct inbox.

Business Name

The business name helps customers recognize who is requesting the review.

Use the public-facing name customers already know rather than an internal company code or account label.

Good examples include:

Greenway Dental
Northside Auto Repair
Oakridge Physiotherapy
Brightview Landscaping

Avoid names such as:

Client 004
Location B
Internal Review Account
Company Holding Corporation 1784

If your company has several locations, include the location where necessary.

Examples include:

Greenway Dental – Mississauga
Greenway Dental – Oakville
Northside Auto Repair – Downtown

The business name may be used inside your message when you include the business-name placeholder.

Owner or Representative Name

The owner or representative name can make the message feel more personal and recognizable.

You may use:

The business owner’s first name.
A manager’s name.
A customer-service representative’s name.
A department name.
A team name.

Examples include:

Sarah
Michael, Owner
The Greenway Dental Team
Customer Care
The Brightview Team

Use a name the customer is likely to recognize.

Do not use a person’s name without permission or make the request appear to come personally from someone who was not involved when that would be misleading.

Reply-To Email Address

The reply-to email address controls where customer replies are delivered.

When a customer replies to the review request, the reply should go directly to the business rather than to Revilope.

Use an inbox that:

Your team checks regularly.
Can receive customer questions or concerns.
Is controlled by the business.
Will remain active.

Suitable examples include:

hello@example.com
support@example.com
office@example.com
customerservice@example.com

Avoid using:

An inbox that is not monitored.
A former employee’s email address.
An unrelated personal inbox.
An address that blocks all incoming replies.

After saving the business, reply to the test email and confirm that the response arrives at the correct address.

Email Subject Line

The subject line is one of the first things the customer sees.

It should be short, clear, natural, and connected to the customer’s experience with the business.

Recommended subject-line examples include:

How was your experience with {business_name}?
Thank you for choosing {business_name}
Could you share your feedback?
We would appreciate your review
Tell us about your experience
We would value your feedback
Thank you for your recent visit

Keep the Subject Recognizable

The subject should make sense when the customer sees it without additional context.

A customer should not mistake the email for:

An invoice.
A payment warning.
An account-security alert.
A delivery failure.
An urgent legal notice.
A message from Google.

Avoid Misleading Subject Lines

Do not use subject lines such as:

Your account requires immediate attention
Your payment failed
You have already been approved
Google needs your response
Your five-star review is waiting
Claim your reward for reviewing us

The subject should accurately describe the purpose of the email.

Avoid Asking for a Specific Rating

Do not ask for five stars in the subject line.

Avoid examples such as:

Please leave us five stars
Can you give us a five-star review?
Help us keep our five-star rating
Five stars would mean a lot

Revilope should be used to request honest feedback rather than a predetermined rating.

Keep the Subject Short

Long subject lines may be shortened by email applications, especially on mobile devices.

A concise subject is easier to understand and less likely to look promotional.

Try to communicate the purpose within one clear sentence.

Review-Request Message

The message should thank the customer, explain why you are contacting them, and give them one clear next step.

A strong message generally contains:

A greeting or brief opening.
A thank-you for choosing the business.
A request for honest feedback.
A short explanation of why reviews matter.
The review button.
A brief closing.

Recommended Message Structure

Opening

Begin with a short thank-you or acknowledgment.

Examples include:

Thank you for choosing {business_name}.
Thank you for trusting us with your recent service.
We appreciate the opportunity to serve you.
Thank you for your recent visit to {business_name}.

Request for Feedback

Ask directly and politely for honest feedback.

Examples include:

If you have a moment, we would appreciate your honest feedback.
We would be grateful if you shared your experience.
Your feedback helps us understand what we are doing well and where we can improve.
Would you take a moment to tell us about your experience?

Review Button

Place the review button after the request for feedback.

The button should be the main action in the message.

Closing

End with a simple thank-you.

Examples include:

Thank you for your time.
We appreciate your feedback.
Thank you for supporting our business.
We appreciate the opportunity to serve you.

Recommended General Review Template

Thank you for choosing {business_name}. We hope you had a great experience with us.

If you have a moment, we would appreciate your honest feedback. Your review helps us understand what we are doing well and where we can improve.

{review_button}

Thank you for your time.

Short Review Template

Thank you for choosing {business_name}.

Would you take a moment to share your honest feedback about your experience?

{review_button}

We appreciate your time.

Friendly Review Template

Thank you for your recent visit to {business_name}.

We would love to hear about your experience. Your honest feedback helps our team continue improving and helps future customers learn more about our business.

{review_button}

Thank you for your support.

Professional Service Template

Thank you for trusting {business_name} with your recent service.

We value your feedback and would appreciate it if you shared your experience. Your comments help our team maintain a high standard of service.

{review_button}

Thank you for your time.

Home Service Template

Thank you for choosing {business_name} for your recent service.

We hope you are pleased with the completed work. If you have a moment, we would appreciate your honest feedback about your experience with our team.

{review_button}

Thank you for supporting our business.

Appointment-Based Business Template

Thank you for visiting {business_name}.

We hope you had a positive experience. Your honest feedback helps us improve the service we provide to every customer.

{review_button}

We appreciate your time.

Retail or Product Pickup Template

Thank you for choosing {business_name}.

We would appreciate hearing about your recent experience. If you have a moment, please share your honest feedback with us.

{review_button}

Thank you for your support.

Keep the Message Focused

The review request should have one main purpose: making it easy for the customer to share honest feedback.

Avoid adding unrelated content such as:

Several promotional offers.
A long company history.
Multiple service advertisements.
Several different buttons.
Newsletter signup requests.
Referral-program promotions.
Unrelated social media links.

Too many competing actions can distract the customer from the review button.

Recommended Message Length

Most review requests should be short enough to read without extensive scrolling.

A practical message usually contains two to four short paragraphs plus the review button.

Long messages may:

Feel overly promotional.
Reduce the visibility of the review button.
Be difficult to scan on mobile devices.
Make the request appear more complicated than it is.

Template Placeholders

Revilope supports placeholders that allow saved business information to appear automatically in the review-request email.

Available placeholders may include:

{business_name}
{owner_name}
{business_website}
{review_button}

Enter each placeholder exactly as shown.

Do not change:

The curly brackets.
The capitalization.
The spelling.
The underscores.

A modified placeholder may not be recognized.

Business Name Placeholder

Use {business_name} where you want the saved business name to appear.

Template:

Thank you for choosing {business_name}.

Customer sees:

Thank you for choosing Greenway Dental.

Owner Name Placeholder

Use {owner_name} where you want the saved owner or representative name to appear.

Template:

Thank you again,

{owner_name}

Customer may see:

Thank you again,

Sarah

Only use this placeholder if the owner or representative field contains an appropriate customer-facing name.

Business Website Placeholder

Use {business_website} where you want the saved business website to appear.

Template:

You can learn more about us at {business_website}.

Only include the website if it adds useful context. The Google review button should remain the main action.

Review Button Placeholder

Use {review_button} where you want the main review button to appear.

The button uses:

The Google review link saved for the business.
The Review Button Text saved for the business.

Place the button after your request for feedback and before the final closing when possible.

Example:

If you have a moment, we would appreciate your honest feedback.

{review_button}

Thank you for your time.

Do Not Remove the Review Button Accidentally

If you remove the {review_button} placeholder from the message, the main review button may not appear where expected.

Always send a test email after changing the template.

Use the Button Once

One clear review button is normally sufficient.

Repeating the button several times can make the email feel aggressive or promotional.

Review Button Text

The Review Button Text field controls the words displayed on the button.

The text should clearly describe the action.

Recommended options include:

Leave a Review
Share Your Feedback
Review Us on Google
Write a Review
Tell Us About Your Experience

Recommended Default Button

Leave a Review is a strong general-purpose option because it is short and clear.

When to Use Review Us on Google

Use Review Us on Google when you want the destination to be completely clear before the customer selects the button.

Avoid Vague Button Text

Avoid examples such as:

Click Here
Continue
Learn More
Submit
Go
Open

The customer should understand what will happen without having to guess.

Avoid Rating-Specific Button Text

Do not use:

Leave Five Stars
Give Us a Five-Star Review
Rate Us Five Stars
Support Our Five-Star Rating

The button should invite an honest review without requesting a predetermined rating.

Google Review Link

The review button opens the Google review link saved for the business.

Before sending live requests:

Open the saved link in a private browser window.
Confirm that it opens the correct business.
Confirm that it opens the correct location.
Confirm that the customer has a clear way to leave a review.
Send a Revilope test email.
Click the button inside the test email.

Do not use:

A general Google search link.
A Google Maps directions link.
The business website.
A private Google Business Profile management link.
A review link belonging to another location.

For Google’s official instructions, visit:

Create a Google Link or QR Code to Request Reviews

Business Website

The business website can help identify the business and may be included using the {business_website} placeholder.

Use the complete secure address, including https://.

Example:

https://example.com

Test the website before saving it.

Do not confuse the business website with the Google review link. They are separate fields with different purposes.

Business Mailing Address

The business mailing address may appear in the footer of the review-request email.

Enter a complete and accurate mailing address associated with the business.

Include:

Street number and street name.
Unit or suite number when applicable.
City.
Province or state.
Postal code or ZIP code.
Country when appropriate.

The mailing address helps identify the business responsible for the email.

Do not use a fictional, incomplete, or unrelated address.

Visible Sender Name

The visible sender name may combine the business name with Revilope’s configured sending label.

A customer may see a sender name similar to:

Greenway Dental via Revilope

This helps identify the business while indicating that Revilope handled the email delivery.

The exact visible format may depend on Revilope’s current email configuration and the customer’s email application.

How Customer Replies Work

When a customer replies, the reply should be directed to the business’s saved reply-to address.

Revilope does not manage the resulting customer-service conversation for you.

Your business is responsible for:

Monitoring the reply-to inbox.
Responding to customer questions.
Handling complaints professionally.
Respecting unsubscribe or privacy requests received directly.
Keeping the inbox active and secure.

Ask for Honest Feedback

Your message should request genuine, voluntary feedback.

Recommended wording includes:

We would appreciate your honest feedback.
We would value hearing about your experience.
Your feedback helps us improve.
Please share your experience with us.

Avoid wording such as:

Please leave us a positive review.
Only review us if you were happy.
We need five stars from you.
Help us maintain our perfect rating.
Leave five stars to receive your discount.

Do Not Offer Incentives for Reviews

Do not offer a customer a benefit in exchange for posting, changing, or removing a review.

Prohibited incentives may include:

Discounts.
Refunds.
Gift cards.
Free products.
Free services.
Contest entries.
Loyalty points.
Priority service.
Cash payments.

The review should be voluntary and based on the customer’s genuine experience.

Do Not Use Review Gating

Review gating means selectively directing only satisfied customers to a public review platform while diverting dissatisfied customers elsewhere.

Do not create a message that:

Asks whether the customer is happy before showing the Google review button.
Shows the public review link only after a positive response.
Directs unhappy customers to a private form while sending happy customers to Google.
Discourages customers from sharing negative but honest feedback publicly.

Use the same honest review request for eligible customers regardless of whether you expect positive or negative feedback.

Do Not Write the Review for the Customer

Do not tell customers exactly what to write.

Avoid:

Providing a prewritten five-star review.
Asking customers to copy and paste specific wording.
Giving customers required keywords.
Asking customers to mention services they did not receive.
Misrepresenting the customer’s experience.

You may invite customers to share their experience, but the content and rating should be their own.

Use a Consistent Tone

Your review request should match the way your business normally communicates.

A professional service business may prefer a formal tone.

A local retail store may prefer a warm and conversational tone.

A healthcare or professional office may prefer respectful, neutral language.

Regardless of tone, the message should remain:

Clear.
Honest.
Respectful.
Brief.
Free from pressure.

Avoid Excessive Personalization

Revilope’s current standard template does not automatically insert the customer’s name.

Do not add placeholders for customer information that Revilope does not support.

Unsupported placeholders may appear as plain text in the delivered email.

Use business-level personalization such as the business name and owner name instead.

Use Proper Grammar and Formatting

Before saving the message:

Check spelling.
Check punctuation.
Check capitalization.
Keep paragraphs short.
Avoid excessive exclamation marks.
Avoid writing the entire message in capital letters.
Confirm that placeholders are typed correctly.

A polished message helps customers recognize the request as legitimate.

Avoid Spam-Like Language

Excessive promotional language can make the request look suspicious or increase the chance that an email provider filters it.

Avoid wording such as:

Act now
Guaranteed reward
Urgent response required
Limited-time offer
Click immediately
You have won
Claim your prize

The request should sound like a normal follow-up from a business the customer already knows.

Choose an Appropriate Follow-Up Delay

The saved delay affects when the customized email is sent.

Available options may include:

1 hour.
4 hours.
12 hours.
24 hours.
2 days.
3 days.
7 days.

Choose a delay that gives the customer enough time to complete the experience without waiting so long that the interaction is forgotten.

A 24-hour delay is a practical starting point for many businesses.

Consider when your team normally sends original emails. A 12-hour delay applied late in the afternoon may schedule the review request for early in the morning.

Template Settings Are Saved Per Business

Each business has its own review-request settings.

This allows businesses or locations to use different:

Names.
Owners or representatives.
Subjects.
Messages.
Button text.
Google review links.
Reply-to addresses.
Mailing addresses.
Follow-up delays.

When managing several businesses, confirm that you are editing the correct profile before saving changes.

Scheduled Requests May Use a Saved Snapshot

Revilope may capture the business template and related request information when the request is created.

This helps prevent later edits from unexpectedly changing a request that has already been scheduled.

As a result, changing the business template may not update requests that were already created.

New settings should apply to new requests created after the changes are saved.

If an already scheduled request contains an important mistake, cancel it where possible and create a new request after correcting the template.

Send a Test Email

Always send a test after creating or substantially changing a template.

Test emails do not count toward your monthly request allowance.

Save the business.
Return to the Revilope dashboard.
Find the business.
Select Send Test.
Open the test email sent to your account email address.
Review the subject.
Review the sender name.
Read the full message.
Confirm that placeholders were replaced correctly.
Confirm that the review button appears.
Confirm that the button text is correct.
Click the review button.
Confirm that the correct Google Business Profile opens.
Reply to the email.
Confirm that the reply goes to the correct business inbox.
Repeat the review on a mobile device.

What to Check in the Test Email

Subject Line

Confirm that the subject is complete, natural, and free from unsupported placeholders.

Business Name

Confirm that the correct public-facing business name appears.

Owner or Representative

Confirm that the name is accurate and appropriate for customers.

Message Formatting

Confirm that paragraphs are easy to read and that the button appears in the intended location.

Placeholders

Confirm that customers do not see raw placeholder text such as {business_name} or {review_button}.

Review Button

Confirm that the button is visible, readable, and clearly describes the action.

Review Destination

Confirm that the button opens the correct Google Business Profile and location.

Reply-To Address

Reply to the email and confirm that the message reaches the correct inbox.

Mailing Address

Confirm that the footer contains an accurate and complete business address.

Mobile Display

Open the email on a phone and confirm that the text and button are easy to read.

Test Email Versus Live Email

A test email is designed to help you preview the customer experience.

The test subject may include [Test].

A test email:

Is sent to your Revilope account email address.
Does not count toward your request allowance.
Does not create a normal customer request record.
May not include an active customer unsubscribe action.
Should not be forwarded to customers as a live request.

Use a real BCC or manual request when you are ready to contact an eligible customer.

Editing an Existing Template

You may update a business’s review request at any time.

Open the Revilope dashboard.
Find the business.
Select Edit.
Make the required changes.
Review every placeholder.
Confirm the Google review link.
Save the business.
Send a fresh test email.

Do not rely on an old test email after editing the template. Always send a new test that reflects the current settings.

When to Update Your Template

Review the template when:

The business name changes.
The business moves.
The Google review link changes.
The reply-to inbox changes.
A named owner or representative leaves.
The business website changes.
You receive customer feedback that the message is unclear.
The email feels too long or promotional.
The business wants a different tone.
A location requires its own wording.

Common Template Mistakes

Forgetting to include {review_button}.
Misspelling a placeholder.
Using unsupported customer-name placeholders.
Adding the wrong Google review link.
Using another location’s business name.
Using an outdated owner or representative name.
Using an inbox that is not monitored as the reply-to address.
Writing an excessively long message.
Adding several competing buttons or promotions.
Asking specifically for five stars.
Offering an incentive for a review.
Using review gating language.
Sending live requests without testing the template.
Assuming an old test reflects newly saved settings.

Troubleshooting the Review Template

A Placeholder Appears as Plain Text

Check the placeholder spelling and formatting.

Use the supported placeholder exactly as provided.

For example:

{business_name}

Do not use variations such as:

{BusinessName}
[business_name]
{business name}
{customer_name}

Save the corrected template and send a new test email.

The Review Button Does Not Appear

Confirm that {review_button} appears in the message.

Check that:

The placeholder is spelled correctly.
The Google review link is present.
The Review Button Text field is complete.
The business was saved.
You opened the newest test email.

The Review Button Opens the Wrong Business

Edit the Google Review Link field for the business.

Copy a fresh review link from the correct Google Business Profile and test it in a private browser window.

Save the business and send another test email.

Customer Replies Go to the Wrong Address

Edit the business reply-to email address.

Save the business, send another test, and reply to the new test email.

The Wrong Business Name Appears

Confirm that you edited the correct business profile.

Check the Business Name field and the private BCC address used for the request.

The Old Template Was Sent

The request may have been created before the new template was saved.

Newly scheduled requests should use the updated settings. Previously scheduled requests may retain the earlier template snapshot.

The Email Looks Different in Another Email Application

Email applications may render fonts, spacing, buttons, and widths differently.

Test the email in more than one application when possible, including desktop and mobile.

Minor display differences do not necessarily indicate a sending problem.

The Email Went to Spam

Email filtering can be affected by:

Message wording.
Sender reputation.
Domain authentication.
The recipient’s email provider.
Excessive promotional language.
Repeated sending patterns.
Recipient engagement.

Keep the message simple, accurate, and connected to a genuine customer relationship.

Revilope cannot guarantee inbox placement.

Review-Request Best Practices

Use a recognizable business name.
Use a monitored reply-to address.
Keep the subject short.
Thank the customer.
Ask for honest feedback.
Keep the message brief.
Use one clear review button.
Use the correct Google review link.
Do not request a specific rating.
Do not offer incentives.
Do not use review gating.
Test the email on desktop and mobile.
Review the template periodically.

Template Checklist

The correct business profile is open.
The public business name is accurate.
The owner or representative name is appropriate.
The website is correct.
The reply-to inbox is monitored.
The mailing address is complete.
The subject line is clear.
The message thanks the customer.
The message asks for honest feedback.
The message does not ask for five stars.
The message does not offer an incentive.
The message does not use review gating.
Supported placeholders are entered correctly.
The {review_button} placeholder is included.
The button text is clear.
The Google review link opens the correct business.
The follow-up delay is appropriate.
The business was saved.
A fresh test email was sent.
The test was reviewed on desktop.
The test was reviewed on mobile.
The review button was tested.
The reply-to address was tested.

You Are Ready to Continue When

The subject line is complete and accurate.
The message sounds natural and professional.
The supported placeholders work correctly.
The review button appears in the intended location.
The button opens the correct Google Business Profile.
The reply-to address reaches the correct inbox.
The business mailing address is accurate.
The email looks good on desktop and mobile.
The message asks for honest feedback without pressure or incentives.

Next Step

Continue to the Send a Test Email section for a detailed walkthrough of testing the complete customer experience before sending live review requests.

Need Help Customizing Your Request?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The field or placeholder causing the issue.
Whether the problem appears in a test or live request.
A description of what you expected to see.

Do not send account passwords, customer passwords, payment-card details, verification tokens, or unnecessary customer information.

Send a Test Email

A test email lets you preview the complete review-request experience before sending anything to a real customer.

Use the Send Test option after creating a business and whenever you make an important change to its email template, Google review link, reply-to address, business information, or review button.

The test email is sent to the email address associated with your Revilope account. It uses the current settings saved for the selected business, allowing you to confirm that the message looks correct and that every important link and detail works as expected.

Why You Should Send a Test Email

A review request may contain several pieces of customer-facing information, including:

The business name.
The owner or representative name.
The email subject.
The review-request message.
The review button.
The Google review link.
The reply-to email address.
The business website.
The business mailing address.

A mistake in any of these settings can affect the customer experience.

Sending a test allows you to catch problems such as:

A misspelled business name.
An incorrect Google review link.
A missing review button.
An unsupported or misspelled placeholder.
A reply-to address that sends replies to the wrong inbox.
An incomplete mailing address.
Awkward spacing or paragraph formatting.
A subject line that is too long or unclear.
A message that sounds too promotional or demanding.
A layout that is difficult to read on a mobile device.

Do not begin sending live customer requests until you have opened and reviewed a successful test email.

When to Send a Test Email

Send a test email in the following situations:

After adding a new business.
After entering or changing the Google review link.
After changing the email subject.
After editing the review-request message.
After changing the review button text.
After adding or removing template placeholders.
After changing the business name.
After changing the owner or representative name.
After changing the reply-to email address.
After changing the business mailing address.
After changing the business website.
After a major business rebrand.
After changing the Google Business Profile or business location.
After receiving a report that a link or reply address is not working.

You do not need to send a test before every individual customer request. The purpose of the test is to verify the business configuration and customer-facing email.

Where the Test Email Is Sent

The test email is sent to the email address associated with your Revilope account.

This may be different from:

The business reply-to address.
An authorized sender address.
The email address used for customer service.
The address used to send normal customer emails.

Before sending a test, confirm that your Revilope account email is correct and that you can access its inbox.

Your account email may also be used for:

Password resets.
Subscription notices.
Security messages.
Account communication.
Support correspondence.

How to Send a Test Email

Sign in to your Revilope account.
Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the business you want to test.
Confirm that you selected the correct business.
Select Send Test.
Wait for Revilope to process the test.
Open the inbox connected to your Revilope account email.
Find the Revilope test email.
Open the message and review every section carefully.

If the test is successful, Revilope should confirm that the message was submitted for sending.

Email delivery may take a few moments depending on the outgoing email provider, your inbox provider, filtering systems, and internet conditions.

What Makes a Test Email Different?

A test email is designed for previewing the current business template. It is not treated as a normal customer review request.

A test email:

Is sent to your Revilope account email address.
Uses the current template saved for the selected business.
Includes [Test] in the subject line.
Does not count against your monthly request allowance.
Does not create a normal customer request in your Activity history.
Does not create a live customer unsubscribe action.
Is clearly identified as a test rather than a live request.

Do not forward the test email to a customer and treat it as a live request.

When you are ready to contact a customer, create a normal request through BCC automation or the manual request form.

The [Test] Subject Label

The subject line of a test email includes [Test] so that you can distinguish it from a live customer request.

For example, if your saved subject is:

How was your experience with Greenway Dental?

The test subject may appear as:

[Test] How was your experience with Greenway Dental?

The [Test] label is used only for the preview message. Customers receiving a live request should not see that test label.

What to Check in the Subject Line

Review the subject exactly as a customer would see it.

Confirm that:

The subject is easy to understand.
The business name is correct.
Any supported placeholder was replaced correctly.
The subject is not excessively long.
The subject does not ask for a specific star rating.
The subject does not create false urgency.
The subject does not look like a payment or security warning.
The subject is free from spelling and punctuation errors.

Remember that mobile email applications may display only part of a long subject line.

What to Check in the Visible Sender Information

Look at the sender name and sender email information displayed by your email application.

The visible sender name may combine the business name with Revilope’s configured sending label.

A customer may see a name similar to:

Greenway Dental via Revilope

The exact display may vary depending on the customer’s email application and Revilope’s current outgoing mail configuration.

Confirm that:

The correct business name appears.
The sender does not appear to be another business.
The message does not look misleading.
The sender information is recognizable enough for the customer to understand who contacted them.

What to Check in the Opening Message

Read the opening paragraphs from the customer’s perspective.

Confirm that the opening:

Thanks the customer.
Clearly identifies the business.
Sounds natural.
Matches the tone of your normal customer communication.
Does not assume that the customer had a positive experience.
Does not pressure the customer to leave a review.

A suitable opening may say:

Thank you for choosing Greenway Dental. We hope you had a great experience with us.

A more neutral version may say:

Thank you for choosing Greenway Dental. We would appreciate hearing about your experience.

What to Check in the Review Request

The main request should clearly ask for honest feedback.

Confirm that the message:

Asks for an honest review.
Does not demand a positive review.
Does not request five stars.
Does not offer a reward or incentive.
Does not redirect unhappy customers away from Google.
Does not provide a prewritten review for the customer to copy.
Is short enough to read easily.

Recommended wording includes:

If you have a moment, we would appreciate your honest feedback. Your review helps us understand what we are doing well and where we can improve.

Check Every Template Placeholder

Review the test email for raw placeholder text.

Customers should not see unprocessed text such as:

{business_name}
{owner_name}
{business_website}
{review_button}

If a raw placeholder appears, check that it was entered exactly as supported.

Do not change:

The curly brackets.
The spelling.
The capitalization.
The underscores.

For example, use:

{business_name}

Do not use:

{BusinessName}
{business name}
[business_name]
{company_name}

After correcting a placeholder, save the business and send a new test email.

Check the Review Button

The review button should be one of the most visible elements in the email.

Confirm that:

The button is present.
The button appears in the intended location.
The button text is easy to understand.
The button is large enough to select on a mobile device.
The button is not repeated unnecessarily.
The button text does not request a specific star rating.

Recommended button text includes:

Leave a Review
Share Your Feedback
Review Us on Google
Write a Review

Avoid vague wording such as:

Click Here
Continue
Submit
Learn More

Test the Google Review Link

Select the review button inside the test email.

Do not only test the link from the Revilope settings page. Testing the actual email button confirms that the saved link and button were connected correctly.

After selecting the button, confirm that:

The correct Google Business Profile opens.
The correct business name appears.
The correct location appears.
The page gives the customer a clear way to leave a review.
The link does not open a general search page.
The link does not open another business.
The link does not require access to your private business-management account.

Test the button in a private or incognito browser window when possible.

Google may ask the customer to sign in before submitting a review. That requirement is controlled by Google and does not necessarily indicate that the link is incorrect.

For Google’s official instructions on obtaining the proper review link, visit:

Create a Google Link or QR Code to Request Reviews

Test the Reply-To Address

Reply to the test email from your inbox.

Confirm that the reply is addressed to the business reply-to email saved in Revilope.

Then send the reply and confirm that it arrives in the expected business inbox.

This test is important because customers may reply to:

Ask a question.
Report a problem.
Share feedback privately.
Ask why they received the message.
Request not to be contacted again.

Your business should use an inbox that is actively monitored.

If replies go to the wrong address:

Open the business in Revilope.
Select Edit.
Correct the Reply-To Email field.
Save the business.
Send a new test email.
Reply to the new test.
Confirm that the reply reaches the correct inbox.

Check the Business Website

If your message includes the business website, select or copy the link and confirm that it opens correctly.

Check that:

The website belongs to the correct business.
The website address is spelled correctly.
The page loads successfully.
The website uses https:// where available.
The link does not open another location or company.

The business website and the Google review link are separate fields. Confirm that each opens the correct destination.

Check the Business Mailing Address

Review the mailing address shown in the email footer.

Confirm that it includes the necessary information:

Street number and street name.
Unit or suite number when applicable.
City.
Province or state.
Postal code or ZIP code.
Country when appropriate.

Do not use an incomplete, fictional, or unrelated address.

If the address is wrong, update the business profile and send another test.

Check the Unsubscribe Area

Live customer review requests include an unsubscribe option.

The test email may display test-specific unsubscribe information rather than a live customer unsubscribe action.

A test email is not intended to create a customer suppression record.

Do not use the absence of a live unsubscribe action in the test as evidence that live customer emails will not include one.

Review the Email on a Desktop Computer

Open the test in the desktop email application or webmail service you normally use.

Check:

Paragraph spacing.
Text alignment.
Button visibility.
Link behaviour.
Business information.
Footer spacing.
Overall message length.

Make sure the review button appears without requiring the customer to search through a long message.

Review the Email on a Mobile Device

Many customers will open the request on a phone, so mobile testing is essential.

Open the test email on a mobile device and confirm that:

The subject is understandable.
The text is readable without zooming.
The paragraphs are not too long.
The review button fits on the screen.
The button is easy to select.
The review page opens correctly.
The business information does not appear broken or crowded.

Minor differences between email applications are normal. Gmail, Outlook, Apple Mail, and other clients may display spacing, fonts, and button shapes differently.

Test in More Than One Email Application

When possible, review the test in more than one email application.

Useful testing environments include:

Gmail on desktop.
Gmail on mobile.
Outlook on desktop.
Outlook on mobile.
Apple Mail.
A business webmail service.

You do not need to test every email provider, but checking more than one can help identify major formatting or link problems.

Check the Tone of the Email

Read the entire email aloud or ask another team member to review it.

Consider whether it sounds:

Professional.
Friendly.
Recognizable.
Respectful.
Brief.
Free from pressure.

The message should sound like a genuine follow-up from the business rather than a generic advertisement.

Check for Spelling and Grammar Errors

Review:

The business name.
The subject line.
The owner or representative name.
The message.
The review button text.
The website.
The reply-to address.
The mailing address.

Pay particular attention to names, locations, and email addresses because automatic spelling tools may not recognize an error in those fields.

Confirm the Correct Business Was Tested

If you manage multiple businesses, confirm that the test came from the intended profile.

Check:

The business name.
The location.
The Google review destination.
The reply-to inbox.
The mailing address.
The message wording.

Each business has separate settings. Sending a test from the wrong business can make a correct configuration appear incorrect.

Does a Test Email Count Toward My Plan?

No. Sending yourself a test email does not count toward your monthly review-request allowance.

You can send additional tests while refining the business template.

Normal BCC and manual customer requests count toward the same plan allowance.

View Revilope Plans and Request Limits

Does a Test Email Appear in Activity?

A test email does not create a normal customer request record in the Activity section.

This is because the test is a template preview rather than a live customer request.

Use Activity to track normal requests created through:

BCC review automation.
The manual request form.

Does a Test Email Use the Follow-Up Delay?

No. A test is sent for preview rather than being scheduled using the business’s normal customer follow-up delay.

The saved delay applies to live BCC requests and may be selected for manual requests.

The purpose of the test is to let you review the current template without waiting for the normal delay.

Does a Test Email Verify My Authorized Sender?

No. Sending a test email does not complete authorized sender verification.

These are separate processes:

The test email previews the customer-facing review request.
The sender verification email confirms that an address may trigger BCC requests.

Before sending your first automatic request, confirm that the intended sender shows as verified in the business settings.

Does a Test Confirm That BCC Automation Works?

A successful test confirms that Revilope can prepare and submit the business’s current review-request template for sending.

It does not fully test the incoming BCC workflow.

A complete BCC test should also confirm that:

The private Revilope BCC address is correct.
The original email reaches Revilope.
The sender is authorized.
The customer is identified.
The request is accepted.
The saved delay is applied.
The request appears in Activity.

After reviewing the test email, send one live BCC request to an eligible test recipient and confirm that it appears in Activity.

Make Changes After Reviewing the Test

If you find a problem:

Return to the Revilope dashboard.
Find the business.
Select Edit.
Correct the relevant field.
Save the business.
Return to the dashboard.
Select Send Test again.
Open the newest test email.
Repeat the review process.

Do not rely on an older test email after changing the business. The old message still shows the settings that existed when it was sent.

How to Identify the Newest Test

If you send several tests, check the date and time shown by your email application.

You may also temporarily change the subject while troubleshooting so that each version is easy to recognize.

For example:

[Test] Review Request Version 1
[Test] Review Request Version 2

Restore the final customer-facing subject before sending live requests.

Troubleshooting a Missing Test Email

If the test email does not arrive immediately, allow a few minutes and then complete the following checks.

Confirm that the test was submitted successfully.
Confirm that your Revilope account email is correct.
Refresh the inbox.
Check the spam folder.
Check the junk folder.
Check promotions or other filtered folders.
Check the organization’s quarantine system.
Search the mailbox for Revilope.
Confirm that the mailbox can receive external email.
Wait a few minutes before sending another test.

A delay may be caused by:

The outgoing email provider.
The receiving email provider.
Spam or security filtering.
Temporary network delays.
Hosting or website email configuration.
A temporary mail-provider outage.

The Test Went to Spam or Junk

Email placement can be influenced by:

The receiving provider’s filtering rules.
The sender domain’s reputation.
Email authentication.
Message wording.
Links in the message.
Recipient behaviour.
The recipient’s personal filtering settings.

Marking the test as not spam may help your own inbox recognize future Revilope messages, but it does not guarantee placement for other recipients.

Keep the review request short, accurate, and free from excessive promotional language.

Revilope cannot guarantee inbox placement.

The Test Email Contains the Wrong Business Name

Confirm that you selected Send Test on the correct business card.

If you tested the correct business, edit the Business Name field and save the profile.

Send a new test after making the correction.

The Test Email Contains an Old Message

Possible causes include:

The business was not saved after editing.
You opened an older test email.
You edited a different business profile.
The newest email has not arrived yet.

Confirm the save, send another test, and check the email’s date and time.

The Review Button Is Missing

Check that the message contains:

{review_button}

Confirm that:

The placeholder is spelled correctly.
The curly brackets are present.
The Google review link is complete.
The Review Button Text field is not empty.
The business was saved.
You opened the newest test.

Correct the template and send another test.

The Review Button Opens the Wrong Business

The wrong Google review link may be saved in the business profile.

Open the intended Google Business Profile.
Copy a fresh official review link.
Edit the correct Revilope business.
Replace the existing link.
Save the business.
Send another test.
Open the button in a private browser window.

The Review Button Does Not Open

Check for:

An incomplete Google review link.
Extra spaces.
Quotation marks.
Punctuation added to the link.
A line break inside the link.
Email application link blocking.
A temporary internet or Google issue.

Copy a fresh link from Google rather than attempting to repair a damaged address manually.

A Placeholder Appears in the Email

Revilope did not recognize the placeholder.

Confirm that you used one of the supported placeholders exactly as provided:

{business_name}
{owner_name}
{business_website}
{review_button}

Correct the placeholder, save the business, and send a new test.

The Reply Goes to the Wrong Address

Edit the business’s Reply-To Email field.

Do not confuse the reply-to address with:

The Revilope account email.
The authorized sender.
The private Revilope BCC address.
The outgoing delivery address.

Save the corrected business and reply to a new test email.

The Email Formatting Looks Different Than Expected

Email applications use different rendering systems.

As a result, you may notice small differences in:

Font appearance.
Button shape.
Line spacing.
Margins.
Email width.
Link styling.

Focus on whether the email remains readable, professional, and functional.

Report major issues such as missing content, broken buttons, unreadable text, or severely distorted layouts.

The Test Email Was Sent to the Wrong Inbox

Test emails are sent to the email associated with your Revilope account.

If that account email is outdated or incorrect, update it through your account settings before sending additional tests.

Changing the business reply-to address does not change where test emails are delivered.

The Test Is Marked as Sent but Did Not Arrive

A successful send result generally means the configured mail system accepted the test for delivery.

It does not guarantee that:

The message reached the inbox.
The receiving server accepted it.
The message avoided spam or quarantine.
The email provider did not delay it.

Check spam, junk, quarantine, and provider filtering before contacting support.

Test Email Best Practices

Send a test immediately after creating a business.
Test every major template change.
Open the review button in a private browser window.
Reply to the email and confirm the reply-to address.
Review the email on desktop and mobile.
Check the complete mailing address.
Check every placeholder.
Confirm that the message asks for honest feedback.
Confirm that no incentive or rating requirement is included.
Open the newest test rather than an older message.
Do not forward test emails to customers.
Send a separate BCC test after confirming the template.

Test Email Checklist

The test was sent from the correct business profile.
The message arrived at the Revilope account email.
The subject contains the expected [Test] label.
The subject is clear and accurate.
The correct business name appears.
The owner or representative name is correct.
The message is easy to read.
The message asks for honest feedback.
The message does not request a specific rating.
The message does not offer an incentive.
No unsupported placeholders are visible.
The review button appears correctly.
The button text is clear.
The button opens the correct Google Business Profile.
The correct business location appears.
The reply-to address reaches the correct inbox.
The website link works when included.
The mailing address is complete.
The email looks good on desktop.
The email looks good on mobile.
The business settings were saved.

You Are Ready to Continue When

You received the test email.
The correct business information appears.
The message is accurate and professionally written.
Every placeholder works.
The review button opens the correct Google Business Profile.
The reply-to address sends responses to the correct inbox.
The email is readable on desktop and mobile.
No important corrections remain.

Next Step

Continue to the BCC Review Automation section to learn how to copy your private Revilope address, add it to an email, and automatically schedule a customer review request.

Need Help With a Test Email?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The approximate time the test was sent.
Whether Revilope reported the test as successful.
Whether you checked spam, junk, and quarantine.
A description of the missing or incorrect content.
The email application and device used to view the test.

Do not send your Revilope password, email password, payment-card information, verification tokens, or unnecessary customer information.

BCC Review Automation

BCC Review Automation is Revilope’s primary workflow. It allows you to turn an email you are already sending to a customer into a scheduled review opportunity without sending a separate review request yourself.

You write and send your normal customer email, place your private Revilope address in the BCC field, and Revilope handles the later follow-up using the review-request settings saved for that business.

You do not need to remember or manually type the private Revilope address. Select Save Contact on the business card to save it in your email or contacts application, then select the saved contact whenever you send an eligible customer email.

The customer receives two separate emails:

The original email sent directly by your business.
The Revilope review request sent later after your selected follow-up delay.

The review request is not attached to, forwarded from, or included inside the original customer email.

What BCC Means

BCC stands for Blind Carbon Copy.

When an email address is added to the BCC field, that address receives a hidden copy of the email. The customer should not see the private Revilope address in the To, CC, or visible recipient information.

For example:

To: customer@example.com

BCC: Your saved private Revilope contact

From: Your verified authorized sender

The customer sees that the original email was sent to them. They do not see your private Revilope BCC address.

How BCC Review Automation Works

You send a normal email directly to one customer.
You add the correct saved Revilope contact to the BCC field.
You send the email from an authorized and verified sender.
Revilope receives the hidden BCC copy.
Revilope identifies the business connected to the private address.
Revilope checks the sender and customer information.
Revilope checks the business status, plan allowance, duplicate protection, cooldown rules, and customer suppression status.
If the request is eligible, Revilope creates a separate review request.
The request is scheduled using the follow-up delay saved for the business.
Revilope sends the separate review-request email at the scheduled time.
The request status appears in your Activity section.

What You Need Before Using BCC Automation

Complete the following setup before sending your first automatic request:

Add the correct business to Revilope.
Add and test the business’s Google review link.
Customize the review-request subject and message.
Add the review button to the template.
Choose the review button text.
Add a valid reply-to email address.
Add the business mailing address.
Select a follow-up delay.
Add the email address you use to contact customers as an authorized sender.
Complete sender verification.
Save the private Revilope address as a contact.
Send yourself a test email.
Confirm that the test button opens the correct Google Business Profile.

Do not rely on BCC automation until the intended sending address shows as verified.

Find Your Private Revilope BCC Address

Each Revilope business receives its own unique private BCC address.

The private address appears on the business card in your Revilope dashboard.

To find it:

Sign in to Revilope.
Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the correct business.
Locate the private BCC review-request address on the business card.
Use Save Contact to save it for future use.
Use the copy icon when you need to copy the address directly.

You are not expected to memorize the private address.

Use the saved contact or copy icon whenever possible. Typing the address manually increases the chance of a missing character or spelling error.

Save Your Private Revilope Address as a Contact

Select Save Contact next to Edit on the business card to save the private BCC address in your normal email or contacts application.

Saving the contact allows you to select a recognizable business name instead of remembering a long private email address.

How to Save the Contact

Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the correct business.
Select Save Contact next to Edit.
Open the downloaded contact file or contact prompt provided by your browser or device.
Review the contact name and email address.
Save the contact to the account used for sending customer emails.
Create a new email.
Open the BCC field.
Begin typing the saved Revilope contact name.
Select the correct contact.
Confirm that the complete private address appears in BCC.

The exact save process may vary depending on your browser, device, email provider, and contacts application.

Recommended Contact Names

Use a contact name that clearly identifies the business or location.

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Oakville
Revilope Reviews – Northside Auto Repair

If you manage multiple businesses, do not save every private address under the same generic contact name.

Avoid:

Revilope

Instead, use:

Revilope BCC – Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Oakville
Revilope BCC – Burlington

Why Saving the Contact Is Recommended

Saving the private address helps:

Prevent typing mistakes.
Prevent missing characters.
Reduce the need to open Revilope before every customer email.
Make the BCC workflow faster.
Help staff identify the correct business or location.
Reduce the chance of selecting the wrong private BCC address.

Save the Contact in the Correct Account

Save the contact in the email account or contacts system used by the verified authorized sender.

If several employees send customer emails, each employee may need to save the contact in their own email or contacts account.

Only provide the saved contact to staff who are approved to use the business’s Revilope workflow.

Do Not Edit the Private Address

The private BCC address must remain exactly as provided by Revilope.

Do not:

Shorten the address.
Remove part of the address.
Change the characters after the plus sign.
Add spaces.
Replace the domain.
Create your own variation of the address.

Changing any part of the address may prevent Revilope from identifying the business.

Saved Contact Names Can Be Edited

You may change the visible contact name in your contacts application without changing the private email address.

For example, you can change:

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental

To:

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga

Do not change the email address stored inside the contact.

Every Business Has a Different BCC Address

The private address tells Revilope which business should be used for the request.

It connects the incoming email to the business’s:

Business name.
Google review link.
Review-request subject.
Review-request message.
Review button text.
Reply-to email address.
Mailing address.
Authorized sender list.
Follow-up delay.

If you use the BCC address for the wrong business, the customer may receive the wrong business name, message, reply-to address, or Google review link.

Always select the saved contact for the business that actually served the customer.

How to Send an Automatic Review Request

Open the email account your business normally uses to contact customers.
Create a new email.
Enter one customer email address in the To field.
Write the normal customer email you intended to send.
Open the BCC field in your email application.
Begin typing the saved Revilope contact name.
Select the contact for the correct business or location.
Confirm that the complete private Revilope address appears in BCC.
Confirm that the From field shows an authorized and verified sender.
Confirm that the correct customer is in the To field.
Confirm that no other customers have been added to To or CC.
Send the email.
Allow several minutes for Revilope to process the message.
Open the Activity section in Revilope.
Confirm the request status and scheduled sending time.

If you have not saved the contact yet, copy the private address from the correct business card and paste it into BCC.

Example Email Setup

A correct automatic request may be arranged like this:

From: sales@example.com

To: customer@example.com

BCC: Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental

Subject: Your receipt from Greenway Dental

The saved Revilope contact contains the complete private BCC address.

The email body can contain the normal receipt, thank-you message, service summary, appointment follow-up, or other customer communication your business was already planning to send.

Send to One Customer at a Time

The BCC workflow is designed for an original email sent directly to one customer.

Place one eligible customer email address in the To field.

Do not place several customers in:

The To field.
The CC field.
A customer mailing list.
A group address that expands to several customers.

If several customer addresses appear in the original email, Revilope may reject the request because it cannot safely determine which person should receive the later review request.

To request reviews from several customers, either send one original email to each customer or use the Manual Review Requests feature.

Use the To Field for the Customer

The customer should be the direct recipient of the original business email.

Do not place the customer only in BCC alongside the Revilope contact.

Do not send an email directly to the saved Revilope contact without an eligible customer in the To field.

Revilope needs to identify one clear customer recipient from the original message.

Place Revilope in BCC, Not To or CC

Your saved Revilope contact should be placed in the BCC field.

Do not place it in the To field because the message would be addressed directly to Revilope rather than to the customer.

Do not place it in CC because the private address may become visible to the customer and other recipients.

The recommended structure is:

The customer in To.
No additional customers in CC.
The saved Revilope contact in BCC.

Use an Authorized and Verified Sender

The original customer email must come from an address that is authorized and verified for the selected business.

For example, if sales@example.com is verified, the original email should be sent from sales@example.com.

Verification of sales@example.com does not automatically authorize:

hello@example.com
support@example.com
employee@example.com
A personal Gmail or Outlook address.

If the actual sender does not match a verified address, the request may receive an Unauthorized Sender status.

Check the Actual From Address

Email aliases, shared mailboxes, delegated accounts, and third-party systems can make the sender address more complicated than it appears.

Your email application may display:

sales@example.com

But the message may technically be sent by:

employee@example.com

Revilope evaluates the sender information it receives in the message headers.

If BCC requests are being rejected as unauthorized, check the actual sender used by your email provider.

Suitable Original Customer Emails

BCC automation works best with normal one-to-one customer emails that your business already sends after a meaningful interaction.

Examples include:

A receipt.
An invoice.
A payment confirmation.
A thank-you email.
An appointment follow-up.
A completed-service notice.
A project completion email.
An order pickup confirmation.
A delivery confirmation.
A service summary.
A final customer-support response.

Choose a natural point at which the customer’s experience is complete enough for them to provide meaningful feedback.

Avoid Adding Revilope to Every Message

Do not add the saved Revilope contact to every message in a long email conversation.

Repeatedly BCCing Revilope can create unnecessary processing and may cause requests to be skipped as duplicates.

Select one appropriate message, such as:

The final receipt.
The completed-service confirmation.
The closing thank-you email.
The final project-delivery message.
The post-appointment follow-up.

One well-timed request is usually more appropriate than repeated requests during the same customer experience.

What Revilope Checks After You Send

Receiving the BCC copy does not automatically guarantee that a request will be created.

Revilope may check:

Whether the private BCC address is valid.
Which business is connected to the address.
Whether the business is active.
Whether the account is permitted to use that business.
Whether the sender is authorized.
Whether the sender completed verification.
Whether one eligible customer can be identified.
Whether the customer address is valid.
Whether the customer is a business, staff, or system address that should be excluded.
Whether the same source email was already processed.
Whether the customer already has a pending request.
Whether the customer is within the business’s cooldown period.
Whether the customer previously unsubscribed.
Whether the account has enough request capacity.
Whether the message appears automated, bulk, bounced, or suspicious.
Whether available email-authentication information indicates a problem.

If the request passes the applicable checks, Revilope creates and schedules the review request.

How the Follow-Up Delay Is Calculated

BCC requests use the follow-up delay currently saved for the business.

The delay begins when Revilope accepts and creates the request, not when you began writing the original email.

For example, suppose:

You send the customer email at 2:00 p.m.
Revilope processes it at 2:03 p.m.
The business has a 24-hour delay.

The review request would be scheduled for approximately 2:03 p.m. the following day.

A short difference between the original email time and the scheduled calculation may occur because Revilope must first receive and process the BCC message.

Available Follow-Up Delays

Available delay options include:

1 hour.
4 hours.
12 hours.
24 hours.
2 days.
3 days.
7 days.

The delay saved when the request is created is used for that request.

Changing the business delay later may not change requests that have already been scheduled.

Scheduled Times and Your Timezone

The Activity section displays request times using the timezone selected in your Revilope account.

Your selected timezone may affect how the following are displayed:

The request creation time.
The scheduled sending time.
The sent time.

If the displayed time appears incorrect, open the Timezone area in your account and confirm that the correct timezone is selected.

Changing the displayed timezone does not change the length of the follow-up delay.

Scheduled Sending Is Approximate

Revilope attempts to process scheduled requests when they become due.

The email may not be handed off at the exact second shown in Activity.

Small delays can occur because of:

Background scheduling.
Server activity.
Hosting conditions.
Temporary email-provider delays.
Maintenance.
Queue recovery.
Temporary sending errors.

A request that remains Scheduled briefly after its due time does not necessarily mean that it has failed.

What the Customer Receives

The customer receives a separate review-request email using the business settings captured for the request.

The email may include:

The business name.
The owner or representative name.
Your custom subject.
Your custom message.
The review button.
The Google review link.
The business reply-to address.
The business mailing address.
An unsubscribe link.
Revilope sending or branding information.

The customer does not receive your original email again as part of the review request.

The Original Email Body Is Not Used

Revilope does not need the content of your original customer email to create the review request.

The BCC workflow is designed to process only the header information needed to identify:

The business.
The sender.
The customer recipient.
The source message.
Relevant routing and authentication information.

Revilope does not intentionally retrieve or use the original email body or attachments for the review-request workflow.

The review-request content comes from the custom template saved in your Revilope business profile.

Attachments in the Original Email

Your normal customer email may contain an invoice, receipt, document, or other attachment.

Revilope does not copy that attachment into the later review request.

The review request is created from your saved Revilope template and does not reproduce the original attachment.

Do not rely on Revilope to store, process, or resend attachments from the original customer email.

Inbound BCC Copy Deletion

After Revilope processes the inbound BCC message, the mailbox copy is designed to be deleted and expunged.

This applies whether the request is:

Accepted.
Rejected.
Skipped as a duplicate.
Suppressed.
Blocked by the plan limit.
Rejected because of an unauthorized sender.
Rejected because of an invalid recipient.

Revilope may retain limited header-derived information needed to create the request, prevent duplicate processing, apply security checks, or record the processing result.

Check Activity After Sending

Do not assume that the request was accepted simply because the original customer email was sent successfully.

After sending the BCC email:

Allow several minutes for mailbox processing.
Open your Revilope dashboard.
Open or review the Activity section.
Find the request for the correct business.
Check the masked customer address.
Confirm that the source is identified as a BCC email.
Review the current status.
Review the scheduled sending time.

The Activity section is the best place to confirm whether Revilope accepted, rejected, skipped, cancelled, or sent the request.

Scheduled Status

Scheduled means Revilope accepted the request and placed it in the sending queue.

The request is waiting for the scheduled time based on the business’s saved follow-up delay.

No action is normally required while a valid request is scheduled.

Sending Status

Sending means Revilope is currently processing the outgoing review request.

This is normally a temporary status.

Sent Status

Sent means the configured mail system accepted the review request for sending.

Sent does not guarantee that:

The email reached the customer’s inbox.
The email avoided spam or quarantine.
The customer opened the email.
The customer selected the review button.
The customer submitted a review.

Revilope does not currently monitor whether a customer completed a Google review.

Unauthorized Sender Status

Unauthorized Sender means the original email did not come from an address that Revilope recognized as verified for the business.

Check:

The sender listed in the business settings.
The sender’s verification status.
The actual From address used by your email provider.
Whether an alias or shared mailbox was used.
Whether the sender is authorized for another business instead.
Whether the correct saved Revilope contact was selected.

Invalid Recipient Status

Invalid Recipient means Revilope could not identify one eligible customer for the request.

Possible reasons include:

No customer was entered in the To field.
Several customers were included.
The address format was invalid.
The recipient was one of the business’s own addresses.
The recipient was an authorized sender.
The recipient was a Revilope system address.
The message structure did not provide one clear customer recipient.

Skipped Duplicate Status

Skipped Duplicate means Revilope detected that another request or source message made the new request unnecessary.

This may happen when:

The same original email was processed more than once.
The customer already has a pending request.
The customer recently received a request from the same business.
The customer is within the business’s cooldown period.

A skipped duplicate is often a customer-protection feature rather than a technical error.

Suppressed Status

Suppressed means the customer is blocked from receiving the request, usually because of a previous unsubscribe or another valid suppression record.

Do not attempt to bypass a suppression by:

Using another sender.
Changing the capitalization of the address.
Submitting the customer manually.
Creating another business profile.
Using another Revilope account.

Plan Limit Status

Plan Limit means the account did not have enough available request capacity or the business was restricted under the current plan.

Check:

Your current monthly request usage.
The number of scheduled requests already reserving capacity.
Your current business limit.
Your subscription status.

View Revilope Plans and Request Limits

Failed Status

Failed means Revilope could not complete the outgoing email handoff after the available attempts.

A temporary failure may be retried automatically before the request receives a final Failed status.

A failure may be caused by:

A temporary mail-provider problem.
A website or hosting issue.
A network problem.
An outgoing email configuration issue.
A recipient-server rejection.
An invalid or unavailable destination.

Using a Saved Contact in Gmail

After saving the Revilope contact, Gmail may suggest it when you begin typing the contact name or email address.

Create a new email.
Enter one customer in To.
Open the BCC field.
Begin typing the saved Revilope contact name.
Select the contact for the correct business.
Confirm that the complete private address appears.
Confirm the correct From address.
Send the message.

If the contact does not appear, confirm that it was saved to the Google account connected to Gmail.

The exact position of the BCC control may vary between desktop, mobile, and updated versions of Gmail.

Using a Saved Contact in Outlook

After saving or importing the Revilope contact, Outlook may suggest it when you begin typing the contact name.

Create a new email.
Enter one customer in To.
Show or open the BCC field.
Begin typing the saved Revilope contact name.
Select the contact for the correct business.
Confirm that the complete private address appears.
Confirm the correct From address.
Send the message.

If the contact does not appear, confirm that it was saved to the contact list used by your Outlook account.

The location of the BCC option may vary between Outlook on the web, the desktop application, and the mobile application.

Using a Saved Contact in Business Webmail

Most business webmail systems can suggest saved contacts in the BCC field.

Look for options such as:

BCC.
Show BCC.
Add BCC.
More recipient options.
Contacts.
Address book.

If the saved Revilope contact does not appear automatically, open the webmail contacts or address-book area and import or save the contact there.

If you cannot find the BCC or contact controls, consult the help documentation for your email provider.

If the Save Contact Button Downloads a File

Depending on your browser or device, selecting Save Contact may download a contact file.

After downloading:

Open the downloaded contact file.
Choose the contacts account where it should be saved.
Review the contact name.
Confirm that the complete Revilope address appears.
Save the contact.
Open your email application.
Test the contact in the BCC field.

Do not share the downloaded contact file publicly.

If the Saved Contact Does Not Appear

Check:

Which contacts account received the saved contact.
Which email account is currently open.
Whether contact synchronization is enabled.
Whether the email application needs to be refreshed.
Whether the contact was saved locally on another device.
Whether the contact name was changed.

You can still use the copy icon on the business card while resolving the contact issue.

If the Saved Contact Shows the Wrong Business

Delete or rename the incorrect contact before continuing.

Open the contact in your email or contacts application.
Compare its email address with the private address shown on the intended Revilope business card.
Delete the incorrect contact when necessary.
Return to Revilope.
Select Save Contact on the correct business.
Save it with a clear business or location name.

If a Business Is Deleted and Recreated

The old private BCC address may no longer work after a business is deleted.

Remove the old saved contact from:

Gmail contacts.
Outlook contacts.
Apple Contacts.
Business webmail address books.
Phone contacts.
Reusable email templates.
Saved drafts.

Use Save Contact on the new business card to save the current private address.

Use an Email Template or Signature Shortcut

Your email provider may allow you to create templates, shortcuts, or reusable drafts.

You may create a reusable customer email that already includes the correct saved Revilope contact in BCC.

Before sending, always confirm:

The customer address is correct.
The saved contact belongs to the correct business.
The complete private address appears in BCC.
The From address is verified.
No previous customer address remains in the template.

Be careful when duplicating old messages. An old draft may contain the wrong customer or the wrong business BCC contact.

Email Aliases

An email alias may send through another primary mailbox.

For example, your email application may show sales@example.com while the message headers identify employee@example.com.

If you use an alias:

Add and verify the address customers normally see.
Save the correct Revilope business contact.
Send a BCC test from that alias.
Check Activity.
If the request is unauthorized, inspect the actual sender used by the provider.
Add and verify the appropriate actual sender when permitted by your plan.

Do not assume an alias works until you have tested it.

Shared Mailboxes

A shared mailbox may behave differently depending on how employees access it.

Messages may be sent:

Directly from the shared address.
On behalf of the shared address.
From the employee’s own address.

If several employees use the same shared inbox, test the workflow from each method staff will use.

Each employee may also need access to the correct saved Revilope contact.

A test that succeeds for one employee may not guarantee that another employee’s email configuration uses the same sender information or contacts list.

Third-Party Email Systems

Emails sent through invoicing platforms, booking tools, customer-management systems, support desks, or website forms may use sender information that differs from your normal business mailbox.

A third-party system may use:

A provider-owned address.
A no-reply address.
A bounce-management address.
A service account.
Your business address only as the reply-to address.

Revilope may also reject messages identified as automated, bulk, bounced, or system-generated.

A saved contact does not guarantee that the third-party system will preserve the BCC recipient or use the verified sender.

For the most reliable workflow, send the original customer email directly from your verified business mailbox.

Test any third-party system before relying on it for BCC automation.

Bulk and Automated Emails

BCC Review Automation is not intended for newsletters, bulk campaigns, mailing lists, or automated marketing blasts.

Do not add your saved Revilope contact to:

Newsletters.
Promotional campaigns.
Mailing-list broadcasts.
Automated receipts sent to many customers at once.
Bulk customer exports.
Cold outreach campaigns.
Purchased or scraped contact lists.

Use the Manual Review Requests feature for eligible customer lists when appropriate, subject to your plan limit and legal responsibilities.

Multiple Businesses and Locations

When your account contains several businesses, each business has its own private BCC address and saved contact.

Before sending, compare:

The customer’s location.
The business shown in Revilope.
The saved contact name.
The private BCC address stored in the contact.
The saved Google review link.
The sender authorized for that business.

A customer who visited the Mississauga location should not receive the review link for the Oakville location.

Use clear saved contact names and clear Revilope business names to reduce mistakes.

Duplicate Protection

Revilope uses several checks to reduce repeated requests.

Duplicate Protection may consider:

The original message identifier.
Existing pending requests.
Recent requests to the same customer.
The business-specific cooldown period.

If the same customer receives several invoices, receipts, or follow-up emails, do not add the saved Revilope contact to every message.

Choose one appropriate point in the customer journey.

Customer Cooldown Protection

After a customer receives a request, Revilope may block another request from the same business for a period of time.

This prevents customers from being contacted repeatedly because of:

Multiple staff emails.
Repeat invoices.
Several appointments close together.
Duplicate manual submissions.
Repeated processing of the same message.

A skipped request during the cooldown period does not normally use a new live request allowance.

Customer Unsubscribes

Live review-request emails include an unsubscribe option.

When a customer unsubscribes from requests sent by a business:

Future requests from that business may be blocked.
Pending requests may be cancelled.
A suppression record may be retained.
The status may appear as Suppressed in Activity.

Do not use the saved Revilope contact to attempt to contact an unsubscribed customer again.

How BCC Requests Affect Your Plan Usage

Every accepted BCC request uses the same monthly allowance as a manual request.

A request may reserve plan capacity when it is accepted and scheduled.

For example, if your plan includes 100 monthly requests and you already have 95 completed or scheduled requests, you may have capacity for only 5 additional requests.

Test emails do not use the monthly request allowance.

Unused requests do not roll over into the next billing period.

Compare Revilope Plans

Keep Your Private BCC Contact Secure

Your saved Revilope contact contains the private address assigned to the business.

Only approved members of the business should have access to it.

Do not:

Publish the address on your website.
Publish the contact file.
Post it on social media.
Add it to a public directory.
Use it as a customer-support address.
Include it in a public help article.
Subscribe it to a newsletter.
Share it with unrelated businesses.
Send it to customers as a contact address.

If you believe the private address or saved contact has been exposed or misused, pause the business and contact Revilope support.

Do Not Place Sensitive Information in Email Headers

Although Revilope does not intentionally retrieve the original message body or attachments, email headers can contain information such as:

The subject line.
The sender address.
The recipient address.
Display names.
Routing information.

Do not place sensitive personal information in the subject line, display name, recipient field, or other email header.

Avoid including:

Payment card numbers.
Bank information.
Passwords.
Government identification numbers.
Medical information.
Private legal information.
Highly sensitive information about minors.

Troubleshooting a Missing BCC Request

If the request does not appear in Activity, check the following:

Confirm that the saved Revilope contact was added to BCC.
Confirm that the complete private address appears in the BCC field.
Confirm that the contact belongs to the intended business.
Confirm that the original email was sent successfully.
Confirm that the sender is verified.
Confirm that the actual From address matches the verified sender.
Confirm that one customer was placed in the To field.
Confirm that no additional customers were added to To or CC.
Confirm that the business is active.
Confirm that the account has remaining request capacity.
Wait several minutes for mailbox processing.
Refresh the Activity section.

The Saved Contact Is Not Working

Open the saved contact and compare its email address with the address shown on the Revilope business card.

Check for:

A missing character.
An extra space.
An old address from a deleted business.
The address for another location.
A manually edited address.
A contact saved under the wrong name.

When uncertain:

Delete the saved contact.
Return to the correct Revilope business card.
Select Save Contact again.
Save the new contact with a clear name.
Send a controlled BCC test.
Check Activity.

The Request Shows Unauthorized Sender

Check:

Whether the sender is listed on the correct business.
Whether verification is complete.
Whether an alias was used.
Whether a shared mailbox sent on behalf of another address.
Whether a third-party system changed the sender.
Whether the saved contact belongs to the wrong business.

Send a direct test from the verified mailbox and compare the result.

The Request Shows Invalid Recipient

Confirm that:

One customer was in To.
The customer address was typed correctly.
The customer was not placed only in BCC.
Several customers were not included.
The recipient was not one of your own business addresses.
The saved Revilope contact was placed in BCC rather than To.

The Request Shows Skipped Duplicate

Review recent Activity for the customer.

The request may have been skipped because:

The same source message was already processed.
The customer already has a scheduled request.
The customer recently received a request.
The customer remains within the cooldown period.

Do not repeatedly resend the same BCC email in an attempt to force another request.

The Request Shows Suppressed

The customer may have previously unsubscribed from review requests sent by the business.

Do not attempt to bypass the suppression.

If the customer believes the unsubscribe was accidental, the customer should contact the business or Revilope directly for assistance.

The Request Shows Plan Limit

Review your account usage and subscription status.

Scheduled requests may already be reserving the remaining capacity.

Wait for the next plan reset or select a plan with a larger monthly allowance.

View Upgrade Options

The Request Is Scheduled but Overdue

Confirm:

The scheduled time.
Your account timezone.
The current request status.
Whether the business was paused.
Whether the customer unsubscribed.
Whether a temporary background-processing delay occurred.

Allow a reasonable processing period because the request may not be sent at the exact second displayed.

Contact support if the request remains Scheduled significantly beyond its due time.

The Request Is Sent but the Customer Did Not Receive It

Ask the customer to check:

Spam.
Junk.
Promotions.
Quarantine.
Blocked sender settings.

Delivery may be affected by:

The customer’s email provider.
Mailbox filtering.
Mailbox capacity.
Email reputation.
Domain authentication.
An incorrect customer address.

Revilope cannot guarantee inbox placement, email opening, button clicks, or completed reviews.

The Wrong Business Email Was Sent

This usually means the wrong saved Revilope contact or private BCC address was used.

Review:

The business shown in Activity.
The contact selected in the original email.
The private address stored in that contact.
The Google review link connected to that business.

Update or delete incorrect saved contacts so that each business is clearly identified.

The Wrong Follow-Up Delay Was Used

The request normally uses the delay saved for the business when the request is created.

Check:

The business selected by the saved BCC contact.
The private address stored in the contact.
The delay currently saved for that business.
The request creation time.
The scheduled time shown in Activity.
Your selected account timezone.

Changing the business delay after the request was created may not change the existing scheduled request.

BCC Automation Best Practices

Save the private address as a contact.
Give the contact a clear business or location name.
Do not manually type or recreate the private address.
Send to one customer at a time.
Place the customer in To.
Place the saved Revilope contact only in BCC.
Use the correct business contact.
Send from a verified address.
Choose one appropriate email in the customer journey.
Do not BCC every message in a conversation.
Do not use the workflow for newsletters or bulk campaigns.
Check Activity after sending.
Respect Duplicate Protection and cooldowns.
Respect customer unsubscribes.
Keep the private address and contact file confidential.
Test aliases and shared mailboxes before relying on them.
Review monthly plan usage regularly.

BCC Automation Checklist

The correct Revilope business has been selected.
The business is active.
The Google review link has been tested.
The review-request template has been tested.
The private BCC contact has been saved.
The saved contact name identifies the correct business or location.
The private address inside the contact has not been edited.
The sending address is authorized.
The sending address is verified.
The actual From address matches the verified sender.
One eligible customer is in the To field.
No additional customers are in To or CC.
The correct saved Revilope contact is in BCC.
The original customer email is appropriate for triggering a review request.
The account has remaining request capacity.
The customer has not recently received another request.
The original email was sent successfully.
The request appeared in Activity.
The scheduled time is correct.

You Are Ready to Use BCC Automation When

Your business profile is complete.
Your Google review link works.
Your review-request template has been tested.
Your sender is verified.
Your private Revilope contact has been saved.
The saved contact clearly identifies the correct business or location.
You know how to select the contact in the BCC field.
You successfully created a test BCC request.
The request appeared in Activity with the expected scheduled time.

Next Step

Continue to the Manual Review Requests section to learn how to request reviews from customers when you do not have an original customer email to send through the BCC workflow.

Need Help With BCC Automation?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The approximate date and time the original email was sent.
The sender address used.
Whether the sender is verified.
The status shown in Activity.
Whether you used a saved contact, copied the address, or typed it manually.
Whether you used an alias, shared mailbox, or third-party email platform.
A description of what you expected to happen.

Do not send your email password, Revilope password, payment-card information, full customer email lists, verification tokens, contact files containing private BCC addresses, or unnecessary sensitive information.

Manual Review Requests

Manual Review Requests allow you to send review requests directly from your Revilope dashboard without first sending a customer email through the BCC workflow.

This option is useful when the customer interaction happened in person, by phone, through another system, or at a time when you did not send a normal email that could include your private Revilope BCC address.

Manual requests use the same business profile, review-request template, Google review link, reply-to address, follow-up delay, customer protections, and monthly request allowance as BCC requests.

When to Use a Manual Review Request

Use the manual request feature when you have an eligible customer email address but do not have an original customer email to send through Revilope.

Common examples include:

An in-person customer.
A customer who booked by phone.
A walk-in customer.
A customer whose transaction was completed in another system.
A customer imported from a booking platform.
A customer imported from an invoicing platform.
A customer from a point-of-sale system.
A previous customer who has not yet received a review request.
A customer who received service but did not receive a normal business email.
A customer list being reviewed and submitted individually by an authorized account user.

Manual Review Requests are not intended for cold marketing, purchased lists, scraped contacts, or people who have never had a genuine experience with the business.

How Manual Requests Differ From BCC Requests

BCC requests begin when Revilope receives a hidden copy of a normal customer email.

Manual requests begin when you enter customer email addresses directly into your Revilope dashboard.

With a manual request:

You do not need to send an original customer email.
You do not need to add the private Revilope address to BCC.
The request is created from the dashboard.
The customer receives the same type of separate review-request email.
The request uses the selected business’s saved template and Google review link.
The request counts toward the same monthly allowance as a BCC request.

What You Need Before Sending Manual Requests

Complete the following setup before submitting customer addresses:

Add the correct business to Revilope.
Enter the correct Google review link.
Customize the review-request subject and message.
Add the review button to the message.
Choose the review button text.
Enter a monitored reply-to email address.
Enter the business mailing address.
Select the business’s normal follow-up delay.
Send yourself a test email.
Confirm that the review button opens the correct Google Business Profile.

Authorized sender verification is required for BCC automation because Revilope must verify the sender of the original email.

A manual request is created from your signed-in Revilope account, so there is no original email sender to verify for that request.

How to Send a Manual Review Request

Sign in to your Revilope account.
Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the business that served the customer.
Select the Manual Request option for that business.
Enter one or more eligible customer email addresses.
Choose whether the requests should be sent as soon as possible or use the business’s saved follow-up delay.
Review the customer addresses carefully.
Submit the request.
Review the submission result.
Open the Activity section.
Confirm that the accepted requests appear with the expected status and scheduled time.

Select the Correct Business

Every manual request must be connected to one Revilope business.

The business you select determines:

The business name shown to the customer.
The owner or representative name.
The email subject.
The review-request message.
The review button text.
The Google review link.
The reply-to email address.
The business mailing address.
The saved follow-up delay.

If you select the wrong business, the customer may receive the wrong review link or be asked to review the wrong location.

Before submitting a manual request, confirm:

The business name.
The business location.
The Google review destination.
The template wording.
The reply-to inbox.

Entering One Customer Email Address

To send a request to one customer, enter the complete customer email address in the manual request field.

Example:

customer@example.com

Check the spelling before submitting.

A small typing error may cause the request to fail or be sent to the wrong person.

Entering Multiple Customer Email Addresses

You can submit more than one customer address in the same manual request form.

Revilope can separate addresses entered using:

Commas.
Semicolons.
Spaces.
New lines.

Comma-Separated Example

customer1@example.com, customer2@example.com, customer3@example.com

Semicolon-Separated Example

customer1@example.com; customer2@example.com; customer3@example.com

One Address Per Line

customer1@example.com

customer2@example.com

customer3@example.com

Entering one address per line is often the easiest format to review before submitting.

Each Customer Receives a Separate Email

Revilope does not send one review-request email with the complete customer list visible in the To field.

Each accepted customer address is processed as its own request.

This means:

Each customer receives a separate email.
Customers do not see the other submitted addresses.
Each request has its own status.
Each request is checked separately for suppression, duplicates, and plan capacity.

Never paste customer addresses into a normal email and send them together as one visible recipient list.

Review the Customer List Before Submitting

Before selecting Submit, review every address.

Check for:

Misspelled domains.
Missing at symbols.
Missing domain extensions.
Accidental punctuation.
Old or inactive addresses.
Business staff addresses.
Duplicate addresses.
Customers who already received a request.
Customers who asked not to receive review requests.

Revilope performs validation and protection checks, but you are still responsible for reviewing the customer list before submitting it.

Supported Customer Information

The standard manual request form accepts customer email addresses.

Revilope does not currently require or automatically personalize the request with:

The customer’s first name.
The customer’s last name.
An order number.
An invoice number.
An appointment date.
A product name.
A service name.

The request is created using the business-level template saved in Revilope.

Do not enter unsupported customer details into the email-address field.

Choose When the Request Should Be Sent

The manual request form may allow you to choose between sending the request as soon as possible and using the business’s saved follow-up delay.

Send as Soon as Possible

Choose this option when the customer experience is already complete and no additional waiting period is needed.

The request is added to the sending queue without applying the business’s normal delay.

As soon as possible does not mean that the email is guaranteed to leave at the exact second you submit the form.

A short processing period may occur because of:

Background scheduling.
Server activity.
Email-provider processing.
Temporary network conditions.
Queue activity.

Use the Saved Follow-Up Delay

Choose this option when you want the manual request to follow the same timing used by the business’s BCC requests.

For example, if the business has a 24-hour delay, a manual request submitted at 2:00 p.m. should be scheduled for approximately 2:00 p.m. the following day.

The exact scheduled time is based on when Revilope accepts and creates the request.

When to Send as Soon as Possible

This option may be appropriate when:

The customer interaction was completed earlier.
The customer has already had time to use the product or service.
You are entering a previous customer manually.
The normal follow-up delay has already passed.
You are submitting the address after reviewing an older customer list.

Avoid sending immediately when the customer has not yet completed the experience or has not had enough time to evaluate the result.

When to Use the Saved Delay

This option may be appropriate when:

The customer interaction just ended.
The business wants consistent timing across all requests.
The customer needs time to evaluate the service.
The request should arrive at approximately the same interval as BCC requests.

Manual Requests and Your Timezone

The Activity section displays request times using the timezone selected in your Revilope account.

This may include:

The date and time the request was created.
The scheduled sending time.
The sent time.

If a displayed time appears incorrect, review the Timezone area in your account settings.

Changing the displayed timezone does not change the length of a relative follow-up delay.

What Revilope Checks During Submission

Every submitted address is checked before Revilope creates a live request.

Revilope may check:

Whether the email format is valid.
Whether the address appeared more than once in the same submission.
Whether the customer already has a pending request.
Whether the customer recently received a request from the same business.
Whether the customer is within the business’s cooldown period.
Whether the customer previously unsubscribed.
Whether the address belongs to the business or one of its senders.
Whether the account has enough request capacity.
Whether the business is active.
Whether the business is permitted under the current plan.

One rejected address does not necessarily prevent every other valid address in the same submission from being accepted.

Email Address Validation

Revilope checks whether an address follows a valid email-address format.

Examples of valid-looking formats include:

customer@example.com
customer.name@example.com
customer-name@example.ca

Examples of invalid formats include:

customerexample.com
customer@
@example.com
customer@example
customer example.com

Format validation does not guarantee that the mailbox exists, is active, or can receive email.

Duplicate Addresses in the Same Submission

If the same customer address appears more than once in a manual submission, Revilope may remove the repeated copies and process the address only once.

For example:

customer@example.com

This should not create three separate requests to the same customer.

Review the submission result to see whether duplicate entries were removed or skipped.

Existing Pending Requests

If a customer already has a scheduled request from the same business, Revilope may block another manual request.

This prevents two requests from being queued for the same customer at the same time.

Check Activity before attempting to submit the customer again.

Customer Cooldown Protection

After a customer receives a request, Revilope may apply a business-specific cooldown period before another request can be created.

The standard cooldown may prevent another request to the same customer from the same business for approximately 90 days.

This protection helps prevent repeated requests caused by:

Duplicate customer lists.
Repeat transactions.
Several employees submitting the same customer.
Manual and BCC requests overlapping.
Old lists being uploaded again.

A customer may be eligible for a future request after the cooldown period, but the business should still consider whether another request is appropriate.

Customer Suppression

If a customer previously unsubscribed from review requests sent by the business, Revilope may block the manual request.

The request may appear as Suppressed or may be excluded during submission.

Do not attempt to bypass suppression by:

Changing the capitalization of the email address.
Adding extra spaces.
Using another sender.
Creating another business profile.
Using another Revilope account.
Submitting an alternate version of the same address.

A suppression record exists to respect the customer’s request not to receive additional review emails from that business.

Business and Staff Address Filtering

Revilope may block requests to addresses associated with the business.

This may include:

The account email.
The business reply-to address.
An authorized sender.
A Revilope system address.
Another business-owned address identified by the system.

This helps prevent the business from accidentally sending live review requests to itself.

Use the Send Test feature when you want to preview the review-request email.

Do not use the manual request feature as a substitute for Send Test.

How Manual Requests Use Your Plan Allowance

Every accepted manual customer request counts toward the same monthly allowance used by BCC requests.

For example, if your Pro plan includes 100 monthly requests and you already have 70 accepted BCC requests, you have up to 30 requests remaining for manual and additional BCC requests during the same billing period.

Scheduled requests may reserve capacity before they are sent.

This prevents several submissions made at the same time from exceeding the account’s plan limit.

Plan Limits

Your monthly request allowance depends on your plan:

Starter includes 5 requests per month.
Pro includes 100 requests per month.
Pro Plus includes 350 requests per month.
Agency includes 1,500 requests per month.

Manual and BCC requests are combined within the same allowance.

View Revilope Plans and Request Limits

What Happens When the Plan Limit Is Reached?

If the account does not have enough remaining capacity, some or all submitted addresses may be rejected or marked with a Plan Limit status.

For example, if you submit 20 customers but only 8 requests remain, Revilope may accept up to the available limit and reject the remaining addresses.

Review the submission result and Activity before assuming that every address was accepted.

You can wait for the next allowance reset or upgrade to a plan with a larger monthly request limit.

Scheduled Requests Reserve Capacity

A request may count against the available allowance when it is accepted and scheduled, even if the email will not be sent until later.

This means the remaining request count may decrease immediately after a manual submission using the saved delay.

Capacity is reserved because Revilope is committed to sending the request later.

Cancelled and Failed Requests

A request that is cancelled before sending or permanently fails may return its reserved capacity, depending on its final status and how the cancellation occurred.

Check the updated usage summary after the request status changes.

Do not repeatedly submit the same customer while a failed or cancelled request is still being processed.

Review the Manual Submission Result

After submitting customer addresses, Revilope may report how the entries were handled.

Results may include:

Accepted.
Scheduled.
Invalid.
Duplicate.
Suppressed.
Blocked by cooldown protection.
Blocked by the plan limit.
Filtered as a business or system address.

Read the result carefully before leaving the page.

A successful form submission does not necessarily mean that every entered address was accepted.

Check Activity After Submitting

Use the Activity section to confirm the status of accepted manual requests.

Open your Revilope dashboard.
Open or scroll to the Activity section.
Filter by the correct business when necessary.
Look for the recently submitted requests.
Confirm that the source is Manual Request.
Review the masked customer email address.
Review the request status.
Review the scheduled time.

Customer email addresses are masked in the visible Activity list to reduce unnecessary exposure of complete addresses.

Scheduled Status

Scheduled means the manual request was accepted and is waiting for its scheduled sending time.

This may occur when:

You selected the business’s saved delay.
The request is waiting in the outgoing queue.
An as-soon-as-possible request has not yet been processed.

Sending Status

Sending means Revilope is currently attempting to hand the review-request email to the configured mail provider.

This is normally a temporary status.

Sent Status

Sent means the configured mail system accepted the review-request email for sending.

Sent does not guarantee that:

The customer received it in the inbox.
The email avoided spam or quarantine.
The customer opened it.
The customer selected the review button.
The customer completed a Google review.

Revilope does not currently monitor whether the customer leaves a review.

Skipped Duplicate Status

Skipped Duplicate means Revilope found an existing or recent request that made the new manual request unnecessary.

Possible reasons include:

The customer already has a pending request.
The customer recently received a request.
The address was submitted more than once.
The customer remains within the cooldown period.

Suppressed Status

Suppressed means the customer is not eligible to receive the review request because of an unsubscribe or another valid suppression record.

Do not attempt to resend to a suppressed customer.

Plan Limit Status

Plan Limit means the account did not have enough available request capacity.

Review:

The current plan.
The requests already used.
The requests already scheduled.
The next allowance reset.

Invalid Recipient Status

Invalid Recipient means Revilope could not use the submitted address.

Possible reasons include:

The address format was invalid.
The address was incomplete.
The address belonged to the business.
The address belonged to an authorized sender.
The address was identified as a system address.

Failed Status

Failed means Revilope could not complete the outgoing email handoff after the available attempts.

A temporary sending problem may be retried before the request receives a final failed status.

Possible causes include:

A temporary mail-provider issue.
A hosting problem.
A network problem.
An outgoing mail configuration issue.
A recipient-server rejection.
An invalid or unavailable mailbox.

Manual Requests Are Not Marketing Campaigns

Do not use Manual Review Requests as a general email-marketing or cold-outreach system.

Do not submit:

Purchased email lists.
Rented email lists.
Scraped addresses.
Unrelated prospects.
Newsletter subscribers who are not customers.
People who did not have a genuine experience with the business.
Customers who unsubscribed.

Manual requests should be used only for genuine customers who are eligible to receive the message.

Your Responsibility for Customer Addresses

You are responsible for ensuring that:

The customer address was collected lawfully.
The address belongs to a genuine customer.
The customer is eligible to receive the request.
The address is accurate.
The request complies with applicable privacy and email laws.
The request complies with Google’s review policies.
The customer has not withdrawn permission or unsubscribed.

Revilope’s validation and suppression features do not replace your legal responsibilities.

Ask for Honest Feedback

Manual requests use the same business template as your other requests.

The message should ask for honest feedback rather than a specific rating.

Do not:

Ask only satisfied customers to leave public reviews.
Ask for five stars.
Offer a discount for a review.
Offer a refund for changing a review.
Give customers prewritten review text.
Pressure customers to remove negative reviews.
Use review gating.

Do Not Submit Employees or Related Parties as Customers

Do not use manual requests to create reviews from people who did not have a genuine customer experience.

This includes:

Employees reviewing their employer.
Owners reviewing their own business.
Friends or relatives who were not real customers.
Contractors reviewing the company they work for without a genuine customer experience.
Fake or temporary accounts.

Submitting Previous Customers

You may use the manual request feature for previous customers when the request is appropriate and legally permitted.

Before submitting an older customer, consider:

How long ago the experience occurred.
Whether the customer will still remember the experience clearly.
Whether the customer previously received a request.
Whether the customer unsubscribed.
Whether you still have a lawful basis to contact the customer.

A recent, genuine customer experience usually produces a clearer and more relevant request than a very old transaction.

Submitting Repeat Customers

A repeat customer may eventually be eligible for another request after a new and meaningful experience.

However, do not submit the same person after every minor interaction.

Consider:

Whether the customer already reviewed the business.
Whether the new experience was meaningfully different.
Whether enough time has passed.
Whether the customer is within the Revilope cooldown period.
Whether another request would feel excessive.

Submitting Customers for Multiple Locations

When your account manages several locations, submit each customer through the location they actually visited.

For example:

A Mississauga customer should be submitted through the Mississauga Revilope business.
An Oakville customer should be submitted through the Oakville Revilope business.

This ensures that the customer receives the correct:

Business name.
Location information.
Google review link.
Reply-to address.
Mailing address.
Template.

Submitting a Large List

Before submitting a larger customer list:

Confirm that every person is a genuine customer.
Remove people who already received a request.
Remove people who unsubscribed.
Remove staff and business addresses.
Remove duplicate entries.
Confirm the correct business or location.
Check your remaining monthly request capacity.
Review the template and Google review link.
Consider submitting a smaller batch first.
Review the result and Activity before continuing.

A smaller initial batch can help you identify formatting, eligibility, or plan-limit issues before submitting the rest of the list.

Manual Requests and CSV Files

The standard manual request field accepts pasted email addresses rather than a direct file upload.

If your customer addresses are stored in a spreadsheet or CSV file:

Open the file.
Identify the column containing customer email addresses.
Remove headings and unrelated information.
Remove duplicate addresses.
Remove customers who should not be contacted.
Copy the eligible email addresses.
Paste them into the manual request field.
Review the pasted list.
Submit the request.

Do not paste names, phone numbers, addresses, order details, or other spreadsheet columns into the email-address field.

Manual Requests and Customer Privacy

Enter only the customer information Revilope needs for the request.

The standard manual request form needs the customer’s email address.

Do not paste:

Payment card information.
Bank details.
Passwords.
Government identification numbers.
Medical information.
Private legal information.
Detailed order histories.
Highly sensitive information about minors.

Customer email addresses stored in Revilope request and suppression records are encrypted, and visible addresses in Activity are masked.

Cancelling a Scheduled Manual Request

If a manual request has not yet been sent, you may be able to cancel it by removing the pending request from Activity or by using another available account control.

Before removing it, confirm that you selected the correct request.

Cancellation may:

Stop the scheduled request.
Change the status to Cancelled.
Release reserved plan capacity when eligible.

A request that has already been sent cannot be recalled through Revilope.

Pausing the Business

Pausing a business may cancel or prevent scheduled requests connected to that business.

Use Pause when you need to stop the business’s review workflow temporarily.

Requests cancelled during a pause may not automatically return when the business is resumed.

Review Activity before and after pausing a business.

Deleting the Business

Deleting a business may cancel pending manual requests and disable future request creation for that profile.

Deletion may also disable the business’s private BCC address.

Use Pause instead of Delete when you expect to use the business again.

Troubleshooting a Manual Submission

No Requests Were Accepted

Check:

Whether the business is active.
Whether the email addresses are valid.
Whether the account has remaining request capacity.
Whether the customers already have pending requests.
Whether the customers are within the cooldown period.
Whether the customers previously unsubscribed.
Whether the addresses belong to the business or staff.

Some Addresses Were Accepted and Others Were Rejected

Each address is checked individually.

The rejected addresses may be:

Invalid.
Duplicated.
Suppressed.
Within the cooldown period.
Already scheduled.
Blocked by the remaining plan limit.
Identified as business or system addresses.

Review the submission result and Activity before resubmitting anything.

The Same Customer Appears More Than Once

Confirm whether the entries represent:

A duplicate in the same submission.
A previous manual request.
A BCC request already created.
A request for another business.

Do not repeatedly submit the same address in an attempt to override duplicate protection.

The Request Shows Suppressed

The customer likely has an unsubscribe or suppression record for that business.

Do not attempt to bypass it.

The Request Shows Plan Limit

Review the remaining monthly allowance.

Remember that scheduled requests already reserve capacity.

You can wait for the allowance reset or upgrade your plan.

View Upgrade Options

The Request Is Scheduled for the Wrong Time

Check:

Whether you selected Send as Soon as Possible or Use Saved Delay.
The follow-up delay saved for the business.
The request creation time.
The timezone selected in your account.

Changing the business delay after the request was created may not update that existing request.

The Request Is Still Scheduled After Its Due Time

Allow a reasonable processing period.

Small delays may occur because of background scheduling, hosting conditions, or email-provider processing.

Contact support if the request remains scheduled significantly beyond its due time.

The Request Is Marked Sent but the Customer Did Not Receive It

Ask the customer to check:

Spam.
Junk.
Promotions.
Quarantine.
Blocked sender settings.

Sent means the configured mail system accepted the message for sending. It does not guarantee inbox placement.

The Wrong Business Template Was Sent

The manual request was likely submitted through the wrong business profile.

Review:

The business shown in Activity.
The Google review link saved for that business.
The template saved for that business.
The location selected during submission.

The Customer Address Was Entered Incorrectly

If the request has not yet been sent, cancel it where possible.

Correct the customer email address and submit a new request.

If the request was already sent to the wrong valid address, contact Revilope support and review your internal customer-data process.

Manual Request Best Practices

Submit only genuine customers.
Use the correct business and location.
Review every address before submitting.
Enter one address per line when submitting several customers.
Remove duplicates from your source list.
Check Activity before resubmitting a customer.
Respect cooldown protection.
Respect customer unsubscribes.
Choose the correct sending option.
Monitor monthly request usage.
Submit a smaller batch first when working with a larger list.
Do not use manual requests for cold outreach.
Do not include unnecessary customer information.
Check Activity after every submission.

Manual Request Checklist

The correct business is selected.
The business is active.
The Google review link has been tested.
The review-request template has been tested.
The customer had a genuine experience with the business.
The customer email address is accurate.
The customer has not unsubscribed.
The customer has not recently received another request.
Duplicate addresses have been removed.
Staff and business addresses have been removed.
The account has enough remaining request capacity.
The correct sending option is selected.
The submission result has been reviewed.
The accepted requests appear in Activity.
The scheduled times are correct.

You Are Ready to Send Manual Requests When

Your business profile is complete.
Your Google review link works.
Your review-request template has been tested.
You have eligible customer email addresses.
You know whether to send as soon as possible or use the saved delay.
You have reviewed your remaining plan capacity.
You understand how to review the results in Activity.

Next Step

Continue to the Follow-Up Delays section to learn how each timing option works and how to choose the most appropriate delay for your customers.

Need Help With Manual Requests?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The approximate date and time of the submission.
The number of addresses submitted.
The number accepted or rejected.
The status shown in Activity.
Whether you selected Send as Soon as Possible or Use Saved Delay.
A description of what you expected to happen.

Do not send your Revilope password, payment-card information, complete customer lists, or unnecessary sensitive customer information.

Follow-Up Delays

The follow-up delay controls how long Revilope waits before sending a customer’s review request.

Choosing the right delay helps the request arrive after the customer has completed the experience, while the interaction is still recent enough for them to remember clearly.

BCC-triggered requests automatically use the delay saved for the selected business. Manual requests can either use that saved delay or be sent as soon as possible.

Available Follow-Up Delays

Revilope currently allows you to choose from the following delay options:

1 hour.
4 hours.
12 hours.
24 hours.
2 days.
3 days.
7 days.

Each business can have its own follow-up delay.

This allows you to choose different timing for different businesses, locations, or customer experiences.

How the Follow-Up Delay Works

The delay is a relative period of time rather than a specific calendar date and time.

For example, if a request is created at 2:15 p.m. and the business uses a 24-hour delay, the request is scheduled for approximately 2:15 p.m. the following day.

If the business uses a 3-day delay, a request created on Monday at 2:15 p.m. is scheduled for approximately Thursday at 2:15 p.m.

The scheduled time is calculated when Revilope accepts and creates the request.

When the Delay Begins

The delay begins when Revilope successfully creates the review request.

For a BCC-triggered request, this may be a few minutes after you send the original customer email because Revilope must first:

Receive the BCC copy.
Identify the business.
Identify the sender.
Identify the customer.
Verify that the sender is authorized.
Check the business status.
Check plan availability.
Check duplicate protection.
Check the customer cooldown.
Check customer suppression.
Create the request.

For example:

You send the original customer email at 3:00 p.m.
Revilope processes the BCC message at 3:03 p.m.
The business uses a 24-hour delay.
The review request is scheduled for approximately 3:03 p.m. the following day.

The delay is not calculated from the moment you began writing the original email.

BCC Requests Use the Saved Delay Automatically

When Revilope accepts a BCC-triggered request, it automatically uses the delay saved for the business connected to the private BCC address.

You do not select the delay each time you send a BCC email.

The process is:

You send a normal email to one customer.
You place the correct private Revilope address in BCC.
Revilope accepts the request.
Revilope reads the saved delay for that business.
The request is scheduled automatically.
The scheduled time appears in Activity.

Using the wrong business’s BCC address can also cause the wrong delay to be used.

Always confirm that the private BCC address belongs to the business that served the customer.

Manual Requests and Follow-Up Delays

When creating a manual review request, you may be able to choose between:

Send as soon as possible.
Use the business’s saved follow-up delay.

Send as Soon as Possible

This option creates the request without applying the business’s normal waiting period.

The request is placed into the outgoing queue for processing.

As soon as possible does not guarantee that the email will be handed off at the exact second you submit the form.

A short delay may occur because of:

Background request processing.
Server activity.
Email-provider processing.
Temporary network conditions.
Queue recovery.

Use the Saved Follow-Up Delay

This option applies the same delay used by the business’s automatic BCC requests.

For example, if the business uses a 2-day delay and you submit a manual request on Tuesday at 11:00 a.m., the request is scheduled for approximately Thursday at 11:00 a.m.

Choosing the Right Delay

The best delay depends on the type of business, the customer experience, and how long the customer needs before they can provide meaningful feedback.

The review request should not arrive before the experience is complete.

It should also not arrive so late that the customer has forgotten important details.

1-Hour Delay

A 1-hour delay may be appropriate for short experiences that are fully complete when the original email is sent.

Examples include:

A completed retail pickup.
A short in-store service.
A simple consultation.
A quick appointment.
A completed transaction where the customer already received the result.

A 1-hour delay may be too soon when:

The customer has not yet used the product.
The service result takes time to evaluate.
The customer is still travelling home.
The original email was sent late at night.
The customer may feel that the request arrived immediately after payment.

4-Hour Delay

A 4-hour delay allows the request to arrive later the same day in many situations.

It may work well for:

Appointments completed earlier in the day.
Retail transactions.
Pickup orders.
Short professional services.
Same-day customer experiences.

Consider the time the original email is normally sent.

If your business sends a customer email at 6:00 p.m., a 4-hour delay may schedule the review request for approximately 10:00 p.m.

If that timing is too late for your customers, consider using 12 or 24 hours instead.

12-Hour Delay

A 12-hour delay gives the customer more time before receiving the request.

It may be useful for:

Services completed earlier in the day.
Appointments where the customer needs time to reflect.
Experiences where an immediate request would feel too aggressive.

Be careful with the time of day.

A request created at 4:00 p.m. with a 12-hour delay may be scheduled for approximately 4:00 a.m.

If your business often sends customer emails in the afternoon or evening, a 24-hour delay may provide more predictable delivery timing.

24-Hour Delay

A 24-hour delay is a practical general-purpose option for many businesses.

It gives the customer time to complete the experience while keeping the interaction recent.

It also tends to schedule the review request at approximately the same time on the following day.

A 24-hour delay may be appropriate for:

Dental offices.
Physiotherapy clinics.
Automotive services.
Home services.
Professional appointments.
Retail businesses.
Customer-support resolutions.
Completed repairs.

For businesses that are unsure where to begin, 24 hours is often a reasonable starting point.

2-Day Delay

A 2-day delay gives customers additional time to evaluate the result of the service or product.

It may work well for:

Home repairs.
Cleaning services.
Landscaping.
Automotive repairs.
Professional services.
Products that should be used before being reviewed.

Use a longer delay when the customer needs more than one day to know whether the result met their expectations.

3-Day Delay

A 3-day delay may be suitable for experiences that require several days before the customer can provide useful feedback.

Examples include:

Contractor work.
Home installations.
Longer professional services.
Events.
Products that require setup or use.
Services where the final result becomes clearer after a few days.

A 3-day delay can also make the request feel less immediate and less connected to the payment transaction.

7-Day Delay

A 7-day delay is intended for situations where the customer needs a longer period before they can provide meaningful feedback.

It may be appropriate for:

Products that need to be used over several days.
Longer-term service results.
Home improvement work.
Programs or experiences that require time to evaluate.
Businesses where an immediate review would not be useful.

A 7-day delay may be too long for simple, short customer experiences.

The longer you wait, the more likely the customer may forget details or ignore the request.

Recommended Starting Points by Business Type

The following examples can help you choose an initial delay. They are general suggestions rather than strict requirements.

Restaurants and Cafes

1 hour.
4 hours.
24 hours.

Choose a delay that allows the meal or visit to finish before the request arrives.

Retail Stores

4 hours.
24 hours.
2 days when product use matters.

Dental and Medical Offices

12 hours.
24 hours.
2 days.

Use neutral and privacy-conscious messaging. Do not include sensitive medical information in the original email subject or other header fields.

Physiotherapy, Massage, and Wellness Services

24 hours.
2 days.
3 days.

Automotive Services

24 hours.
2 days.
3 days.

The customer may need time to drive the vehicle and assess the completed work.

Home Services

24 hours.
2 days.
3 days.

Home services may include cleaning, plumbing, electrical work, HVAC service, painting, and landscaping.

Contractors and Installations

2 days.
3 days.
7 days.

Professional Services

24 hours.
2 days.
3 days.

Professional services may include accounting, consulting, legal services, real estate, and business services.

Salons and Personal Care

4 hours.
12 hours.
24 hours.

Events and Entertainment

12 hours.
24 hours.
2 days.

Online Orders and Product Delivery

2 days.
3 days.
7 days.

Do not trigger the request before the customer has received the product.

Consider the Original Email Timing

Your follow-up delay is added to the time Revilope creates the request.

This means the same delay can produce different delivery times depending on when the original email is sent.

For example, with a 4-hour delay:

A request created at 9:00 a.m. is scheduled for approximately 1:00 p.m.
A request created at 3:00 p.m. is scheduled for approximately 7:00 p.m.
A request created at 8:00 p.m. is scheduled for approximately midnight.

Review when your staff normally sends receipts, invoices, or completion emails before selecting a short delay.

Consider the Customer’s Local Time

The scheduled time shown in Revilope uses the timezone selected in your account.

The customer may live in a different timezone.

For example:

Your business operates in Toronto.
Your account uses America/New_York.
Your customer lives in Vancouver.
A request scheduled for 9:00 a.m. in Toronto arrives at approximately 6:00 a.m. in Vancouver.

If your customers are spread across several timezones, choose a delay that reduces the chance of inconvenient delivery times.

Revilope currently uses relative delays and does not allow you to select a separate customer timezone for each request.

Your Account Timezone

Revilope displays created, scheduled, and sent times using the timezone selected in your account settings.

The default timezone is:

America/New_York

Change this setting if it does not match your business’s local timezone.

To review your timezone:

Open the WooCommerce My Account area.
Open the Timezone section.
Select the correct named timezone.
Save the setting.
Confirm that the displayed local time is correct.

Named Timezones and Daylight Saving Time

Use a named timezone such as America/New_York rather than relying on a fixed hour difference.

A named timezone allows the displayed time to adjust when daylight saving time begins or ends.

For example, America/New_York may use different UTC offsets at different times of the year.

The underlying request time is stored and processed consistently, while Revilope converts it for display using the timezone selected in your account.

Changing Your Timezone Does Not Change the Delay

Changing the account timezone changes how request times are displayed.

It does not change a 24-hour delay into a shorter or longer waiting period.

For example:

A request is scheduled 24 hours after creation.
You change your account timezone.
The displayed clock time changes.
The actual scheduled moment remains the same.

How Scheduled Times Are Stored

Revilope processes scheduled request times using a consistent internal time standard.

Your selected timezone is then used to display those times in the dashboard.

This helps prevent the server’s local timezone from incorrectly changing the intended delay.

The displayed scheduled time should reflect the user timezone saved in the account.

Scheduled Sending Is Not Exact to the Second

The scheduled time represents when the request becomes due for processing.

Revilope attempts to process the request at or shortly after that time.

The request may not leave at the exact second displayed.

Small delays can occur because of:

Background scheduling intervals.
Action Scheduler processing.
WordPress Cron fallback processing.
Server traffic.
Hosting limitations.
Email-provider delays.
Temporary network issues.
Maintenance.
Overdue-request recovery.

A short delay after the scheduled time does not automatically mean that the request failed.

How Revilope Handles Overdue Requests

Revilope includes background recovery processes intended to find scheduled requests that became overdue.

An overdue request may be detected and returned to the sending process.

This can help when:

A scheduled task did not run at the expected moment.
The website temporarily had little background activity.
A hosting issue delayed the scheduler.
A temporary system interruption occurred.

Contact support if a request remains scheduled significantly beyond its due time.

Temporary Sending Failures and Retries

If an outgoing email attempt fails temporarily, Revilope may retry the request.

Retry timing may include increasing delays between attempts.

During this period, the request may remain in a sending or scheduled state before receiving a final Sent or Failed status.

Do not create another request for the same customer while the original request is still being processed.

How Changing the Delay Affects Existing Requests

Changing the saved business delay normally affects new requests created after the change.

Requests already created may keep the scheduled time calculated when they were accepted.

For example:

The business uses a 24-hour delay.
A customer request is created and scheduled.
You later change the business delay to 3 days.
The existing request may remain scheduled for its original 24-hour time.
New requests use the new 3-day delay.

Do not change the business delay expecting every existing scheduled request to move automatically.

How to Change the Follow-Up Delay

Sign in to Revilope.
Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the business you want to update.
Select Edit.
Find the Follow-Up Delay field.
Select the new delay.
Save the business.
Confirm that the new delay appears on the business card or settings page.

The updated delay should apply to new eligible requests created afterward.

Check the Delay Before Sending

Review the saved delay when:

You create a new business.
You begin using BCC automation.
You change your customer workflow.
Your staff begins sending emails at a different time of day.
You add a new location.
You receive customer feedback that requests arrive too soon or too late.
You move the business to another timezone.

Check the Scheduled Time in Activity

After creating a BCC or manual request, open Activity and review the scheduled time.

Confirm:

The correct business appears.
The request source is correct.
The request creation time is reasonable.
The scheduled time matches the expected delay.
The displayed timezone is correct.

For example, a 24-hour delay should produce a scheduled time approximately one day after the created time.

A small difference may exist between the time you sent the original BCC email and the time Revilope created the request.

Choosing a Delay for Repeat Customers

The follow-up delay and the customer cooldown are separate protections.

The delay controls when the current request is sent.

The cooldown controls whether another request to the same customer can be created within a longer period.

For example:

A request is created with a 24-hour delay.
The customer receives the request the following day.
The business later emails the customer again.
Revilope may block another request because the customer remains within the cooldown period.

Choosing a longer follow-up delay does not replace cooldown protection.

Delays and Customer Unsubscribes

If a customer unsubscribes before a scheduled request is sent, Revilope may cancel the pending request.

The request may appear as Cancelled or Suppressed in Activity.

Do not create another request in an attempt to bypass the unsubscribe.

Delays and Paused Businesses

Pausing a business may cancel or prevent its scheduled requests from being sent.

Requests cancelled while the business is paused may not automatically return when the business is resumed.

Review Activity before pausing a business that has pending requests.

Delays and Deleted Businesses

Deleting a business may cancel pending requests connected to that business.

The private BCC address may also stop working.

Use Pause instead of Delete when the business may be used again later.

Delays and Monthly Request Usage

A scheduled request may reserve monthly plan capacity when it is created.

This means the request can count toward your available allowance even though the scheduled sending time has not arrived.

For example:

Your plan includes 100 requests.
You have already used or scheduled 90.
You create 10 requests using a 7-day delay.
Your remaining capacity may become zero immediately.

The seven-day wait does not postpone the usage reservation.

View Revilope Plans and Request Limits

Cancelled and Failed Requests

A request that is cancelled before sending or permanently fails may release its reserved plan capacity, depending on its final status.

Check your usage summary after the request status is updated.

Do not assume capacity has returned until the dashboard reflects the change.

Do Not Use Delays to Avoid Customer Protections

Changing the follow-up delay does not override:

Customer suppression.
Duplicate protection.
Pending-request protection.
Cooldown protection.
Plan limits.
Invalid recipient filtering.
Authorized sender requirements.

A request that is not eligible will not become eligible merely because a different delay was selected.

Do Not Schedule Requests Before the Experience Is Complete

Only trigger a request when the customer has had enough of the experience to provide a meaningful review.

Avoid triggering the request from:

An appointment confirmation sent before the appointment.
An invoice sent before work is complete.
An order confirmation sent before delivery.
A quote sent before the customer accepts the service.
A booking confirmation sent weeks before the experience.

Use a completion email, receipt, final invoice, thank-you message, or another suitable point in the customer journey.

Avoid Extremely Late Review Requests

A long delay can reduce the customer’s connection between the request and the original experience.

Before selecting 7 days, consider whether the customer truly needs that much time.

A request sent too late may:

Feel unrelated to the original interaction.
Be easier to ignore.
Produce less detailed feedback.
Confuse customers who had several recent interactions.

Avoid Inconvenient Delivery Times

Revilope currently schedules requests based on the selected relative delay. It does not automatically restrict sending to business hours.

A request may become due early in the morning, late at night, on a weekend, or on a holiday depending on when it was created.

Consider your normal sending schedule before selecting the delay.

For businesses that send original emails at inconsistent times, a 24-hour, 2-day, 3-day, or 7-day delay often preserves a similar time of day.

Examples of Delay Calculations

1-Hour Example

Request created: Monday at 10:20 a.m.

Scheduled time: Monday at approximately 11:20 a.m.

4-Hour Example

Request created: Monday at 2:45 p.m.

Scheduled time: Monday at approximately 6:45 p.m.

12-Hour Example

Request created: Monday at 4:30 p.m.

Scheduled time: Tuesday at approximately 4:30 a.m.

24-Hour Example

Request created: Monday at 11:15 a.m.

Scheduled time: Tuesday at approximately 11:15 a.m.

2-Day Example

Request created: Monday at 1:00 p.m.

Scheduled time: Wednesday at approximately 1:00 p.m.

3-Day Example

Request created: Thursday at 9:30 a.m.

Scheduled time: Sunday at approximately 9:30 a.m.

7-Day Example

Request created: Friday at 3:00 p.m.

Scheduled time: The following Friday at approximately 3:00 p.m.

Weekends and Holidays

A relative delay can schedule a request for a weekend or holiday.

For example, a request created on Thursday with a 3-day delay is scheduled for approximately Sunday.

Revilope does not currently skip weekends or automatically move requests to the next business day.

Choose the delay with this in mind if your customers are less likely to respond on certain days.

Exact Calendar Scheduling

Revilope currently uses predefined relative delays.

You cannot currently select an exact date and clock time for an individual review request.

For example, you cannot schedule a request specifically for:

Tuesday, August 18 at 10:30 a.m.

Instead, you select a delay such as 24 hours, 2 days, or 7 days.

Troubleshooting an Incorrect Scheduled Time

If the scheduled time appears wrong, review the following:

Confirm the request creation time.
Confirm the follow-up delay saved for the business.
Confirm that the correct business BCC address was used.
Confirm whether the request was BCC or manual.
For a manual request, confirm which sending option was selected.
Confirm the timezone selected in your account.
Confirm whether daylight saving time recently changed.
Refresh the Activity page.

The Wrong Business Delay Was Used

This may happen when the wrong private BCC address was added to the original email.

Check:

The business shown in Activity.
The private BCC address used.
The saved delay for that business.
Any saved Revilope contacts in your email application.

Give each saved BCC contact a clear business or location name.

A Manual Request Was Sent Immediately

You may have selected Send as Soon as Possible rather than Use Saved Delay.

Review the submission option selected when the manual request was created.

Once an immediate request has already been sent, it cannot be recalled through Revilope.

A Manual Request Used the Delay Unexpectedly

You may have selected Use Saved Delay.

Check the Activity record and the delay saved for the business.

If the request has not yet been sent and should be cancelled, remove or cancel the pending request where the dashboard allows.

The Request Is Still Scheduled After the Due Time

A short delay can occur because background processing does not always run at the exact second shown.

Check:

Whether the request still shows Scheduled.
Whether it briefly changed to Sending.
Whether the business is active.
Whether the customer unsubscribed.
Whether the request was cancelled.
Whether the timezone display is correct.

Allow a reasonable processing period.

Contact support if the request remains overdue for a significant amount of time.

The Request Was Sent Earlier Than Expected

Check whether:

The manual request was set to Send as Soon as Possible.
The business delay had already been changed before the request was created.
The request was connected to another business.
The displayed timezone changed.
You compared the scheduled time to the original email time rather than the Revilope creation time.

The Request Was Sent Later Than Expected

A later handoff may be caused by:

Mailbox-processing delay before the request was created.
Background scheduling delay.
Temporary sending failure.
Retry processing.
Hosting or server conditions.
Email-provider delay.

Compare the Created, Scheduled, and Sent times in Activity.

Changing the Delay Did Not Update a Scheduled Request

The request may have stored the original schedule when it was created.

Changing the business delay normally affects new requests rather than requests already scheduled.

If an existing request must use the new timing:

Cancel the pending request where possible.
Update the business delay.
Save the business.
Create a new eligible request.
Confirm the new scheduled time in Activity.

Follow-Up Delay Best Practices

Choose a delay based on when the customer can provide meaningful feedback.
Avoid sending before the experience is complete.
Consider what time your staff normally sends customer emails.
Consider the customer’s likely timezone.
Use 24 hours as a practical starting point when unsure.
Use longer delays when customers need time to evaluate the result.
Review the scheduled time in Activity.
Use the correct business BCC address.
Remember that weekends and holidays are not skipped automatically.
Do not expect exact-to-the-second sending.
Do not change the delay expecting existing requests to update automatically.
Review customer feedback and adjust the timing when appropriate.

Follow-Up Delay Checklist

The correct business is selected.
The customer experience is complete.
The saved delay matches the type of service.
The normal email-sending time has been considered.
The customer’s likely timezone has been considered.
The account timezone is correct.
The correct BCC address is being used.
The manual request sending option is correct.
The request appears in Activity.
The scheduled time matches the expected delay.
The business is active.
The account has available request capacity.

You Are Ready to Continue When

You understand the available delay options.
You selected an appropriate delay for each business.
Your account timezone is correct.
You understand that BCC requests use the saved delay automatically.
You understand the difference between immediate and delayed manual requests.
You know how to confirm scheduled times in Activity.
You understand that sending may occur shortly after the exact scheduled time.

Next Step

Continue to the Request Activity and Statuses section to learn how to confirm that a request was accepted, understand each status, and review scheduled and sent times.

Need Help With a Follow-Up Delay?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The request source.
The request creation time.
The scheduled time shown in Activity.
The follow-up delay saved for the business.
The timezone selected in your account.
A description of the timing you expected.

Do not send your Revilope password, email password, payment-card information, or unnecessary customer information.

Request Activity and Statuses

The Activity section shows what happened to each review request created through BCC Review Automation or the Manual Review Requests tool.

Use Activity to confirm that a request was accepted, review when it is scheduled to send, identify requests that were skipped or blocked, and investigate requests that failed.

You should check Activity after sending your first BCC email, after submitting a manual request, and whenever a customer request does not behave as expected.

What Appears in Activity

Each Activity record represents an individual review request or processing result.

A request may display:

The date and time the request was created.
The business connected to the request.
A masked version of the customer’s email address.
The source of the request.
The current request status.
The scheduled sending time.
The sent time when the email was successfully handed off.
An option to remove or cancel the request when available.

The exact information shown may depend on the request status and whether the request has already been sent.

Why You Should Check Activity

Sending an original email with Revilope in BCC does not automatically mean a review request was created.

Revilope may accept, skip, reject, suppress, cancel, or fail a request based on the sender, recipient, business status, plan capacity, duplicate protection, customer cooldown, and unsubscribe records.

Activity allows you to confirm the actual result instead of assuming that the request was scheduled.

How to Open Activity

Sign in to your Revilope account.
Open your Revilope dashboard.
Scroll to or open the Activity area.
Use the available filters to narrow the results when necessary.
Find the request using the business, date, source, masked customer address, or status.

Request Source

The source identifies how the request was created.

BCC Email

BCC Email means Revilope created the request after processing an eligible email sent to the business’s private Revilope BCC address.

A BCC request depends on:

The correct private Revilope address being used.
One eligible customer being placed in the To field.
The email being sent from an authorized and verified sender.
The business being active.
The customer passing duplicate, cooldown, and suppression checks.
The account having enough request capacity.

Manual Request

Manual Request means the customer’s email address was entered directly through the Revilope dashboard.

Manual requests do not require an original customer email or a private BCC address.

They still use:

The selected business’s email template.
The selected business’s Google review link.
The selected business’s reply-to address.
The selected sending option.
The same monthly request allowance as BCC requests.
The same customer duplicate, cooldown, and suppression protections.

Created Time

The Created time shows when Revilope accepted or recorded the request.

For BCC requests, the Created time may be a few minutes later than the time you sent the original email because Revilope must first receive and process the BCC copy.

For manual requests, the Created time is normally close to the time the manual form was submitted.

Example

You send an original customer email at 2:00 p.m.

Revilope processes the BCC copy and creates the request at 2:03 p.m.

The Activity record may show 2:03 p.m. as the Created time.

The follow-up delay is calculated from the request creation time rather than the moment you began writing or sending the original email.

Scheduled Time

The Scheduled time shows when the request becomes due for sending.

For BCC requests, this time is based on the follow-up delay saved for the business when the request is created.

For manual requests, it depends on whether you selected:

Send as soon as possible.
Use the business’s saved follow-up delay.

Example With a 24-Hour Delay

Created time: Monday at 2:03 p.m.

Scheduled time: Tuesday at approximately 2:03 p.m.

Example With a 3-Day Delay

Created time: Monday at 10:30 a.m.

Scheduled time: Thursday at approximately 10:30 a.m.

The scheduled time is the point when the request becomes eligible for background processing. The email may be handed off shortly after that time rather than at the exact second displayed.

Sent Time

The Sent time shows when Revilope successfully handed the review-request email to the configured outgoing mail system.

A Sent time is normally available only after the request reaches the Sent status.

The Sent time may be later than the Scheduled time because of:

Background processing intervals.
Server activity.
Temporary hosting delays.
Email-provider processing.
A temporary sending failure followed by a retry.
Overdue-request recovery.

Timezone Used in Activity

Activity times are displayed using the timezone selected in your Revilope account.

This may include:

Created times.
Scheduled times.
Sent times.

The default timezone is America/New_York.

If the displayed times do not match your local time:

Open the WooCommerce My Account area.
Open the Timezone section.
Select the correct named timezone.
Save the setting.
Refresh Activity.
Confirm that the displayed local time is correct.

Changing the timezone changes how timestamps are displayed. It does not change the actual length of the follow-up delay.

Masked Customer Email Addresses

Customer email addresses are masked in the visible Activity list to reduce unnecessary exposure of complete customer information.

For example, Activity may display an address in a form similar to:

j****@example.com

The masked address helps you identify the customer without displaying the complete readable address throughout the dashboard.

If several customers have similar masked addresses, use the business, date, source, and scheduled time to help identify the correct request.

Filtering Activity

Activity filters help you locate requests without reviewing the complete history manually.

Available filters may include:

Date range.
Business.
Status.

Date Filters

Date filters may include options such as:

Last 7 days.
Last 30 days.
Last 6 months.
Last 12 months.
All time.

Use a recent date range when investigating a request that was just created.

Use a longer range when checking duplicate protection, previous requests, or historical activity.

Business Filter

Use the business filter when your account manages more than one business or location.

This helps you avoid confusing requests from businesses that have similar customer addresses or templates.

Status Filter

Use the status filter to locate:

Scheduled requests.
Sent requests.
Failed requests.
Cancelled requests.
Suppressed customers.
Unauthorized senders.
Requests blocked by the plan limit.

Activity Pagination

If your account has many requests, Activity may be divided into several pages.

When a request does not appear in the current view:

Check the selected date range.
Clear unnecessary filters.
Confirm the correct business is selected.
Check the next Activity page.
Confirm that the request was not created under another business.

Request Status Overview

Revilope uses statuses to explain the current or final result of each request.

Available statuses include:

Scheduled.
Sending.
Sent.
Failed.
Cancelled.
Skipped Duplicate.
Plan Limit.
Suppressed.
Unauthorized Sender.
Invalid Recipient.

Scheduled

Scheduled means Revilope accepted the request and placed it in the outgoing queue.

The request is waiting for its scheduled sending time.

A Scheduled request normally indicates that:

The business was identified successfully.
The request passed the required eligibility checks.
The request reserved monthly plan capacity.
A sending time was calculated.

What to Do

No action is normally required.

Review the Scheduled time and confirm that it matches the business’s expected follow-up delay.

Why a Request May Remain Scheduled Briefly After Its Due Time

Background processing may not occur at the exact second displayed.

A short delay can result from:

WordPress background scheduling.
Server load.
Hosting limitations.
Temporary network conditions.
Queue processing.
Overdue-request recovery.

Allow a reasonable processing period before treating the request as overdue.

Sending

Sending means Revilope is currently attempting to hand the review-request email to the outgoing mail system.

This is normally a temporary status between Scheduled and Sent.

What to Do

Wait for the request to finish processing.

Do not create another request for the same customer while the current request shows Sending.

If Sending Does Not Change

If the request remains in Sending for an unusually long period:

Refresh Activity.
Confirm that the business is still active.
Allow time for a temporary retry.
Check whether other requests are also delayed.
Contact Revilope support if the status does not resolve.

Sent

Sent means the configured mail system accepted the review-request email for sending.

Sent is a successful Revilope handoff status.

It does not mean Revilope confirmed that the message reached the customer’s inbox.

Sent Does Not Guarantee

Inbox delivery.
Placement outside spam or junk.
That the mailbox exists.
That the customer opened the email.
That the customer selected the review button.
That the customer submitted a review.
That the customer left a positive review.

Revilope does not currently provide open tracking, click tracking, completed-review tracking, or Google review monitoring.

If the Customer Did Not Receive a Sent Request

Ask the customer to check:

Spam.
Junk.
Promotions.
Quarantine.
Blocked sender settings.

Delivery may also be affected by:

An incorrect customer address.
A full or disabled mailbox.
The receiving provider’s filtering rules.
Email reputation.
Domain authentication.
A temporary receiving-server issue.

Failed

Failed means Revilope could not complete the outgoing email handoff after the available processing attempts.

A request may experience a temporary failure before receiving a final Failed status.

Revilope may retry temporary sending problems before marking the request as permanently failed.

Possible Causes

A temporary outgoing mail-provider problem.
A hosting or server issue.
A network problem.
An outgoing email configuration error.
A recipient-server rejection.
An invalid or unavailable mailbox.
A temporary authentication problem.

What to Do

Confirm that the customer email address was entered correctly.
Check whether other recent requests also failed.
Allow time for any automatic retry to finish.
Refresh Activity.
Confirm that the business is active.
Contact support if failures are repeated or widespread.

Do not immediately create several replacement requests for the same customer. Confirm that the original request has reached a final Failed status first.

Plan Usage After a Failure

A request that permanently fails before a successful handoff may release its reserved request capacity, depending on the final request state.

Check the plan usage summary after the status is updated.

Cancelled

Cancelled means the request was stopped before it was sent.

A request may be cancelled because:

You removed a pending request from Activity.
The business was paused.
The business was deleted.
The customer unsubscribed before the request was sent.
An account or administrative action stopped the request.
The request became ineligible before sending.

Can a Cancelled Request Be Resumed?

A cancelled request is not normally returned to the sending queue automatically.

If the customer is still eligible and the cancellation was not caused by an unsubscribe or suppression, you may need to create a new request.

Do not recreate a request until you understand why the original request was cancelled.

Plan Usage After Cancellation

An eligible request cancelled before sending may release the request capacity that was reserved for it.

Check your plan usage after the cancellation is processed.

Skipped Duplicate

Skipped Duplicate means Revilope detected that the new request would duplicate an existing, recent, or previously processed request.

This is normally a customer-protection status rather than a technical failure.

Possible Reasons

The same original BCC email was processed more than once.
The same message identifier was already recorded.
The customer already has a pending request.
The customer recently received a request from the same business.
The customer remains within the business’s cooldown period.
The same customer address appeared more than once in a manual submission.

What to Do

Review recent Activity for the same customer and business.
Check for a Scheduled, Sending, or Sent request.
Confirm whether the customer remains within the cooldown period.
Do not repeatedly resubmit the same customer.

Deleting a visible Activity record does not necessarily remove the internal protection used to prevent duplicates or repeated contact.

Plan Limit

Plan Limit means the request could not be accepted because the account did not have enough available capacity or the business was restricted by the current plan.

Possible Reasons

The monthly request allowance was reached.
Scheduled requests already reserved the remaining capacity.
The account was downgraded.
The subscription expired or became inactive.
The business exceeds the current plan’s business limit.
The account is temporarily limited to a lower plan.

What to Check

Your current plan.
The number of requests used.
The number of scheduled requests.
The number of businesses allowed.
Your subscription status.
Your next request reset date.

You can wait for the next allowance reset or move to a plan with a larger request limit.

View Revilope Plans and Request Limits

Suppressed

Suppressed means the customer is blocked from receiving the review request.

This usually occurs because the customer previously used the unsubscribe link in a Revilope review-request email from that business.

What Happens When a Customer Is Suppressed

New requests from the same business may be blocked.
Pending requests may be cancelled.
A protected suppression record may be retained.
The customer should not receive additional Revilope review requests from that business.

Do Not Bypass Suppression

Do not attempt to resend by:

Using another authorized sender.
Changing the capitalization of the email address.
Adding spaces or alternate formatting.
Submitting the customer manually.
Creating another business profile.
Creating another Revilope account.

A suppression record exists to respect the customer’s decision not to receive additional review requests from that business.

Unauthorized Sender

Unauthorized Sender means a BCC email came from an address that Revilope did not recognize as a verified authorized sender for the business.

This status applies to BCC requests. Manual requests are created from the signed-in dashboard and do not use an original email sender.

Possible Reasons

The sender was never added to the business.
The sender is still pending verification.
The sender was added to another business.
The wrong private BCC address was used.
An email alias used a different underlying sender.
A shared mailbox sent on behalf of an employee address.
A third-party system changed the sender information.
The sender was removed from the business.

What to Do

Open the business in Revilope.
Confirm that the intended sender is listed.
Confirm that the sender shows as verified.
Check the actual From address in the original email.
Confirm that the correct business BCC address was used.
Send a direct test from the verified mailbox.
Check Activity again.

Invalid Recipient

Invalid Recipient means Revilope could not identify or accept one eligible customer for the request.

Possible Reasons for a BCC Request

No customer was placed in the To field.
Several customers were placed in To or CC.
The customer was placed only in BCC.
The address format was invalid.
The recipient was an authorized sender.
The recipient was the business reply-to address.
The recipient was a Revilope system address.
The message structure did not identify one clear customer.

Possible Reasons for a Manual Request

The email address was incomplete.
The address was missing the at symbol.
The domain was incomplete.
The address contained invalid spaces or punctuation.
The address belonged to the business or one of its senders.

What to Do

Check the customer email address carefully.
For BCC requests, confirm that one customer was placed in To.
Remove additional customer recipients.
Confirm that the address is not one of your own business addresses.
Create a new request only after correcting the problem.

Typical Status Progression

A successful request normally moves through the following sequence:

Scheduled.
Sending.
Sent.

The Sending step may be brief and may not always be visible when you refresh Activity.

Possible Final Statuses

Common final statuses include:

Sent.
Failed.
Cancelled.
Skipped Duplicate.
Plan Limit.
Suppressed.
Unauthorized Sender.
Invalid Recipient.

A final status explains the request’s last recorded result.

Requests That Do Not Reach Scheduled

Some requests are rejected or skipped before a live sending schedule is created.

Examples include:

Unauthorized Sender.
Invalid Recipient.
Skipped Duplicate.
Plan Limit.
Suppressed.

These requests may appear in Activity so you can understand why the expected review request was not scheduled.

How Activity Affects Monthly Usage

An accepted request may reserve monthly plan capacity when it reaches Scheduled.

This means a request can count toward your allowance before the email is sent.

Statuses That May Use Reserved Capacity

Scheduled.
Sending.
Sent.

Statuses That May Release or Avoid Capacity

Cancelled.
Failed after a final unsuccessful handoff.
Skipped Duplicate.
Plan Limit.
Suppressed.
Unauthorized Sender.
Invalid Recipient.

The exact usage result depends on whether capacity was reserved before the request reached its final status.

Check your plan summary after a status changes.

Removing a Scheduled Request

If a request is still pending, removing it from Activity may cancel the scheduled request.

Before removing it:

Confirm the correct business.
Confirm the masked customer address.
Confirm the Scheduled time.
Confirm that the request has not already changed to Sending or Sent.

After removing a pending request:

The request may be marked Cancelled.
The email should not be sent if cancellation completed in time.
Reserved request capacity may be released.

A request that has already been handed off cannot be recalled through Revilope.

Removing a Completed Activity Record

Removing a Sent, Failed, Cancelled, or skipped record from the visible Activity list may remove it from your normal dashboard view.

It does not necessarily delete every internal record associated with the request.

Revilope may retain limited information needed for:

Customer suppression.
Duplicate protection.
Cooldown protection.
Plan usage.
Security.
Fraud prevention.
Auditing.
Billing disputes.
Legal compliance.

Removing a visible row does not reset the customer’s unsubscribe or cooldown status.

Pausing a Business With Scheduled Requests

Pausing a business may cancel scheduled requests connected to that business.

Before pausing:

Filter Activity by the business.
Review all Scheduled requests.
Decide whether the pending requests should be stopped.
Pause the business only after reviewing the impact.

Requests cancelled during a pause may not automatically resume when the business is reactivated.

Deleting a Business With Scheduled Requests

Deleting a business may:

Cancel pending requests.
Disable the business’s private BCC address.
Remove the business from the normal dashboard.
Preserve limited internal records for suppression, billing, security, or legal purposes.

Use Pause rather than Delete when the business may be used again later.

How to Investigate a Missing BCC Request

If you sent an email with Revilope in BCC but do not see the expected Scheduled request:

Wait several minutes for mailbox processing.
Refresh Activity.
Set the date filter to a recent range.
Clear unnecessary status filters.
Select the correct business.
Look for Unauthorized Sender.
Look for Invalid Recipient.
Look for Skipped Duplicate.
Look for Suppressed.
Look for Plan Limit.
Confirm that the correct private BCC address was used.

The request may appear as a rejection or skipped result rather than as Scheduled.

How to Investigate a Missing Manual Request

If a manual submission does not appear as expected:

Review the result shown after the form was submitted.
Confirm that the correct business was selected.
Refresh Activity.
Filter Activity by Manual Request when available.
Check for Invalid Recipient.
Check for Skipped Duplicate.
Check for Suppressed.
Check for Plan Limit.
Confirm that the customer address was valid.

A Request Is Scheduled for the Wrong Time

Check:

The Created time.
The Scheduled time.
The business’s saved delay.
The private BCC address used.
The manual sending option selected.
Your account timezone.

A small difference between the original email time and the Created time is normal for BCC requests.

Changing the business delay after the request was created may not update the existing Scheduled time.

A Request Remains Scheduled Too Long

If the scheduled time has passed:

Confirm your account timezone.
Refresh Activity.
Allow a reasonable background-processing period.
Confirm that the business is active.
Confirm that the request was not cancelled.
Check whether the customer unsubscribed.
Check whether other requests are also delayed.
Contact support if the request remains significantly overdue.

Several Requests Failed at the Same Time

Several failures close together may indicate a broader outgoing email or hosting issue.

When this happens:

Do not repeatedly resubmit every customer.
Record the approximate failure times.
Confirm whether test emails are also failing.
Confirm whether other businesses are affected.
Contact Revilope support.

One Customer Request Failed

A single failure may be related to the customer’s address or receiving provider.

Check:

The spelling of the address.
Whether the mailbox still exists.
Whether the domain is correct.
Whether the customer can receive other email.

Do not create a replacement request until the original request has reached a final status.

Sent Does Not Mean a Review Was Left

Revilope sends the review request but does not control what the customer does afterward.

A Sent status does not confirm:

That the customer opened the message.
That the customer selected the button.
That the customer signed in to Google.
That the customer submitted a review.
That Google published the review.

Revilope does not currently connect to your Google Business Profile to match requests with completed reviews.

Activity and Customer Privacy

Activity is designed to provide useful request information while limiting unnecessary exposure of customer data.

Customer addresses are masked in the visible list.

Revilope may retain protected or encrypted customer information internally for:

Sending scheduled requests.
Duplicate prevention.
Cooldown checks.
Suppression checks.
Security.
Request troubleshooting.

Only authorized account users should have access to the Revilope dashboard.

Activity Best Practices

Check Activity after your first BCC request.
Check Activity after each manual batch.
Review Scheduled times for accuracy.
Investigate Unauthorized Sender results promptly.
Do not repeatedly resubmit skipped customers.
Respect Suppressed results.
Review Failed requests before creating replacements.
Use filters when managing multiple businesses.
Confirm your account timezone.
Review monthly usage alongside Activity.
Cancel incorrect pending requests before they are sent.
Do not assume Sent means inbox delivery or a completed review.

Request Activity Checklist

The correct business is shown.
The request source is correct.
The masked customer address matches the intended customer.
The Created time is reasonable.
The Scheduled time matches the expected delay.
The account timezone is correct.
The status has been reviewed.
Skipped or blocked statuses have been investigated.
Failed requests have not been resubmitted prematurely.
Suppressed customers have not been resubmitted.
Plan usage has been checked.
Incorrect pending requests have been cancelled where possible.

Status Quick Reference

Scheduled means the request was accepted and is waiting for its sending time.
Sending means Revilope is currently processing the outgoing email.
Sent means the mail system accepted the email for sending.
Failed means the email handoff could not be completed after the available attempts.
Cancelled means the request was stopped before sending.
Skipped Duplicate means an existing, recent, or repeated request was detected.
Plan Limit means the account did not have enough available capacity.
Suppressed means the customer is blocked from receiving the request.
Unauthorized Sender means the original BCC email came from an unverified or unapproved address.
Invalid Recipient means Revilope could not identify or accept one eligible customer.

You Are Ready to Continue When

You know where to find Activity.
You understand the difference between BCC and Manual request sources.
You understand Created, Scheduled, and Sent times.
Your account timezone is correct.
You understand every request status.
You know that Sent does not guarantee inbox delivery or a completed review.
You know how to investigate skipped, blocked, cancelled, and failed requests.
You know how pending-request cancellation may affect plan usage.

Next Step

Continue to the Duplicate Protection section to learn how Revilope prevents repeated source messages, overlapping scheduled requests, and excessive review requests to the same customer.

Need Help With a Request Status?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The request source.
The status shown in Activity.
The Created time.
The Scheduled time.
The Sent time when available.
The sender address used for a BCC request.
Whether you are using an alias, shared mailbox, or third-party email system.
A description of what you expected to happen.

Do not send your Revilope password, email password, payment-card information, complete customer lists, verification tokens, or unnecessary sensitive customer information.

Duplicate Protection

Duplicate Protection helps prevent the same customer from receiving repeated review requests from the same business within a short period of time.

Revilope checks both BCC-triggered requests and manual requests for signs that the customer has already been scheduled, recently contacted, or submitted more than once.

These protections reduce accidental over-contact caused by repeated invoices, duplicate customer lists, multiple staff members, email-system retries, or the same original message being processed more than once.

Why Duplicate Protection Matters

Customers may receive several emails from a business during the same transaction or service.

For example, a customer may receive:

An appointment confirmation.
A payment receipt.
An invoice.
A completed-service notice.
A thank-you email.
A customer-support follow-up.

If Revilope were added to every message, the customer could receive several review requests for the same experience.

Duplicate Protection helps prevent this by checking whether another request already exists or whether the customer was contacted recently.

What Duplicate Protection Checks

Revilope may use several checks before accepting a request.

These checks may include:

Whether the same original BCC email was already processed.
Whether the customer already has a pending request.
Whether the customer recently received a request from the same business.
Whether the customer is still within the business’s cooldown period.
Whether the same email address appears more than once in a manual submission.
Whether another manual or BCC request already exists for the customer.

A request that is blocked by one of these checks may appear with a Skipped Duplicate status.

Duplicate Protection Applies Per Business

Duplicate and cooldown protection are generally applied separately for each Revilope business.

This means a request from one business does not automatically block a request from an unrelated business.

For example:

A customer receives a request from Greenway Dental Mississauga.
The same customer later receives service from an unrelated company using Revilope.
The unrelated business may still be able to send its own request.

For businesses with multiple locations, each location may be configured as a separate Revilope business.

You should still avoid sending unnecessary requests across related locations when the customer’s experience does not justify another review request.

Source Message Duplicate Protection

Email messages normally contain a technical message identifier.

Revilope may use this identifier to recognize when the same original BCC email has already been processed.

This helps prevent repeated requests when:

The mailbox is scanned again.
A temporary connection issue causes the same email to be detected twice.
An email server creates more than one copy of the message.
The same message is moved or copied between mailbox folders.
A background process retries the same inbound message.

If Revilope recognizes the original message as already processed, it may record the later attempt as Skipped Duplicate instead of creating another review request.

Do Not Resend the Same Original Email to Force Another Request

If the original customer email was already processed, resending or forwarding the same message may not create another request.

Do not repeatedly send the same customer email in an attempt to override Duplicate Protection.

If the original request has a problem, review its Activity status before taking further action.

Pending Request Protection

Revilope may block a new request when the same customer already has another request waiting to be sent for the same business.

This prevents multiple scheduled requests from building up before the first request is delivered.

Example

A customer receives a completed-service email on Monday.

The business has a 3-day follow-up delay, so Revilope schedules the review request for Thursday.

On Tuesday, another employee sends the customer a receipt and adds Revilope to BCC again.

Because the customer already has a pending request, the new request may be skipped as a duplicate.

Scheduled Requests Count as Existing Requests

A request does not need to reach Sent before Duplicate Protection can apply.

A request showing Scheduled or Sending may already prevent another request to the same customer from the same business.

Before resubmitting a customer, check Activity for:

Scheduled.
Sending.
Sent.
Cancelled.
Failed.

Do not assume a customer is eligible simply because the first email has not yet been sent.

Customer Cooldown Protection

After a customer receives a review request, Revilope may apply a cooldown period before another request from the same business can be created.

The standard cooldown is approximately 90 days per business.

This helps prevent repeat customers from receiving review requests too frequently.

Example

A customer receives a review request from a business on January 10.

The same customer returns on February 5 and another request is triggered.

Because the customer is still within the standard cooldown period, the new request may be skipped.

After the cooldown period has passed, a new request may become technically eligible, but the business should still decide whether another request is appropriate.

The Cooldown Is Not a Recommendation to Contact Every 90 Days

The cooldown is a minimum protection against repeated requests. It is not an instruction to send another request automatically as soon as the cooldown expires.

Before requesting another review from a repeat customer, consider:

Whether the customer had a new and meaningful experience.
Whether the customer already reviewed the business.
Whether the new service was substantially different.
Whether another request would feel excessive.
Whether the customer previously expressed communication preferences.

Use good judgment even when Revilope allows the new request.

BCC and Manual Requests Share Duplicate Protection

Duplicate Protection applies across both request methods.

A manual request may be blocked because a BCC request already exists.

A BCC request may be blocked because a manual request already exists.

Example

A staff member manually schedules a request for a customer.

Later that day, another employee sends the customer a receipt and adds Revilope to BCC.

Revilope may skip the BCC request because the manual request is already scheduled.

Duplicate Addresses in a Manual Submission

If the same email address appears more than once in one manual submission, Revilope may remove or skip the repeated entries.

Example

customer@example.com

These repeated entries should not create three separate requests.

Revilope may process the address once and treat the remaining entries as duplicates.

Manual Submission Separators

Manual requests can accept addresses separated by:

Commas.
Semicolons.
Spaces.
New lines.

Regardless of the separator used, repeated versions of the same address may be treated as duplicates.

Email Address Normalization

Revilope may normalize email addresses before comparing them.

This can include removing unnecessary spaces and comparing addresses without relying on capitalization differences.

For example, these entries may be treated as the same address:

customer@example.com
Customer@example.com
customer@example.com with an accidental space before or after it

Changing capitalization or adding spaces is not a valid way to create another request.

Email Aliases and Alternate Addresses

Some customers may use several email aliases that deliver to the same inbox.

Revilope may not always know that two technically different addresses belong to the same person.

Examples may include:

customer@example.com
customer+orders@example.com
customer.work@example.com
another address that forwards to the same mailbox.

Your business is responsible for avoiding repeated requests when you know that several addresses belong to the same customer.

Do not intentionally use alternate addresses to bypass Duplicate Protection.

Duplicate Protection and Multiple Employees

Duplicate requests commonly happen when several staff members communicate with the same customer.

For example:

A receptionist sends an appointment follow-up.
A manager sends a thank-you email.
An accounting employee sends a receipt.
Each employee adds Revilope to BCC.

Revilope may block the later requests, but your business should still establish a clear internal rule for when the BCC address is used.

Choose One Trigger Point

Select one appropriate message in the customer journey to trigger the review request.

Suitable trigger points may include:

The final receipt.
The completed-service notice.
The final project-delivery email.
The appointment follow-up.
The closing thank-you message.
The order completion email.

Avoid adding Revilope to every email in an ongoing conversation.

Duplicate Protection and Email Threads

An email conversation may contain several replies and forwards.

Each new reply may have its own technical message information, even when it belongs to the same conversation.

Revilope may therefore rely on customer-level pending and cooldown checks in addition to source-message protection.

Do not assume that replying within the same thread will always be recognized as the exact same source message.

Forwarded Emails

Forwarding a previously sent customer email to Revilope is not the recommended way to create a request.

A forwarded email may change:

The sender.
The direct recipient.
The message identifier.
The routing information.
The visible customer information.

Use the normal BCC workflow when sending the original email or use the Manual Review Requests feature.

Automatic Email Retries

Email providers and mailbox systems may retry delivery when a temporary connection issue occurs.

Revilope’s source-message protection is intended to reduce the chance that these technical retries create several customer requests.

You should not need to take action when the same inbound message is detected more than once.

Duplicate Protection and Plan Usage

A request blocked as a duplicate generally does not create another live scheduled request.

Because no new live request is created, it should not normally reserve an additional request from your monthly allowance.

Review your plan summary and Activity if you are unsure how a particular request affected usage.

Accepted Scheduled, Sending, and Sent requests normally use or reserve capacity.

Skipped Duplicate Status

Skipped Duplicate means Revilope found a reason not to create another live request for the same customer or source message.

This status may appear because:

The same BCC message was already processed.
The customer already has a pending request.
The customer recently received a request.
The customer remains within the cooldown period.
The same address appeared more than once in a manual submission.

A Skipped Duplicate status does not usually mean Revilope is malfunctioning.

It normally means a customer-protection rule worked as intended.

What to Do When You See Skipped Duplicate

Open Activity.
Filter by the correct business.
Review recent requests for the masked customer address.
Look for an existing Scheduled, Sending, or Sent request.
Check the dates of previous requests.
Consider whether the customer is within the cooldown period.
Do not immediately resubmit the customer.

If an existing valid request is already scheduled, no further action is required.

Skipped Duplicate Versus Suppressed

Skipped Duplicate and Suppressed are different statuses.

Skipped Duplicate

The customer may be eligible in the future, but another request currently exists or the customer was contacted recently.

Suppressed

The customer has an unsubscribe or other suppression record that blocks future review requests from the business.

Do not treat a Suppressed customer as someone who will automatically become eligible after the cooldown period.

Skipped Duplicate Versus Plan Limit

Skipped Duplicate means another request is unnecessary or too recent.

Plan Limit means the account does not have enough available request capacity or the business is restricted under the current plan.

Upgrading your plan does not override Duplicate Protection.

View Revilope Plans

Skipped Duplicate Versus Invalid Recipient

Skipped Duplicate means Revilope recognized the customer but found an existing or recent request.

Invalid Recipient means Revilope could not accept or identify a valid customer address.

An Invalid Recipient may be caused by:

An incomplete email address.
Several customers in one BCC email.
No clear customer in the To field.
A business or staff address.

Deleting Activity Does Not Reset Duplicate Protection

Removing a request from the visible Activity list does not necessarily erase the internal information used for duplicate or cooldown checks.

Revilope may retain protected request information for:

Duplicate prevention.
Cooldown protection.
Customer suppression.
Plan usage.
Security.
Auditing.
Legal compliance.

Do not delete an Activity row expecting the customer to become immediately eligible for another request.

Deleting and Recreating a Business

Do not delete and recreate a business to bypass Duplicate Protection.

This may:

Disable the original private BCC address.
Cancel pending requests.
Create confusing duplicate business profiles.
Disconnect the new profile from existing activity.
Violate Revilope’s Terms of Service.

Duplicate Protection exists to protect customers and responsible use of the Service.

Using Another Account

Do not create or use another Revilope account to resend a request that was skipped by Duplicate Protection.

Using multiple accounts to avoid limits, cooldowns, suppression, or duplicate rules is not permitted.

Changing the Customer Address

Do not alter an email address merely to avoid a duplicate result.

Examples of inappropriate attempts include:

Changing capitalization.
Adding extra spaces.
Adding a plus-address variation.
Using another known address for the same person without a valid reason.
Submitting a forwarding address that reaches the same customer.

Use the customer’s correct, current email address and respect the duplicate result.

Repeat Customers

A repeat customer may become eligible for another review request after a new and meaningful experience.

Before triggering another request, consider:

Whether the previous request was recent.
Whether the customer already left a review.
Whether the new service was meaningfully different.
Whether another request would be useful or excessive.
Whether the cooldown period has passed.

Revilope’s technical eligibility does not automatically mean another request is the right customer experience.

Customers Who Already Left a Review

Revilope does not currently monitor your Google Business Profile or know whether a customer completed a review.

A customer who already reviewed the business may still become technically eligible after the cooldown period.

Your business should avoid repeatedly asking known reviewers to review the same experience again.

A repeat customer may choose to update a previous review after a later experience, but the decision should remain voluntary.

Multiple Locations

When a business has several locations, each location may have a separate Revilope profile and Google review link.

Duplicate Protection may operate separately for each business profile.

For example:

A customer receives a request from the Mississauga location.
The customer later visits the Oakville location.
The Oakville request may not be blocked by the Mississauga business history.

You should still avoid excessive contact across related locations.

Only send another request when the customer had a genuine and distinct experience with the second location.

Agencies Managing Multiple Businesses

Agencies should maintain clear separation between client businesses.

Before submitting a customer, confirm:

The correct client business.
The correct customer list.
The correct Google review link.
The correct template.
The correct location.

Do not move a skipped customer into another client profile to avoid Duplicate Protection.

Duplicate Protection and Imported Lists

Customer lists may contain repeated addresses from several sources.

Before pasting a list into Manual Review Requests:

Combine the customer records carefully.
Remove duplicate email addresses.
Remove staff and business addresses.
Remove customers who already received a request.
Remove customers who unsubscribed.
Confirm that every customer belongs to the selected business.
Submit a smaller batch first when appropriate.

Revilope’s duplicate checks provide additional protection, but they do not replace proper list preparation.

Duplicate Protection and Old Customer Lists

An old customer list may include customers who were already contacted through BCC automation or a previous manual submission.

Before resubmitting an older list:

Review Activity.
Remove known previous recipients.
Remove customers who may no longer have a valid relationship with the business.
Confirm that contacting the customers is still appropriate and legally permitted.

Duplicate Protection and Customer Privacy

Revilope may use encrypted customer email addresses and protected comparison values to identify duplicate, cooldown, and suppression matches.

This allows Revilope to compare customer addresses without displaying complete readable addresses throughout the dashboard.

Customer addresses shown in Activity are masked.

How Long Duplicate Information May Be Retained

Revilope may retain limited protected information for as long as reasonably necessary to:

Prevent duplicate requests.
Apply customer cooldowns.
Honour unsubscribe requests.
Maintain security.
Resolve disputes.
Comply with legal obligations.

Removing visible Activity does not necessarily remove these protections.

Can Duplicate Protection Be Turned Off?

Duplicate Protection is a core customer-protection feature and is not intended to be disabled for individual requests.

It helps protect:

Your customers from excessive messages.
Your business reputation.
Your email sending reputation.
Responsible use of Revilope.

If you believe a legitimate request was incorrectly skipped, review the customer’s recent Activity and contact Revilope support.

Can the Cooldown Be Changed?

The standard Revilope cooldown is approximately 90 days per business.

The normal customer dashboard may not provide a setting to change this period.

Do not assume the cooldown can be shortened or removed for a particular customer.

A Cancelled Request and Duplicate Protection

If a scheduled request is cancelled before sending, the customer may become eligible again depending on why the request was cancelled and whether other protection records exist.

For example, a request cancelled because the business was paused may be treated differently from a request cancelled because the customer unsubscribed.

Do not immediately resubmit the customer until the cancellation is fully processed and you understand the reason.

A Failed Request and Duplicate Protection

A request that permanently fails may eventually release its reserved capacity and may no longer be treated as a successful recent request.

However, do not immediately submit another request while the original is still scheduled, sending, retrying, or unresolved.

Wait for the final status before deciding whether another attempt is appropriate.

A Sent Request That Was Not Received

A Sent status means the configured email system accepted the request for sending.

Even if the customer says they did not see it, the request may still count as a recent request for Duplicate Protection.

Do not immediately create repeated requests because the customer did not notice the first email.

Ask the customer to check:

Spam.
Junk.
Promotions.
Quarantine.

What Duplicate Protection Does Not Do

Duplicate Protection does not:

Confirm that the customer opened the email.
Confirm that the customer clicked the review button.
Confirm that the customer left a Google review.
Identify every alternate email address belonging to the same person.
Replace your business’s responsibility to manage customer communication.
Guarantee that no customer will ever receive more than one request.

Your staff should still follow a clear and responsible review-request process.

Recommended Internal Process

To reduce duplicate requests, establish an internal rule for your team.

For example:

Choose one customer email that triggers the review request.
Use Revilope only after the service is complete.
Do not add Revilope to every email in the conversation.
Check Activity before manually submitting a customer.
Train staff to use the correct business BCC address.
Review Skipped Duplicate statuses regularly.
Respect the customer cooldown.
Do not attempt to bypass duplicate rules.

Troubleshooting a Skipped Duplicate

The Customer Does Not Appear to Have Another Request

Check:

A longer Activity date range.
The correct business filter.
Earlier Activity pages.
Both BCC and Manual request sources.
Scheduled, Sending, Sent, Failed, and Cancelled statuses.

The customer may have been contacted earlier than the currently selected date range shows.

The Customer Was Submitted to Another Business

Confirm which business produced the duplicate result.

Duplicate Protection is normally tied to the business profile connected to the request.

Make sure the correct business and location were selected.

The Original Request Was Cancelled

Allow time for the cancellation to finish processing.

Check whether the cancellation was caused by:

A business pause.
A business deletion.
A customer unsubscribe.
A manual cancellation.

A customer unsubscribed request should not be recreated.

The Original Request Failed

Confirm that the request reached a final Failed status and is not still retrying.

Review whether the customer address is correct before considering another attempt.

The Customer Used Another Email Address

Revilope may not know that two different addresses belong to the same person.

Your business should avoid repeated requests when it has that knowledge.

The Same Manual List Was Submitted Twice

The second submission may produce Skipped Duplicate results for customers already accepted in the first submission.

Review the first submission and Activity instead of submitting the list again.

The Same BCC Email Was Detected Twice

Revilope may record one accepted request and one Skipped Duplicate result.

This normally means the message-level protection worked correctly.

Duplicate Protection Best Practices

Choose one appropriate BCC trigger point.
Do not BCC every message in a customer conversation.
Check Activity before creating a manual request.
Remove duplicates from customer lists before submitting.
Use the correct business and location.
Train staff on when to use Revilope.
Do not resubmit customers who already have Scheduled requests.
Respect the standard cooldown period.
Do not use alternate addresses to bypass protection.
Do not delete Activity expecting to reset eligibility.
Do not create another account or business profile to avoid duplicate rules.
Wait for Failed or Cancelled requests to reach a final state before taking further action.

Duplicate Protection Checklist

The correct business is selected.
The customer does not already have a Scheduled request.
The customer does not have a request currently Sending.
The customer did not recently receive a request from the same business.
The customer is not within the cooldown period.
The same original BCC email was not already processed.
The customer address appears only once in the manual submission.
Other staff members have not already submitted the customer.
The customer is not being resubmitted through another email address.
Activity has been reviewed before another attempt.

You Are Ready to Continue When

You understand why Revilope may skip duplicate requests.
You understand source-message protection.
You understand pending-request protection.
You understand the approximately 90-day business-specific cooldown.
You know that BCC and Manual requests are checked together.
You know that deleting Activity does not necessarily reset protection.
You know not to bypass duplicate rules using alternate addresses, businesses, or accounts.
You know how to investigate a Skipped Duplicate status.

Next Step

Continue to the Unsubscribes and Suppression section to learn what happens when a customer opts out and how Revilope prevents future requests from that business.

Need Help With a Duplicate Request?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The request source.
The Skipped Duplicate status.
The approximate request date and time.
Whether the request was created through BCC or Manual Requests.
Whether another request appears in Activity.
A description of why you believe the request should have been eligible.

Do not send your Revilope password, email password, payment-card information, full customer lists, or unnecessary sensitive customer information.

Unsubscribes and Suppression

Every live Revilope review request includes an unsubscribe option that allows the customer to stop receiving future review requests from that business.

When a customer unsubscribes, Revilope creates a suppression record for the customer and business. Future requests from that business are blocked, and any eligible pending requests for the same customer and business are cancelled.

Unsubscribe and suppression controls help protect customer choice, reduce unwanted repeat contact, and support responsible use of Revilope.

What Unsubscribe Means

Unsubscribing tells Revilope that the customer does not want to receive additional review-request emails from the business identified in the message.

After the unsubscribe is processed:

New review requests from that business are blocked.
Pending requests from that business are cancelled.
Reserved request capacity for cancelled pending requests is released when applicable.
The customer may appear as Suppressed in Activity.
A protected suppression record is retained so the preference can continue to be honoured.

The unsubscribe applies to Revilope review requests from the specific business connected to the email.

Unsubscribe Applies Per Business

Revilope suppression is applied separately for each business.

For example:

A customer unsubscribes from review requests sent by Greenway Dental.
Revilope blocks future Greenway Dental requests to that customer.
The same customer is not automatically unsubscribed from an unrelated business using Revilope.

This business-specific approach is important for accounts that manage several companies, brands, or locations.

However, related businesses and locations should still use good judgment. A customer should not be moved to another business profile simply to avoid an unsubscribe.

Where the Unsubscribe Link Appears

The unsubscribe option appears in the footer area of live customer review-request emails.

The email footer may also contain:

The business name.
The business mailing address.
Revilope sending information.
Other required message information.

The unsubscribe option should remain visible and accessible to the customer.

Do not attempt to hide, remove, cover, or obscure the unsubscribe link.

Test Emails and Unsubscribes

A test email is a preview sent to the email address associated with your Revilope account.

Because a test email is not a normal customer request, it may not include an active customer unsubscribe action.

A test email:

Does not create a normal customer request.
Does not count toward the monthly request allowance.
Does not create a live customer suppression record.
May contain test-specific footer or unsubscribe information.

Do not use a test email to evaluate whether a customer has been suppressed.

What Is a Suppression Record?

A suppression record is a protected record that tells Revilope not to send additional review requests to a customer for a particular business.

The record allows Revilope to recognize the customer during future BCC and manual request attempts.

Suppression is different from simply deleting a request from Activity.

A suppression record exists to preserve the customer’s opt-out preference even when:

The original Activity record is no longer visible.
The customer is submitted manually later.
A different authorized sender contacts the customer.
The same customer appears in another imported list.
The business attempts another BCC request.

What Happens to Pending Requests?

When a customer unsubscribes, Revilope checks for pending requests associated with the same customer and business.

Eligible pending requests are cancelled so that the customer does not receive another review request after opting out.

This may include requests with statuses such as:

Scheduled.
Waiting for their follow-up delay.
Queued for later processing.

A request that has already been handed off for sending may not be recallable.

Plan Capacity After a Pending Request Is Cancelled

A scheduled request may reserve monthly request capacity when it is created.

If that pending request is cancelled because the customer unsubscribed, the reserved request capacity is released when the cancellation is processed.

For example:

Your plan includes 100 monthly requests.
A customer has one request scheduled.
The customer unsubscribes before the request is sent.
The scheduled request is cancelled.
The reserved request capacity is released.

Check the plan usage summary after the cancellation has been processed.

What Happens to New BCC Requests?

If a suppressed customer is identified in a new BCC-triggered request, Revilope blocks the review request.

The original business email you sent to the customer is separate from Revilope’s later review request.

Revilope does not cancel or recall the original customer email. It prevents the separate Revilope review-request email from being created or sent.

The Activity result may show Suppressed.

What Happens to New Manual Requests?

If a suppressed customer is entered through Manual Review Requests, Revilope checks the customer against the business’s suppression records.

The request is blocked and may appear as Suppressed or be identified as ineligible in the submission result.

Submitting the same customer manually does not bypass an unsubscribe created through a previous BCC or manual request.

BCC and Manual Requests Share Suppression Protection

Suppression applies across both request methods.

This means:

A customer who unsubscribes from a BCC-triggered request is also blocked from manual requests by the same business.
A customer who unsubscribes from a manually created request is also blocked from future BCC requests by the same business.

The customer’s preference is connected to the business, not only to the method that created the original request.

Suppressed Status

Suppressed means Revilope found a valid suppression record and did not allow the review request to proceed.

This status normally indicates that:

The customer previously unsubscribed from Revilope review requests sent by the business.
A pending request was cancelled after an unsubscribe.
The customer is otherwise blocked by a valid suppression record.

Suppressed is a final protection status. It should not be treated as a temporary sending error.

Suppressed Is Different From Skipped Duplicate

Suppressed

The customer has an active opt-out or suppression record for the business.

Future review requests from that business should remain blocked.

Skipped Duplicate

The customer already has a pending request, recently received a request, or is still within the cooldown period.

A customer with a Skipped Duplicate result may become eligible later.

A suppressed customer does not automatically become eligible when the cooldown period ends.

Suppressed Is Different From Cancelled

Cancelled describes what happened to a particular scheduled request.

Suppressed describes the customer’s eligibility to receive review requests from the business.

A request may be cancelled because the customer became suppressed.

However, requests can also be cancelled for other reasons, such as:

The business was paused.
The business was deleted.
The account user manually cancelled the request.
An administrative action stopped the request.

Do not assume every Cancelled request means the customer unsubscribed. Review the surrounding Activity information before taking action.

Suppressed Is Different From Invalid Recipient

Suppressed means the customer address was recognized but is blocked from receiving the request.

Invalid Recipient means Revilope could not accept the customer address or identify one eligible customer.

Invalid Recipient may be caused by:

An incorrectly formatted address.
Several customers in one BCC email.
No customer in the To field.
A business or staff address.
An incomplete manual entry.

Suppressed Is Different From Plan Limit

Suppressed means the customer is not eligible because of an opt-out or suppression record.

Plan Limit means the account does not have enough available request capacity.

Upgrading the Revilope plan does not remove customer suppression.

Do Not Bypass an Unsubscribe

Do not attempt to send another review request to a suppressed customer by changing how the request is created.

Do not attempt to bypass suppression by:

Using Manual Review Requests after a BCC request was suppressed.
Using BCC automation after a manual request was suppressed.
Using another authorized sender.
Changing the capitalization of the customer’s email address.
Adding spaces before or after the address.
Using a plus-address variation.
Using another known address for the same person.
Creating another business profile for the same business.
Creating another Revilope account.
Deleting Activity records.

Suppression exists to respect the customer’s decision.

Do Not Use Another Business Profile to Resend

Suppression is applied per business, but that does not make it appropriate to move the customer into another profile representing the same business.

Do not create duplicate business profiles or use another location merely to send around an unsubscribe.

For example, do not:

Submit a Mississauga customer through the Oakville business because the Mississauga request was suppressed.
Create a second copy of the same company with a slightly different name.
Move the customer to an agency client profile that does not represent the actual business relationship.

Do Not Ask Staff to Contact the Customer Through Revilope Again

Changing the employee or authorized sender does not change the customer’s unsubscribe preference.

The suppression applies to the business, not only to the employee who triggered the first request.

A different staff member should not attempt to create another Revilope request for the customer.

Do Not Delete Activity to Reset Suppression

Deleting or removing a visible Activity record does not remove the protected suppression record.

Revilope may retain limited customer information needed to:

Honour unsubscribe requests.
Block future review requests.
Cancel pending requests.
Prevent abuse.
Resolve support issues.
Meet legal and security obligations.

Removing a dashboard row is not an unsubscribe reset.

Do Not Delete and Recreate the Business

Deleting and recreating a business should not be used to avoid a customer’s unsubscribe preference.

Deleting a business may also:

Cancel pending requests.
Disable the old private BCC address.
Remove the business from the normal dashboard.
Create confusion between old and new activity.
Cause staff to use outdated BCC addresses.

Use business deletion only when the profile is no longer required, not as a way to resend to suppressed customers.

Using Another Customer Email Address

A customer may have more than one email address.

Revilope may not always know that two different addresses belong to the same person.

Your business should not use another known address to avoid the customer’s opt-out decision.

For example, do not send to:

The customer’s work address after they unsubscribed using a personal address.
A plus-address variation of the same inbox.
An alternate address found in another customer record.
A forwarding address that reaches the same person.

Respect the customer’s expressed preference even when another technical address is available.

Customer Replies Versus the Unsubscribe Link

A customer may opt out by selecting the unsubscribe link in the review-request email.

A customer may also reply directly to the business and ask not to receive further requests.

If a customer replies with an opt-out request:

Do not send another Revilope review request.
Record the request in your own customer records.
Cancel any pending request where possible.
Contact Revilope support when assistance is needed to confirm suppression.

Do not require the customer to click the unsubscribe link after they have clearly asked the business to stop contacting them.

Unsubscribing From Review Requests Is Not the Same as Unsubscribing From Every Business Email

The Revilope unsubscribe controls review-request emails sent through Revilope for the specific business.

It does not automatically manage every other communication system used by the business.

The business may use separate systems for:

Invoices.
Receipts.
Appointment reminders.
Order updates.
Customer support.
Newsletters.
Promotional marketing.

Your business remains responsible for managing customer preferences in those other systems.

A Revilope unsubscribe should not be interpreted as permission to ignore broader opt-out requests the customer communicated directly to the business.

Unsubscribe Does Not Cancel the Customer’s Original Business Email

BCC Review Automation begins with a normal email sent by your business.

The Revilope unsubscribe applies to the later review request, not to the original invoice, receipt, service email, or customer-support message.

Revilope cannot recall or cancel the original business email because that message was sent through your own email system.

Unsubscribe Does Not Remove a Google Review

Unsubscribing from future review requests does not:

Remove an existing Google review.
Edit a Google review.
Prevent the customer from reviewing the business independently.
Change the customer’s Google account.
Contact Google on the customer’s behalf.

Revilope does not control or manage reviews posted on Google.

Unsubscribe Does Not Confirm Whether a Review Was Left

A customer may unsubscribe before or after interacting with the review button.

Revilope does not currently monitor:

Whether the customer opened the email.
Whether the customer clicked the review button.
Whether the customer signed in to Google.
Whether the customer submitted a review.
Whether Google published the review.

The unsubscribe record should be respected regardless of whether the customer left a review.

Unsubscribe and the 90-Day Cooldown

Customer suppression and the review-request cooldown are separate protections.

The standard cooldown may block another request for approximately 90 days after a recent request.

Suppression is not a temporary cooldown.

For example:

A customer receives a request and does not unsubscribe.
Another request within the cooldown period may be marked Skipped Duplicate.
The customer may become technically eligible after the cooldown ends.

By comparison:

A customer receives a request and unsubscribes.
Future requests from that business are suppressed.
The customer does not automatically become eligible after 90 days.

Unsubscribe and Multiple Locations

Each Revilope location may be configured as a separate business.

An unsubscribe from one location is applied to the business profile connected to that request.

For example:

A customer unsubscribes from Greenway Dental Mississauga.
The Mississauga business should not send another Revilope review request to that customer.
The suppression does not automatically prove that the customer unsubscribed from Greenway Dental Oakville.

Related locations should still avoid excessive contact.

Do not submit the customer through another location unless the customer had a genuine, separate experience there and the request is appropriate.

Unsubscribe and Agencies

Agencies managing several client businesses must keep customer data and suppression behaviour separated correctly.

Before submitting a customer, confirm:

The correct client business.
The correct location.
The correct customer list.
The correct Google review link.
The correct suppression result.

Do not move a suppressed customer into another client business to avoid the suppression.

Unsubscribe and Imported Customer Lists

When submitting an older or imported customer list, some customers may already have suppression records.

Revilope checks submitted addresses and blocks customers who are suppressed for the selected business.

Before submitting a list:

Remove customers who asked your business not to contact them.
Remove known Revilope unsubscribes.
Remove duplicate addresses.
Remove staff and business addresses.
Confirm that every remaining person is a genuine customer.
Submit a smaller batch first when appropriate.
Review the result before submitting more customers.

Do not rely only on Revilope to clean a customer list. Your business should maintain its own accurate communication preferences.

Unsubscribe and Plan Usage

A new request blocked as Suppressed does not create a live scheduled request.

Because no review request is scheduled, the blocked attempt should not reserve another monthly request.

If a previously scheduled request is cancelled because of an unsubscribe, its reserved capacity is released when the cancellation is processed.

Review your plan usage summary after the relevant statuses update.

Unsubscribe and Scheduled Batches

A customer may appear in a manual batch containing several addresses.

If that customer is suppressed:

The suppressed customer is blocked.
Other eligible customers in the same batch may still be accepted.
The submission result may contain a mixture of accepted and suppressed addresses.

Review the result carefully instead of assuming that the entire batch succeeded or failed.

Unsubscribe and BCC Email Threads

A customer may continue to receive normal one-to-one business emails after unsubscribing from Revilope review requests.

Do not add Revilope to BCC when communicating with a customer you know is suppressed.

Revilope should block the later review request, but your team should also respect the preference before submitting the message.

Unsubscribe Link Security

Revilope unsubscribe links are created for the intended request and customer.

Do not:

Publish an unsubscribe link publicly.
Reuse one customer’s link for another customer.
Edit the unsubscribe link manually.
Place the link in unrelated marketing emails.
Forward a customer’s review request as a template for other customers.

Each live customer should receive a separate review-request email generated by Revilope.

Forwarded Review Requests

A customer may forward their review-request email to another person.

The unsubscribe link remains connected to the original request and customer information.

Businesses should not forward one live customer’s review-request email to another customer.

Use BCC Review Automation or Manual Review Requests to create a separate request for each eligible customer.

Accidental Unsubscribes

A customer may report that they selected the unsubscribe link accidentally.

Do not immediately create another request or attempt to remove the suppression yourself.

Ask the customer to contact the business or Revilope support so the situation can be reviewed.

Removal of a suppression should not be assumed or promised.

The customer’s request and identity may need to be confirmed before any change is considered.

Can the Business Remove a Suppression?

The normal business dashboard may not provide a self-service control for removing customer suppression.

This prevents businesses from overriding customer unsubscribe decisions without proper review.

If a customer clearly requests to receive Revilope review requests again, contact hello@revilope.com for assistance.

Do not promise that the suppression will be removed.

Customer Requests to Resubscribe

If a customer asks to receive review requests again:

Keep a clear record of the customer’s request.
Do not submit another Revilope request immediately.
Contact Revilope support.
Provide the business name and enough information to identify the suppression.
Avoid sending unnecessary customer information.
Wait for confirmation before creating another request.

Business Responsibilities

Revilope’s unsubscribe and suppression system supports responsible customer communication, but the business remains responsible for its own practices.

Your business should:

Send requests only to genuine customers.
Maintain accurate customer records.
Respect direct opt-out requests.
Review Suppressed statuses.
Train staff not to bypass suppression.
Keep unrelated marketing preferences updated in other systems.
Follow applicable privacy and email rules.
Avoid unnecessary repeat contact.

Recommended Internal Opt-Out Process

Create a simple internal process for customer unsubscribe requests.

Record the customer’s request in your customer-management system.
Stop submitting the customer through Revilope.
Check Activity for pending requests.
Cancel pending requests where necessary.
Update communication preferences in other business systems when applicable.
Inform staff who may otherwise contact the customer.
Keep only the information reasonably needed to respect the preference.

Troubleshooting a Suppressed Request

The Customer Says They Never Unsubscribed

Confirm that:

You selected the correct business.
You identified the correct masked customer address.
The request was not submitted through another location.
The customer is not confusing Revilope with another business email.

Contact Revilope support for further review.

Do not repeatedly resubmit the customer while the suppression is active.

The Customer Is Suppressed for the Wrong Business

Check:

The business shown in Activity.
The private BCC address used.
The business selected during the manual request.
The Google review link associated with that business.

You may have used the wrong business profile when creating the request.

A Pending Request Was Cancelled

Check whether the customer unsubscribed from another request associated with the same business.

An unsubscribe may cancel other pending requests for that customer and business.

Do not recreate the cancelled request.

The Plan Usage Did Not Change Immediately

Allow time for the cancellation and usage update to be processed.

Refresh the dashboard and review the final request status.

Contact support if the pending request is cancelled but reserved capacity remains unavailable for an extended period.

The Customer Unsubscribed After the Request Was Sent

The completed Sent request cannot be recalled.

The unsubscribe blocks future review requests from that business and may cancel any other eligible pending requests.

The Customer Still Received a Request After Unsubscribing

Check:

When the unsubscribe occurred.
When the email was handed off.
Whether the request had already reached Sending or Sent.
Whether the later email came from a different Revilope business.
Whether the message was a normal business email rather than a Revilope review request.

A message already handed off before the unsubscribe may not be recallable.

A Manual Batch Included a Suppressed Customer

Review the submission result.

The suppressed address should be blocked while other eligible addresses may continue through the normal process.

Remove the customer from future source lists.

A BCC Request Shows Suppressed

The original customer email was still sent through your normal email provider.

Revilope blocked only the separate review-request follow-up.

No further review-request action should be taken for that customer and business.

Unsubscribe and Suppression Best Practices

Keep the unsubscribe option visible in live review requests.
Respect every Suppressed status.
Do not resubmit suppressed customers manually.
Do not use another sender to bypass suppression.
Do not use another location or business profile to bypass suppression.
Do not alter the customer’s email address.
Do not delete Activity expecting suppression to disappear.
Record direct opt-out requests in your own systems.
Cancel pending requests when a customer contacts the business directly.
Remove suppressed customers from future imported lists.
Train staff on the difference between cooldowns and suppression.
Contact support when a customer clearly requests to resubscribe.

Suppression Checklist

The correct business has been identified.
The masked customer address has been reviewed.
The Suppressed status has been respected.
No manual resend has been attempted.
No BCC resend has been attempted.
No alternate customer address has been used.
No alternate sender has been used to bypass suppression.
No duplicate business profile has been created.
Pending requests have been reviewed.
Cancelled pending requests have released capacity where applicable.
The customer has been removed from future source lists.
Other business communication preferences have been updated when necessary.

You Are Ready to Continue When

You understand that every live review request includes an unsubscribe option.
You understand that suppression is applied per customer and business.
You understand that BCC and manual requests share suppression protection.
You understand that pending requests are cancelled after an unsubscribe.
You understand that eligible cancelled requests release reserved capacity.
You know that suppression does not expire with the normal cooldown period.
You know that deleting Activity does not remove suppression.
You know not to bypass suppression using another address, sender, business, or account.

Next Step

Continue to the Manage Your Businesses section to learn how to edit, pause, resume, test, and delete business profiles safely.

Need Help With an Unsubscribe or Suppression?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The request source.
The status shown in Activity.
The approximate request date and time.
Whether another pending request was cancelled.
Whether the customer reported an accidental unsubscribe.
A clear description of the issue.

Do not send your Revilope password, email password, payment-card information, complete customer lists, unsubscribe links, or unnecessary sensitive customer information.

Manage Your Business

The Businesses area is where you manage the individual companies, brands, or locations connected to your Revilope account.

Each business has its own customer-facing information, Google review link, email template, authorized senders, follow-up delay, private BCC address, request activity, and operating status.

From the business card, you can copy the private BCC address, save it as a contact, create a manual request, send a test email, edit the business, pause or resume automation, and delete the business when it is no longer needed.

You are not expected to remember or manually type the private BCC address. Use Save Contact to store it in your email or contacts application under a clear business or location name.

What a Revilope Business Represents

A Revilope business should represent one distinct customer-facing business or location.

Create a separate business profile when a company or location requires its own:

Public business name.
Google Business Profile.
Google review link.
Review-request template.
Reply-to email address.
Mailing address.
Authorized senders.
Follow-up delay.
Private Revilope BCC address.
Saved Revilope contact.

Do not combine unrelated companies into one business profile.

Do not combine separate locations when each location has its own Google review page.

Business Limits by Plan

The number of businesses you can add depends on your current Revilope plan.

Starter includes 1 business.
Pro includes 1 business.
Pro Plus includes up to 3 businesses.
Agency includes up to 10 businesses.

If you reach the business limit, you must remove an unused business or move to a plan that supports more businesses before adding another one.

View Revilope Plans and Business Limits

Understanding the Business Card

Each business appears in your dashboard as its own business card.

The business card may show:

The business name.
The business website.
The current business status.
The private Revilope BCC address.
A copy icon for the BCC address.
A Save Contact button.
The selected follow-up delay.
The number of verified authorized senders.
Business-related request usage.
A Manual Request option.
A Send Test option.
An Edit option.
A Pause or Resume option.
A Delete option.

Use the business card as the main control area for that company or location.

Keep Business Names Clear

Use a clear customer-facing name for each business.

If you manage multiple locations, include the location in the business name so that staff can quickly identify the correct profile.

Recommended examples include:

Greenway Dental – Mississauga
Greenway Dental – Oakville
Northside Auto Repair – Downtown
Northside Auto Repair – West End

Clear names reduce the chance that staff will:

Copy the wrong BCC address.
Save the wrong BCC contact.
Select the wrong saved contact.
Send customers to the wrong Google review page.
Use the wrong email template.
Submit a manual request through the wrong location.
Review the wrong business in Activity.

Copy the Private BCC Address

Each business has a unique private Revilope BCC address.

This address connects an incoming BCC email to the correct business profile.

To copy it:

Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the correct business.
Locate the private BCC address on the business card.
Select the copy icon.
Paste the address into the BCC field of your customer email.

Use the copy icon instead of typing the address manually.

A missing or incorrect character may prevent Revilope from recognizing the business.

For regular use, Save Contact is recommended so you do not need to copy the address before every customer email.

Save the Private BCC Address as a Contact

Select Save Contact next to Edit on the business card to save the private Revilope BCC address in your email or contacts application.

The saved contact allows you to select a recognizable business name in the BCC field instead of remembering, copying, or manually typing the private address.

How to Save a Business Contact

Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the correct business.
Select Save Contact next to Edit.
Open the downloaded contact file or contact prompt provided by your browser or device.
Review the contact name.
Confirm that the complete private Revilope address is included.
Save or import the contact into the account used for customer emails.
Create a new email.
Open the BCC field.
Begin typing the saved contact name.
Select the correct business contact.
Confirm that the complete private address appears in BCC.

The exact saving process may vary depending on your browser, device, email provider, and contacts application.

Recommended Contact Names

Use a contact name that clearly identifies the business or location.

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Oakville
Revilope Reviews – Northside Auto Repair

Do not save several private addresses using the same generic contact name.

Avoid:

Revilope

Instead, use:

Revilope BCC – Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Oakville
Revilope BCC – Burlington

Why Save Contact Is Recommended

Saving the contact helps:

Prevent typing mistakes.
Prevent missing characters.
Reduce the need to open Revilope before every customer email.
Make the BCC workflow faster for staff.
Help staff identify the correct location.
Reduce the risk of using the wrong Google review link.

Save the Contact in the Correct Account

Save the contact in the email or contacts account used by the verified authorized sender.

A contact saved to one Google, Microsoft, Apple, device, or business address-book account may not automatically appear in another account.

If several employees send customer emails, each employee may need to save or import the appropriate contact separately.

Do Not Change the Private Address

You may rename the visible contact, but do not edit the private Revilope email address stored inside it.

Do not:

Shorten the address.
Remove part of the address.
Change the characters after the plus sign.
Add spaces.
Replace the domain.
Create a more memorable version yourself.

Changing any part of the address may prevent Revilope from identifying the business.

If the Contact Does Not Appear

Check:

Which contacts account received the contact.
Which email account is currently open.
Whether contact synchronization is enabled.
Whether the email application needs to be refreshed.
Whether the contact was saved only on another device.

You can use the copy icon on the business card while resolving the saved-contact issue.

Keep the Private BCC Address and Contact Confidential

The private BCC address should only be used by approved members of the business.

The downloaded contact file and saved contact also contain the private address and should be treated as confidential business information.

Do not:

Publish the address on your website.
Publish or publicly share the contact file.
Post the address on social media.
Add it to a public directory.
Send it to customers as a contact address.
Use it as a support inbox.
Subscribe it to newsletters.
Share it with unrelated businesses.
Include it in public training material.

Only share the saved contact with staff who are approved to trigger review requests for that business.

Edit a Business

Use Edit when you need to change the business information or review-request settings.

You may need to edit:

The business name.
The owner or representative name.
The business website.
The reply-to email address.
The business mailing address.
The Google review link.
The email subject.
The review-request message.
The review button text.
The follow-up delay.
The authorized sender list.

How to Edit a Business

Sign in to Revilope.
Open your dashboard.
Find the business you want to update.
Select Edit.
Update the required fields.
Review the other business information for accuracy.
Save the business.
Return to the dashboard.
Send a new test email when customer-facing information changed.
Review the saved contact name if the business name or location changed.

Changes That Should Always Be Tested

Send a fresh test email after changing:

The business name.
The owner or representative name.
The email subject.
The review-request message.
The review button text.
The Google review link.
The reply-to address.
The business website.
The mailing address.

Open the newest test email and confirm that:

The updated information appears correctly.
The review button is visible.
The button opens the correct Google Business Profile.
The reply goes to the correct inbox.
The footer information is accurate.

Editing the Business Name

Changing the business name in Revilope may not automatically rename the contact already saved in Gmail, Outlook, Apple Contacts, or another contacts application.

After changing the business name:

Save the updated business.
Open the existing saved contact.
Rename the contact so it matches the new business or location name.
Do not change the private email address inside the contact.
Notify staff who use the contact.

You may also delete the old contact and select Save Contact again from the updated business card.

Editing the Google Review Link

Update the Google review link when:

The business moves to a new location.
A new Google Business Profile is created.
The old profile is replaced or merged.
The current link stops working.
The wrong location was originally entered.

After replacing the link:

Save the business.
Open the link in a private browser window.
Confirm that the correct business appears.
Send a Revilope test email.
Select the review button.
Confirm the correct Google review page opens.

For Google’s official instructions on obtaining a review link, visit:

Create a Google Link or QR Code to Request Reviews

Editing the Reply-To Address

Update the reply-to address when:

The business begins using a new customer-service inbox.
An employee leaves the company.
A shared mailbox is replaced.
The existing inbox is no longer monitored.
Replies are being delivered to the wrong location.

After updating the reply-to address:

Save the business.
Send a new test email.
Reply to the test.
Confirm that the reply reaches the new inbox.

Editing the Authorized Senders

Update the authorized sender list whenever the people or inboxes used to contact customers change.

You may need to add a sender when:

A new employee begins contacting customers.
The business creates a new shared mailbox.
The business changes its sending domain.
A location begins using its own customer email address.

You should remove a sender when:

An employee leaves the company.
A contractor’s access ends.
An inbox is retired.
An address is compromised.
The sender was added to the wrong business.

Every new authorized sender must complete verification before reliably triggering BCC requests.

Adding someone as an authorized sender does not automatically save the business’s Revilope contact in that person’s email account. The sender may need to use Save Contact separately.

Editing the Follow-Up Delay

Change the follow-up delay when the current timing no longer matches the customer experience.

For example, you may change the delay because:

Requests are arriving too soon.
Requests are arriving too late.
Staff now send customer emails at a different time of day.
The business begins offering a service that requires more evaluation time.
The business wants consistent timing across locations.

The updated delay applies to new requests created after the change is saved.

Requests that were already scheduled may keep the original scheduled time calculated when they were created.

Scheduled Requests May Use Saved Request Details

When Revilope creates a request, it may store the business information and template needed for that request.

This means an already scheduled request may continue using the settings that existed when it was created.

Editing the business may not update:

An existing scheduled subject line.
An existing scheduled message.
An existing scheduled Google review link.
An existing scheduled reply-to address.
An existing scheduled sending time.

New requests should use the newly saved business settings.

If an existing scheduled request contains an important error, cancel it where possible and create a new request after correcting and testing the business.

Send a Test Email

The Send Test option allows you to preview the current review-request email for the selected business.

Use it:

After creating the business.
After editing the template.
After changing the Google review link.
After changing the reply-to address.
After changing the business name or mailing address.
Before sending the first live customer request.

Test emails:

Are sent to the email address associated with your Revilope account.
Include a [Test] label in the subject.
Do not count toward your monthly request allowance.
Do not create a normal customer Activity record.
Do not replace a full BCC workflow test.

Create a Manual Request

Use the Manual Request option when you want to send a review request without first sending a customer email through BCC.

Before submitting a manual request:

Confirm that the correct business card is being used.
Confirm that the customer belongs to that business or location.
Confirm that the Google review link is correct.
Confirm that the customer is eligible to receive a request.
Review your remaining monthly request allowance.

A request created through the wrong business may direct the customer to the wrong Google review page.

Active Business Status

An active business can accept eligible BCC and manual review requests.

For an active business to create a successful BCC request:

The private BCC address must be correct.
The correct saved contact must be selected when one is used.
The original email must come from a verified authorized sender.
One eligible customer must be identified.
The customer must pass duplicate and suppression checks.
The account must have available request capacity.

Active status does not override other customer or plan protections.

Pause a Business

Pause a business when you want to stop its Revilope workflow temporarily without deleting the business profile.

Pausing may be appropriate when:

The business is temporarily closed.
The location is under renovation.
The review template needs correction.
The Google review link is being replaced.
The business is changing ownership.
You suspect the private BCC address or contact file was exposed.
You need time to investigate unexpected request activity.
The business should temporarily stop requesting reviews.

What Happens When a Business Is Paused

Pausing a business stops it from continuing its normal Revilope request workflow.

When a business is paused:

New BCC requests should not be accepted for sending.
New manual requests should not be created for that business.
Pending scheduled requests are cancelled.
Reserved plan capacity for cancelled pending requests is released.
The business remains in your account.
The private BCC address remains associated with the business.
The saved contact may remain in staff contact lists.
The business can be resumed later.

Pausing does not recall an email that has already reached Sent.

Staff should not continue using the saved contact while the business is paused.

Review Pending Requests Before Pausing

Before pausing a business:

Open Activity.
Filter by the business.
Review all Scheduled requests.
Confirm that you want the pending requests cancelled.
Notify staff who use the saved BCC contact.
Return to the business card.
Select Pause.
Confirm the action when prompted.
Review Activity afterward.

Requests cancelled during the pause are not automatically recreated when the business is resumed.

Plan Usage After Pausing

Scheduled requests may reserve monthly request capacity before they are sent.

When pausing cancels eligible pending requests, their reserved capacity is released.

Allow time for the request statuses and usage summary to update.

Refresh the dashboard and confirm that the expected capacity has returned.

Pause Versus Editing

You do not need to pause a business for every minor edit.

A pause is useful when live requests should stop while you investigate or complete a significant change.

Consider pausing before:

Replacing an incorrect Google review link.
Correcting a template that contains misleading information.
Changing the business identity.
Investigating unauthorized or unexpected activity.
Investigating an exposed BCC address or contact file.
Transferring the business to a new owner or manager.

Resume a Business

Resume a paused business when its settings have been reviewed and it is ready to create new review requests again.

Before resuming:

Confirm the business name.
Test the Google review link.
Review the email template.
Confirm the reply-to address.
Confirm the mailing address.
Review the authorized senders.
Confirm that required senders are verified.
Review the follow-up delay.
Review the saved BCC contact used by staff.
Send a test email.

How to Resume a Business

Open your Revilope dashboard.
Find the paused business.
Select Resume.
Confirm that the business status changes to active.
Confirm that staff are using the correct saved contact.
Send a test BCC request from a verified sender when needed.
Check Activity to confirm that the workflow is operating correctly.

What Happens After Resuming

Resuming allows the business to accept new eligible requests.

It does not automatically restore requests that were cancelled when the business was paused.

Previously cancelled customers should only be resubmitted when:

The customer is still eligible.
The customer did not unsubscribe.
The request is still appropriate.
Duplicate and cooldown protection allow it.

Delete a Business

Delete a business only when the profile is no longer needed.

Deletion may be appropriate when:

The business permanently closed.
The location permanently closed.
The business was added by mistake.
An incorrect duplicate profile was created.
The company is no longer managed through the account.

Use Pause instead of Delete when you expect to use the business again.

What Happens When a Business Is Deleted

Deleting a business removes it from normal active use.

Deletion may:

Remove the business from the normal dashboard.
Disable its private Revilope BCC address.
Make its saved contact unusable for future requests.
Stop new manual requests.
Cancel pending scheduled requests.
Release reserved capacity for eligible cancelled requests.
Remove its authorized sender configuration from active use.

Revilope may retain limited protected information required for:

Customer suppression.
Duplicate protection.
Cooldown protection.
Billing records.
Security.
Fraud prevention.
Dispute resolution.
Legal compliance.

Deletion Should Be Treated as Permanent

Do not delete a business unless you are confident that the profile is no longer needed.

Deleting and recreating a business can cause:

A new private BCC address.
Staff continuing to use an outdated saved contact.
Loss of easy access to the old configuration.
Confusion between old and new business activity.
Duplicate business profiles.
The need to verify authorized senders again.
The need to save and distribute a new BCC contact.

Revilope does not guarantee that a deleted business can be restored.

Review the Business Before Deleting

Before deleting:

Confirm that you selected the correct business.
Review the business name and location.
Open Activity and filter by that business.
Review pending Scheduled requests.
Confirm that those requests should be cancelled.
Notify staff who use the BCC address or saved contact.
Remove the BCC address from saved email contacts and templates.
Confirm that the profile is not needed again.
Select Delete.
Read the confirmation carefully.
Confirm the deletion.

Remove Deleted BCC Contacts From Staff Accounts

After deleting a business, remove its private BCC address and saved contact from:

Gmail contacts.
Outlook contacts.
Apple Contacts.
Business webmail address books.
Phone contacts.
Email templates.
Reusable drafts.
Customer-service instructions.
Internal documentation.
Employee address books.
Third-party email systems.
Autocomplete suggestions where possible.

An old private BCC address should not continue to be used after the business is deleted.

If a Business Is Deleted and Recreated

A recreated business may receive a different private BCC address.

Do not assume the old saved contact will continue working.

After recreating the business:

Remove the old contact from every staff email and contacts account.
Remove the old address from reusable drafts and templates.
Open the new Revilope business card.
Select Save Contact.
Save the new contact under a clear business or location name.
Confirm that staff use the new contact.
Send a controlled BCC test.
Review the result in Activity.

Pause Versus Delete

Use Pause When

The business may return later.
The location is temporarily closed.
You need to correct settings.
You are investigating an issue.
You want to stop new and pending requests temporarily.

Use Delete When

The business is permanently closed.
The location will not be used again.
The profile was created by mistake.
The profile is a confirmed duplicate that is not needed.

When uncertain, pause the business first.

Managing Multiple Locations

Create a separate business for each location with a different Google review link.

Each location should have its own:

Clear business name.
Google review link.
Mailing address.
Private BCC address.
Saved BCC contact.
Authorized sender list when applicable.
Reply-to address when applicable.
Email template when different wording is needed.
Follow-up delay when timing differs.

Example

A dental company has locations in Mississauga, Oakville, and Burlington.

Create:

Greenway Dental – Mississauga
Greenway Dental – Oakville
Greenway Dental – Burlington

Save the contacts as:

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Oakville
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Burlington

Do not use the Mississauga saved contact for an Oakville customer.

Managing Multiple Brands

Separate brands should use separate Revilope businesses when customers recognize them as different companies.

This is especially important when the brands have different:

Names.
Websites.
Google Business Profiles.
Review links.
Customer-service inboxes.
Mailing addresses.
Email tone.

Each brand should have a clearly named saved contact.

Do not use one brand’s BCC contact or template to request a review for another brand.

Managing Businesses for an Agency

Agency accounts should maintain clear separation between clients.

For each client:

Use the client’s public business name.
Use the correct Google review link.
Use the client’s monitored reply-to address.
Use the client’s mailing address.
Approve only authorized senders.
Use a client-approved review-request template.
Save the BCC contact using the client and location name.
Keep the private BCC address and contact file confidential.

Do not reuse one client’s BCC address, saved contact, template, or customer list for another client.

Business Limits and Downgrades

If you move to a plan that supports fewer businesses than your account currently contains, some businesses may become restricted.

Before downgrading:

Review how many businesses the new plan supports.
Decide which businesses must remain active.
Review pending requests for businesses that may be removed.
Pause or delete unnecessary businesses.
Remove outdated BCC addresses and contacts from staff systems.
Confirm that the remaining authorized senders fit the new plan limit.

Do not assume all existing businesses will remain usable after moving to a lower plan.

Compare Revilope Plans

Business Request Usage

All businesses in your account share the monthly request allowance included with your plan.

For example, a Pro Plus account includes 350 total monthly requests across up to 3 businesses.

The allowance is not automatically divided into equal amounts for each business.

One business may use more requests than another, provided the account remains within the total limit.

Monitor Usage Across Businesses

When managing multiple businesses:

Review total account usage regularly.
Check which business is creating the most requests.
Review scheduled requests that already reserve capacity.
Investigate unexpected increases.
Confirm that staff are using the correct saved contacts.
Pause a business if unauthorized or accidental activity is suspected.

Business Status and Plan Usage

An active business may continue creating requests until the account reaches its plan limit.

A paused business stops creating new requests and cancels pending requests.

A deleted business is removed from active use and its pending requests are cancelled.

Requests already marked Sent remain part of the completed account history and usage for the applicable period.

Managing a Suspected Exposed BCC Address or Contact File

If you believe a private BCC address or downloaded contact file was shared publicly or used without permission:

Pause the business immediately.
Review recent Activity.
Look for unfamiliar senders or customers.
Review the authorized sender list.
Remove any unauthorized sender.
Secure the relevant business email accounts.
Ask staff to remove publicly shared or unauthorized copies of the contact.
Contact Revilope support.

Do not continue using a private address you believe has been compromised without reviewing the situation.

Managing a Compromised Authorized Sender

If an authorized sender’s email account may have been compromised:

Change the email account password.
Sign out active email sessions.
Enable or review multi-factor authentication.
Remove the sender from the Revilope business.
Pause the business when necessary.
Review recent Activity.
Review who has access to the saved BCC contact.
Contact Revilope support.

Managing a Business Ownership Change

When a business changes ownership or management:

Review who controls the Revilope account.
Remove former staff from authorized senders.
Remove the saved BCC contact from former staff accounts.
Update the owner or representative name.
Update the reply-to address.
Update the website and mailing address when needed.
Confirm that the Google Business Profile remains correct.
Review the review-request wording.
Distribute the saved contact only to approved new staff.
Send a new test email.

Pause the business while the transfer is being completed when customer requests should temporarily stop.

Managing a Business Rebrand

When the business changes its public name:

Update the Business Name field.
Update the owner or representative when necessary.
Update the website.
Update the reply-to address.
Update the mailing address if it changed.
Confirm the Google Business Profile name.
Copy and test a new Google review link when needed.
Update the email subject and message.
Send a new test email.
Rename the saved BCC contact in every staff contacts account.
Confirm that the private email address inside the contact remains unchanged.

You may also delete the old saved contact and select Save Contact again from the updated business card.

Managing a Location Move

When a business location moves:

Update the mailing address.
Update the website when location information changed.
Confirm the Google Business Profile reflects the new location.
Copy and test the correct review link.
Update the business name if it includes the old location.
Review the reply-to address.
Rename or replace the saved BCC contact if its label includes the old location.
Send a fresh test email.

Business Notifications

Revilope does not currently send a separate business notification every time a review request is created, sent, cancelled, skipped, or suppressed.

Use the Activity section to review request results.

Check Activity regularly when:

You have recently added a business.
You are testing a new sender.
You saved or distributed a new BCC contact.
You changed the BCC workflow.
You submitted a large manual batch.
You paused or resumed a business.
You suspect unexpected activity.

Common Business Management Mistakes

Using one profile for several locations with different review links.
Copying the wrong private BCC address.
Saving or selecting the wrong BCC contact.
Saving several locations under the same generic contact name.
Editing the private address inside the saved contact.
Saving the contact to an account staff do not use.
Assuming a contact saved by one employee automatically appears for everyone.
Deleting a business that should have been paused.
Assuming paused requests will automatically resume.
Editing a template without sending a new test.
Changing the delay and expecting existing requests to move.
Leaving former employees as authorized senders.
Leaving the saved BCC contact in former employee accounts.
Using an unmonitored reply-to address.
Failing to remove deleted BCC addresses from email contacts.
Continuing to use an old contact after deleting and recreating a business.
Assuming a business-name change automatically renames saved contacts.
Deleting and recreating a business to bypass duplicate protection.
Using another business profile to bypass customer suppression.
Downgrading without checking business and sender limits.

Troubleshooting Business Management

The Add Business Option Is Unavailable

You may have reached the business limit included with your plan.

Review:

Your current plan.
The number of existing businesses.
Whether an unused business should be deleted.
Whether a larger plan is required.

View Business Limits

The Save Contact Button Downloads a File

This may be the expected behaviour for your browser or device.

Open the downloaded contact file.
Choose the contacts account where it should be saved.
Review the contact name.
Confirm that the complete Revilope address is included.
Save or import the contact.
Open your email application.
Test the contact in the BCC field.

The Saved Contact Does Not Appear in the Email Application

Confirm that:

The contact was saved successfully.
It was saved to the correct Google, Microsoft, Apple, device, or business contacts account.
The email application uses the same contacts account.
Contact synchronization is enabled.
The email application has been refreshed.

Use the copy icon while resolving the saved-contact issue.

The Saved Contact Contains the Wrong Business Address

Delete the incorrect contact.

Return to the correct Revilope business card and select Save Contact again.

Save the new contact using the complete business or location name.

The Private Address Inside the Contact Was Edited

Delete the edited contact and use Save Contact again.

Do not attempt to repair or recreate the private address manually.

An Old Contact Is Still Being Suggested

Email applications may retain old autocomplete suggestions even after a contact is removed.

Remove the old contact and delete the outdated suggestion when your email provider allows it.

Then save the current contact from the correct Revilope business card.

The Business Shows as Paused

Confirm whether:

You paused it manually.
Another account user paused it.
The business was paused during troubleshooting.
The account or subscription status requires attention.

Review the business settings and recent Activity before resuming.

BCC Requests Do Not Work After Resuming

Check:

The business shows as active.
The correct private BCC address is being used.
The correct saved contact is being selected.
The private address inside the saved contact matches the business card.
The sender is still listed.
The sender still shows as verified.
The account has remaining request capacity.
The customer is eligible.
The request result appears in Activity.

Old Scheduled Requests Did Not Return After Resuming

Requests cancelled during the pause are not automatically restored.

Create a new request only when the customer remains eligible and the follow-up is still appropriate.

The Business Was Deleted Accidentally

Stop using its old private BCC address and saved contact.

Contact Revilope support promptly.

Do not assume that the deleted business or its previous settings can be restored.

Do not create several replacement profiles while support is reviewing the issue.

The Wrong Business Was Edited

Review every changed field and restore the correct information.

Send a fresh test email from each affected business.

Review and correct the saved contact names when business names or locations were changed.

Check Activity for requests created while the incorrect settings were active.

The Wrong Google Review Link Was Used

Pause the business when necessary to prevent additional incorrect requests.

Edit the business.
Replace the Google review link.
Save the business.
Open the link in a private browser window.
Send a new test email.
Confirm the correct review page opens.
Resume the business when it is ready.

The Wrong Reply-To Address Was Used

Edit the reply-to field, save the business, and send a new test.

Reply to the test and confirm that it reaches the intended inbox.

The Private BCC Address Was Added to the Wrong Saved Contact

Correct or delete the saved contact in every staff email account that uses it.

Include the exact business or location name in the contact label.

Return to the correct business card and use Save Contact again when necessary.

Review recent Activity for customers connected to the wrong business.

Plan Capacity Did Not Return After Pausing or Deleting

Allow time for pending requests to change to Cancelled and for the usage summary to update.

Refresh the dashboard.

Contact support if eligible cancelled requests continue reserving capacity for an extended period.

Business Management Best Practices

Create one profile for each distinct business or review location.
Use clear business and location names.
Keep private BCC addresses and contact files confidential.
Use Save Contact for regular BCC use.
Use the copy icon instead of typing BCC addresses.
Give every saved contact a clear business or location name.
Save contacts in the email accounts staff actually use.
Do not edit the private address inside a saved contact.
Review authorized senders regularly.
Remove former employees promptly.
Remove saved BCC contacts from former employee accounts.
Send a new test after every important edit.
Pause a business before major troubleshooting.
Review Scheduled requests before pausing or deleting.
Use Pause instead of Delete when the business may return.
Remove deleted BCC contacts from staff systems.
Save a new contact after deleting and recreating a business.
Review plan limits before adding businesses or downgrading.
Check Activity after resuming a business.

Business Management Checklist

Every business represents one clear company, brand, or location.
Each Google review link matches the correct business.
Each business has an accurate mailing address.
Each reply-to inbox is monitored.
Each authorized sender is approved and verified.
Each follow-up delay is appropriate.
Save Contact has been used for each business that uses BCC automation.
Each saved contact has a clear business or location name.
Each contact was saved to the correct staff email or contacts account.
The private address inside each contact has not been edited.
Every important edit is followed by a test email.
Paused businesses have been reviewed before resuming.
Pending requests are reviewed before pausing or deleting.
Deleted BCC contacts are removed from staff systems.
The account remains within its business and sender limits.

You Are Ready to Continue When

You understand what each business profile controls.
You know how to copy the correct private BCC address.
You know how to use Save Contact.
You know how to select the correct saved contact in BCC.
You understand that every business and location has its own private contact.
You know how to edit and test a business.
You understand what happens when a business is paused.
You understand that paused requests do not automatically return.
You understand the difference between Pause and Delete.
You know that deleting a business disables its old BCC workflow and saved contact.
You understand how multiple businesses share the account’s request allowance.

Next Step

Continue to the Plans, Usage, and Billing section to learn how business limits, authorized sender limits, monthly requests, scheduled request reservations, and subscription changes work.

Need Help Managing a Business?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The current business status.
The action you were attempting.
Whether pending requests were affected.
Whether the issue involves Save Contact, copying, editing, pausing, resuming, testing, or deletion.
The email or contacts application being used when the issue involves Save Contact.
A clear description of what happened.

Do not send your Revilope password, email password, payment-card information, private BCC address, downloaded contact file, complete customer lists, or unnecessary sensitive customer information.

Plans, Usage, and Billing

Your Revilope plan determines how many businesses you can manage, how many review requests you can create each month, and how many authorized senders you can use.

BCC Review Automation and Manual Review Requests share the same monthly request allowance. Test emails do not count toward that allowance.

Use the plan and usage area of your dashboard to review your current subscription, monitor remaining capacity, and decide whether your current plan still fits your business.

Revilope Plans

Revilope currently offers four plans:

Starter.
Pro.
Pro Plus.
Agency.

Every plan includes custom email templates and all core Revilope features.

The primary differences are:

The number of businesses included.
The number of monthly review requests included.
The number of authorized senders included.
The monthly subscription price.

View Current Revilope Plans

Starter Plan

The Starter plan costs $0 per month.

It includes:

1 business.
5 review requests per month.
1 authorized sender.
Custom email templates.
All core features.

The Starter plan is designed for businesses that want to set up Revilope, test the workflow, and begin sending a small number of live review requests.

The 5 monthly requests can be used for any combination of:

BCC-triggered requests.
Manual review requests.

Test emails do not use the 5-request allowance.

Pro Plan

The Pro plan costs $29 per month.

It includes:

1 business.
100 review requests per month.
1 authorized sender.
Custom email templates.
All core features.

The Pro plan is designed for one business or location that needs a larger monthly request allowance but only one authorized sending address.

Pro Plus Plan

The Pro Plus plan costs $49 per month.

It includes:

Up to 3 businesses.
350 review requests per month.
3 authorized senders.
Custom email templates.
All core features.

The Pro Plus plan may be suitable for:

A company with several locations.
A business managing several brands.
A team with multiple employees sending customer emails.
A small agency managing a limited number of client businesses.

Agency Plan

The Agency plan costs $99 per month.

It includes:

Up to 10 businesses.
1,500 review requests per month.
10 authorized senders.
Custom email templates.
All core features.

The Agency plan is designed for larger multi-location businesses, marketing providers, consultants, and agencies managing review-request workflows for several clients.

Plan Comparison

Starter: $0 per month, 1 business, 5 monthly requests, and 1 authorized sender.
Pro: $29 per month, 1 business, 100 monthly requests, and 1 authorized sender.
Pro Plus: $49 per month, up to 3 businesses, 350 monthly requests, and 3 authorized senders.
Agency: $99 per month, up to 10 businesses, 1,500 monthly requests, and 10 authorized senders.

Compare Revilope Plans

What Counts as a Review Request?

A review request counts toward your plan when Revilope accepts it as a live customer request.

Live requests can be created through:

BCC Review Automation.
Manual Review Requests.

Both methods use the same monthly allowance.

BCC Request Example

You send a customer email and place your private Revilope address in BCC.

Revilope accepts the sender, identifies the customer, passes the request through its protection checks, and schedules the review request.

That accepted request uses one request from your monthly allowance.

Manual Request Example

You enter a customer email address through the Manual Review Requests form.

Revilope validates the address, checks duplicate and suppression protections, and accepts the request.

That accepted request also uses one request from your monthly allowance.

One Customer Equals One Request

Each accepted customer email address is treated as a separate request.

For example, submitting 10 eligible customer addresses through Manual Review Requests uses 10 requests.

It does not count as one request simply because the addresses were submitted in one form.

Each customer receives a separate email and receives a separate Activity record.

BCC and Manual Requests Share the Same Limit

Your monthly allowance is not divided into separate BCC and Manual request pools.

For example, a Pro plan includes 100 total requests.

You could use those requests as:

100 BCC requests and 0 manual requests.
75 BCC requests and 25 manual requests.
40 BCC requests and 60 manual requests.
0 BCC requests and 100 manual requests.

Any combination is permitted as long as the total number of accepted requests remains within the plan allowance.

Test Emails Do Not Count

Sending a test email does not use your monthly request allowance.

You can use Send Test to review:

The email subject.
The business name.
The owner or representative name.
The review-request message.
The review button.
The Google review link.
The reply-to address.
The mailing address.
The mobile and desktop layout.

A test email is sent to your Revilope account email and is not treated as a live customer request.

When Usage Is Reserved

Revilope may reserve request capacity when a live request is accepted and scheduled.

The request does not need to reach Sent before it affects your available allowance.

This prevents an account from scheduling more requests than the plan allows.

Example

Your Pro plan includes 100 monthly requests.

You have already used 80 requests.

You submit 20 additional eligible customers using a 7-day follow-up delay.

Those 20 requests may reserve your remaining capacity immediately, even though the emails will not be sent for seven days.

Your available request count may then show zero.

Why Scheduled Requests Reserve Capacity

Once Revilope accepts and schedules a request, the system is committed to processing that request later.

Reserving capacity helps prevent situations where:

Several staff members submit requests at the same time.
A large manual batch exceeds the plan limit.
Delayed requests are ignored when calculating remaining usage.
The account schedules more future emails than the plan includes.

Statuses That May Use Request Capacity

Requests with the following statuses may use or reserve capacity:

Scheduled.
Sending.
Sent.

A request may move from Scheduled to Sending and then Sent without using an additional request at each stage.

It remains one customer request throughout the process.

Statuses That Normally Do Not Create a Live Request

The following results normally do not create another live scheduled request:

Skipped Duplicate.
Plan Limit.
Suppressed.
Unauthorized Sender.
Invalid Recipient.

Because no new live request is accepted, these results should not normally reserve another request from your allowance.

Cancelled Requests

A request cancelled before sending may release the capacity that was reserved for it.

A request may be cancelled because:

You cancelled a pending request.
The business was paused.
The business was deleted.
The customer unsubscribed before sending.
An administrative action stopped the request.

Allow time for the cancellation and usage totals to update.

Check the plan summary after the request reaches its final Cancelled status.

Failed Requests

A request that permanently fails before a successful email handoff may release its reserved capacity.

Do not assume the request has permanently failed while it is still:

Scheduled.
Sending.
Waiting for an automatic retry.

Wait until the request reaches a final Failed status before deciding whether another attempt is appropriate.

Skipped Duplicate Requests

A Skipped Duplicate result normally means Revilope prevented another request because:

The same source email was already processed.
The customer already has a pending request.
The customer recently received a request.
The customer remains within the cooldown period.
The same address appeared more than once in a manual submission.

Because another live request is not created, a skipped duplicate should not normally consume another request from the allowance.

Suppressed Requests

A Suppressed result means the customer is blocked from receiving the request, usually because of an unsubscribe.

A new suppressed attempt does not create a live scheduled request.

If a previously scheduled request is cancelled after the customer unsubscribes, its reserved capacity is released when the cancellation is processed.

Unauthorized Sender Requests

An Unauthorized Sender result means a BCC email came from an address that was not verified for the selected business.

Because the request is rejected before scheduling, it should not normally use another request from the monthly allowance.

Invalid Recipient Requests

An Invalid Recipient result means Revilope could not identify or accept one eligible customer.

This may happen because:

The address was formatted incorrectly.
No customer was placed in the To field.
Several customers were included in a BCC email.
The recipient was a business or staff address.
The customer address was incomplete.

An invalid recipient does not normally create a live scheduled request.

Plan Limit Requests

A Plan Limit result means Revilope could not accept the request because your account did not have enough available capacity or another plan limit was reached.

Possible causes include:

The monthly request allowance was reached.
Scheduled requests already reserved the remaining allowance.
The account exceeded its business limit.
The account exceeded its authorized sender limit.
The subscription became inactive.
The account moved to a lower plan.

A request blocked by the plan limit does not become scheduled automatically later.

You may need to create a new request after capacity becomes available.

Monthly Request Reset

Your request allowance resets at the beginning of each new monthly usage period.

The dashboard should show your current usage for the active period.

When the new period begins:

Your monthly allowance becomes available again.
Usage from the previous period does not carry into the new period.
Unused requests from the previous period expire.

Unused Requests Do Not Roll Over

Unused monthly requests do not roll over into a future month.

For example, if your Pro plan includes 100 requests and you use only 40 during the current period, the unused 60 requests do not increase the following period’s allowance to 160.

The next period begins with the standard 100 requests included in the Pro plan.

Request Allowances Are Not Banked

Your plan provides a recurring monthly allowance rather than a permanent bank of request credits.

Unused capacity cannot normally be:

Transferred to another month.
Transferred to another Revilope account.
Transferred to another subscription.
Exchanged for cash or account credit.

Usage Is Shared Across Businesses

Accounts that support multiple businesses share one total monthly request allowance.

The allowance is not automatically divided equally between businesses.

Pro Plus Example

The Pro Plus plan includes 350 monthly requests across up to 3 businesses.

The businesses could use the allowance as:

Business A uses 150, Business B uses 100, and Business C uses 100.
Business A uses 300, Business B uses 50, and Business C uses 0.
Business A uses all 350 while the other businesses use none.

The account must remain within the total allowance of 350.

Agency Example

The Agency plan includes 1,500 monthly requests across up to 10 businesses.

The allowance is shared across all active businesses in the account.

Monitor Usage Across Businesses

When managing several businesses, review usage regularly.

Pay attention to:

Which business is creating the most requests.
How many requests are already scheduled.
Whether an imported list created unexpected usage.
Whether staff are BCCing Revilope too frequently.
Whether the account is approaching its monthly limit.

If one business uses most of the allowance, the other businesses may be unable to create additional requests until capacity becomes available or the allowance resets.

Business Limits

Your plan controls the maximum number of business profiles your account can use.

Starter allows 1 business.
Pro allows 1 business.
Pro Plus allows up to 3 businesses.
Agency allows up to 10 businesses.

A separate business profile should normally be used for each company, brand, or location with its own Google review link.

What Counts as a Business?

A business is an individual Revilope profile with its own:

Business name.
Google review link.
Email template.
Private BCC address.
Reply-to address.
Mailing address.
Follow-up delay.
Authorized senders.

Creating a business profile uses one business slot even when the business is paused.

Delete a business only when it is no longer needed and you understand the consequences.

Paused Businesses and Plan Limits

A paused business remains part of your account.

Pausing stops its normal request workflow but does not necessarily free the business slot.

If you need to add another business and have reached your plan limit, pausing an existing business may not be enough.

You may need to delete an unused business or move to a plan that supports more businesses.

Deleted Businesses and Plan Limits

Deleting a business removes it from active use and may free a business slot.

Before deleting:

Review pending requests.
Confirm that the business will not be needed again.
Remove its private BCC address from staff contacts and templates.
Understand that deletion may be permanent.

Authorized Sender Limits

Your plan also controls the number of authorized senders available.

Starter includes 1 authorized sender.
Pro includes 1 authorized sender.
Pro Plus includes 3 authorized senders.
Agency includes 10 authorized senders.

An authorized sender is an email address permitted to trigger BCC review requests for a business.

What Counts as an Authorized Sender?

Each separate authorized email address counts toward the plan limit.

For example:

hello@example.com is one sender.
sales@example.com is another sender.
support@example.com is another sender.

Verifying one address does not automatically authorize every address at the same domain.

Pending Senders May Count Toward the Limit

An email address added to the authorized sender list may use a sender slot even while its verification status is pending.

Remove incorrect, abandoned, or unnecessary pending senders when they are no longer needed.

Sender Limits Across Multiple Businesses

The sender allowance applies across the account.

For example, a Pro Plus plan includes 3 authorized senders total.

Those senders may be distributed as:

One sender for each of 3 businesses.
Two senders for one business and one sender for another.
Three senders for one business.

The total number of configured authorized senders must remain within the plan limit.

The Same Email on Multiple Businesses

If the same email address is authorized for more than one business, it may still occupy a sender position for each business configuration.

Review your account usage carefully when the same employee manages several businesses or locations.

Do not assume that one verified email address can be attached to every business without affecting the sender limit.

When to Upgrade

Consider upgrading when:

You regularly reach the monthly request allowance.
You need to add another business or location.
You need additional authorized senders.
One business is using most of the shared allowance.
You are preparing to submit a larger customer list.
You are adding clients to an agency account.
You need more capacity for seasonal demand.

Upgrade Before a Large Submission

Review your available allowance before submitting a large manual batch.

For example, if you have 30 requests remaining and submit 100 eligible customers, Revilope cannot accept all 100 under the current allowance.

Upgrade before submission when you need the complete eligible list processed during the current period.

View Upgrade Options

What Happens When You Upgrade?

After a successful upgrade, your account should be updated to the limits included with the new plan.

An upgrade may provide:

A larger monthly request allowance.
Additional business slots.
Additional authorized sender slots.

Review your account after upgrading and confirm that:

The new plan name appears.
The correct request limit appears.
The correct business limit appears.
The correct sender limit appears.
The subscription status is active.

Requests previously blocked with a Plan Limit status are not necessarily recreated automatically after an upgrade.

You may need to create new requests for customers who remain eligible.

Upgrading Does Not Override Customer Protections

A larger plan does not bypass:

Duplicate Protection.
Customer cooldowns.
Unsubscribes.
Suppression records.
Invalid recipient checks.
Authorized sender verification.

An upgraded account receives more capacity, not permission to resend to customers who are ineligible.

When to Downgrade

You may consider moving to a lower plan when:

Your monthly request volume has decreased.
You no longer manage several businesses.
You no longer need multiple authorized senders.
A seasonal business has entered a quieter period.
You are reducing the number of active clients.

Review Limits Before Downgrading

Before moving to a lower plan, compare your current account setup with the new limits.

Review:

The number of active businesses.
The number of paused businesses.
The number of authorized senders.
The number of scheduled requests.
Your normal monthly request volume.

Downgrade Example

Suppose your account currently uses Pro Plus with:

3 businesses.
3 authorized senders.
200 requests per month.

Moving to Pro would reduce the available limits to:

1 business.
1 authorized sender.
100 requests per month.

You should decide which business and sender must remain before completing the downgrade.

What May Happen After a Downgrade?

If your account contains more businesses or senders than the new plan supports, some features or profiles may become restricted.

Before downgrading:

Choose which businesses should remain.
Review pending requests.
Pause or delete businesses that will not remain.
Remove unnecessary authorized senders.
Remove old BCC addresses from staff email contacts.
Confirm that normal monthly volume fits the lower request allowance.

Revilope does not automatically combine several business profiles into one.

Scheduled Requests Before a Downgrade

Review Scheduled requests before changing to a lower plan.

Scheduled requests may already reserve capacity.

A lower plan may not support the number of businesses, senders, or future requests currently configured.

Complete or cancel important pending requests before changing plans when necessary.

Changing Plans Does Not Change Existing Google Review Links

Your plan controls account limits, not the Google review destination saved for each business.

After changing plans, still confirm that:

The correct businesses remain active.
The correct Google review links are saved.
The correct authorized senders remain available.
The correct private BCC addresses are being used.

How Billing Works

Paid Revilope plans are billed as recurring monthly subscriptions.

Your account billing area should show information such as:

Your current subscription.
The subscription status.
The recurring amount.
The next payment or renewal information when available.
Your saved billing details.
Previous orders or payment records.

The information displayed in your account and checkout is the authoritative information for your subscription.

Managing Billing Through My Account

Revilope uses the WooCommerce My Account area for account and subscription management.

Depending on the options available to your account, you may be able to review:

Orders.
Subscription information.
Payment methods.
Billing addresses.
Account details.
Subscription status.

To review billing information:

Sign in to your Revilope account.
Open My Account.
Open the relevant orders, subscriptions, or payment section.
Review the current plan and status.
Update the available billing details when necessary.

Recurring Payments

A paid monthly plan renews through the payment method connected to the subscription unless the subscription is cancelled or otherwise becomes inactive.

Keep your billing information current to reduce the risk of an interrupted subscription.

Updating a Payment Method

Update the saved payment method when:

The card is expiring.
The card was replaced.
The card was lost or compromised.
The billing information changed.
A recent payment failed.

Use the billing or payment controls available in My Account.

Do not send full payment-card information by email to Revilope support.

Failed Subscription Payments

If a recurring payment fails, the subscription may become pending, on hold, cancelled, or otherwise inactive depending on the billing result.

A failed payment may affect:

Your active plan status.
Your monthly request allowance.
Your business limit.
Your authorized sender limit.
Your ability to create new requests.

If a payment fails:

Open My Account.
Review the subscription or order status.
Review the saved payment method.
Update the payment information when necessary.
Complete any available renewal or payment action.
Confirm that the subscription returns to an active status.
Review your Revilope plan limits afterward.

Subscription Status

Your subscription status may affect whether paid-plan features and limits remain available.

Statuses shown in the billing area may include terms such as:

Active.
Pending.
On hold.
Cancelled.
Expired.

The exact status wording depends on the billing system and your account state.

Active Subscription

Active normally means the paid subscription is in good standing and the plan limits should be available.

Confirm that the Revilope dashboard shows the expected:

Plan name.
Request limit.
Business limit.
Authorized sender limit.

On-Hold or Inactive Subscription

An on-hold or inactive subscription may restrict new request creation or reduce available plan access.

Review the billing status and resolve any outstanding payment issue before relying on live request automation.

Cancelling a Paid Plan

Use the subscription controls available in My Account when you need to cancel a paid subscription.

Before cancelling, review:

Your current businesses.
Your authorized senders.
Your pending Scheduled requests.
Your normal monthly request volume.
Any BCC addresses saved by staff.

The timing and effect of cancellation may depend on the subscription status and billing terms shown in your account.

Do not assume that cancellation immediately deletes your Revilope account or all business data.

What to Review Before Cancellation

Open Activity.
Review all Scheduled requests.
Decide whether pending requests should remain or be cancelled.
Review your active businesses.
Save any information you are entitled to retain.
Remove private BCC addresses from staff workflows when they will no longer be used.
Review the cancellation details shown in My Account.

Cancellation and Account Data

Cancelling a paid subscription is not necessarily the same as deleting the Revilope account.

Revilope may retain limited information as described in its policies for:

Customer suppression.
Duplicate protection.
Billing records.
Security.
Fraud prevention.
Dispute resolution.
Legal compliance.

Contact Revilope support for questions about account closure or data handling.

Starter Plan After a Paid Subscription

Depending on the account and subscription state, ending a paid plan may reduce the account to lower limits rather than preserving the previous paid-plan limits.

Review the plan shown in your dashboard after any subscription change.

Do not assume that:

All existing businesses will remain active.
All authorized senders will remain available.
The previous monthly request allowance will remain.

Refunds and Billing Questions

For refund, duplicate charge, payment, invoice, renewal, or subscription questions, contact Revilope support.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The order or subscription number when available.
The date of the charge.
The amount charged.
A clear description of the billing issue.

Do not include:

Your complete card number.
Your card security code.
Your banking password.
Your Revilope password.

Taxes and Final Checkout Amounts

The final amount shown during checkout or in your account may include applicable taxes or other required billing adjustments.

Review the complete checkout total before confirming a paid plan.

The billing record in your account is the authoritative record of the final charged amount.

Invoices and Order Records

Your WooCommerce My Account area may provide access to order details associated with your paid subscription.

Review the Orders or Subscriptions area when you need:

The order number.
The order date.
The subscription status.
The charged amount.
The billing details associated with the order.

Plan Usage Does Not Measure Reviews Received

The monthly request count measures review requests created through Revilope.

It does not measure:

Google reviews received.
Email opens.
Button clicks.
Completed review forms.
Positive reviews.
Negative reviews.

Revilope does not currently monitor whether a customer completes a Google review.

One Sent Request Does Not Equal One Review

A customer may receive a request and decide not to leave a review.

A request may also be filtered into spam, ignored, or opened without a review being submitted.

Plan usage is based on accepted review requests, not the number of reviews produced.

Sent Does Not Guarantee Delivery

A Sent request means the configured outgoing mail system accepted the email for sending.

It does not guarantee:

Inbox placement.
That the customer opened the message.
That the customer clicked the button.
That the customer completed a review.

A request can still count toward plan usage even when the customer does not interact with it.

Monitor Usage Before Reaching the Limit

Do not wait until requests begin showing Plan Limit before reviewing account capacity.

Monitor usage when:

You are preparing a manual batch.
You are adding another business.
You are adding staff senders.
Your business is entering a busy season.
You notice a sudden increase in Activity.
You manage several locations or clients.

Unexpected Usage Increases

If usage increases faster than expected, review Activity.

Possible causes include:

Several staff members using the BCC address.
Revilope being added to too many emails in a customer conversation.
A large manual batch.
A third-party email system triggering requests.
The wrong business workflow being used.
More customer volume than usual.

Duplicate Protection may block repeated customers, but every eligible new customer can still use plan capacity.

Pause a Business During a Usage Investigation

If you suspect unauthorized or accidental activity:

Pause the affected business.
Review recent Activity.
Review authorized senders.
Check whether the private BCC address was exposed.
Review staff email templates and saved contacts.
Contact Revilope support when necessary.

Pausing cancels pending requests for that business and releases eligible reserved capacity.

Request Usage Example

A Pro plan includes 100 requests.

During the current period:

55 BCC requests are Sent.
20 manual requests are Scheduled.
5 requests are Sending.
10 requests were Skipped Duplicate.
5 requests were Suppressed.

The account may have used or reserved approximately 80 requests:

55 Sent.
20 Scheduled.
5 Sending.

The Skipped Duplicate and Suppressed attempts do not normally create additional live requests.

The account may have approximately 20 requests remaining.

Large Manual Batch Example

An account has 50 requests remaining.

The user submits 80 customer email addresses.

Of those addresses:

60 are otherwise eligible.
10 are duplicates.
5 are suppressed.
5 are invalid.

Revilope may accept only up to the 50 available eligible requests.

The remaining eligible addresses may receive a Plan Limit result.

Review the submission result before assuming that all 80 customers were scheduled.

Plan Limit Troubleshooting

The Dashboard Shows Requests Remaining, but a Request Shows Plan Limit

Check whether:

The displayed page needs to be refreshed.
Other requests were created in another browser session.
Scheduled requests already reserved the remaining capacity.
A large manual batch was submitted recently.
The subscription status changed.
The business exceeds the current plan limit.

The Request Count Did Not Increase After a BCC Email

The request may have been:

Skipped as a duplicate.
Suppressed.
Rejected as an unauthorized sender.
Rejected as an invalid recipient.
Blocked by the plan limit.

Review Activity for the actual result.

The Request Count Increased Before the Email Was Sent

The request was likely accepted and Scheduled.

Scheduled requests reserve capacity before the sending time arrives.

The Usage Did Not Return After Cancellation

Allow time for the request to reach its final Cancelled status and for the usage summary to update.

Refresh the dashboard.

Contact support if eligible cancelled requests continue reserving capacity for an extended period.

A Failed Request Still Appears to Use Capacity

Confirm that the request reached a final Failed status and is not still retrying.

Refresh the plan summary after the final status is recorded.

An Upgrade Does Not Appear on the Dashboard

Check:

The order status.
The subscription status.
Whether payment completed successfully.
Whether you are signed into the correct account.
Whether the dashboard needs to be refreshed.

Contact support with the order or subscription number if the successful purchase is not reflected.

A Payment Was Taken but the Subscription Is Not Active

Review the order and subscription status in My Account.

Do not purchase the same subscription repeatedly while the first order is being reviewed.

Contact Revilope support with the order information.

A Payment Failed

Review and update the payment method in My Account.

Confirm that:

The card has not expired.
The billing details are correct.
The payment method has sufficient availability.
The card provider is not blocking the transaction.

The Account Has Too Many Businesses After a Downgrade

Decide which business should remain active.

Pause or delete businesses that no longer fit the plan, and remove obsolete BCC addresses from staff workflows.

Contact support if the account remains restricted after the business count is corrected.

The Account Has Too Many Authorized Senders

Remove senders who no longer need access.

Prioritize:

Current employees.
Actively used shared mailboxes.
Addresses that actually send customer emails.

Remove:

Former employees.
Retired inboxes.
Incorrect pending addresses.
Unused aliases.

Plan and Billing Best Practices

Review your usage regularly.
Remember that BCC and Manual requests share one allowance.
Remember that Scheduled requests reserve capacity.
Use Send Test without worrying about request usage.
Check plan capacity before submitting a large batch.
Upgrade before adding businesses or senders beyond the current limits.
Review existing businesses and senders before downgrading.
Keep your payment method current.
Review subscription status after a payment issue.
Do not assume blocked requests will be recreated automatically after an upgrade.
Do not expect unused requests to roll over.
Do not interpret request usage as completed Google reviews.

Plan and Usage Checklist

The current plan is correct.
The monthly request allowance fits normal business volume.
The number of businesses fits the plan limit.
The number of authorized senders fits the plan limit.
Scheduled requests have been included when reviewing remaining capacity.
Manual and BCC requests are being counted together.
Test emails are not being confused with live requests.
Unused requests are not expected to roll over.
Large manual batches are reviewed before submission.
Plan Limit statuses are investigated in Activity.
Cancelled and Failed requests have reached a final status before usage is reviewed.

Billing Checklist

The subscription shows the expected plan.
The subscription status is active.
The recurring price is correct.
The payment method is current.
The billing details are accurate.
Recent orders or payments have been reviewed.
Failed payments have been resolved.
Business and sender limits have been reviewed before a downgrade.
Scheduled requests have been reviewed before cancellation.
Sensitive payment information has not been sent by email.

You Are Ready to Continue When

You understand the limits included with each plan.
You understand that BCC and Manual requests share the monthly allowance.
You understand that each customer counts as one request.
You understand that Scheduled requests reserve capacity.
You know that test emails do not count.
You know that unused requests do not roll over.
You understand how business and authorized sender limits work.
You know what to review before upgrading, downgrading, or cancelling.
You know where to review billing and subscription information.

Next Step

Continue to the Timezone and Account Settings section to learn how Revilope displays scheduled times, how to select the correct timezone, and how account information affects tests and support messages.

Need Help With Plans, Usage, or Billing?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

For a plan or usage issue, include:

Your Revilope account email.
Your current plan.
The usage shown in your dashboard.
The request status shown in Activity.
The number of businesses configured.
The number of authorized senders configured.
A clear description of what you expected.

For a billing issue, also include:

The order or subscription number when available.
The date of the payment or attempted payment.
The amount involved.
The subscription status shown in My Account.

Do not send your Revilope password, email password, complete payment-card number, card security code, banking password, private BCC address, or unnecessary customer information.

Timezone and Account Settings

Your timezone and account settings control how Revilope displays request times, where test emails are delivered, how you sign in, and how account-related information is managed.

Setting the correct timezone is especially important because Revilope displays created, scheduled, and sent times using the timezone saved to your account.

Revilope stores and processes scheduled request times using a consistent internal time standard, then converts those times into your selected timezone for display.

Where to Find Your Account Settings

Revilope account settings are managed through the WooCommerce My Account area.

Depending on your account and subscription, the My Account area may include options for:

Your Revilope dashboard.
Timezone settings.
Account details.
Password changes.
Billing information.
Payment methods.
Orders.
Subscriptions.
Logging out.

The exact options displayed may depend on your current plan, subscription status, and available account features.

Why Your Timezone Matters

Your account timezone determines how request timestamps are shown in Revilope.

This may include:

The time a BCC request was created.
The time a manual request was created.
The scheduled sending time.
The time an outgoing request was sent.
The current local time displayed in account settings.

If the wrong timezone is selected, a request may appear to be scheduled earlier or later than expected even when the underlying scheduled moment is correct.

Default Timezone

New Revilope accounts use the following default timezone:

America/New_York

This timezone is suitable for businesses operating in Eastern Time in locations such as Ontario, Quebec, New York, and other areas that follow the same timezone rules.

If your business operates somewhere else, update the timezone before relying on the scheduled times shown in Activity.

How to Change Your Timezone

Sign in to your Revilope account.
Open the WooCommerce My Account area.
Open the Timezone tab or timezone settings area.
Review the currently selected timezone.
Select the named timezone that matches your business location.
Save the setting.
Confirm that the local time displayed by Revilope is correct.
Return to Activity and review your request times.

Use a named timezone that matches your region rather than choosing a timezone only because its current clock time appears correct.

Use a Named Regional Timezone

A named regional timezone accounts for local daylight saving time rules.

Examples include:

America/New_York
America/Toronto
America/Chicago
America/Denver
America/Los_Angeles
America/Vancouver
America/Halifax
America/St_Johns

Select the timezone that most accurately represents your location.

Do not select a timezone based only on its current numerical difference from Coordinated Universal Time.

Why Named Timezones Are Better Than Fixed UTC Offsets

A fixed UTC offset does not always adjust automatically when daylight saving time begins or ends.

For example, Eastern Time may use one offset during standard time and another during daylight saving time.

A named timezone such as America/New_York contains the rules needed to make those seasonal adjustments.

This helps Revilope continue displaying the correct local time throughout the year.

Timezone Examples

Eastern Time

A business in Toronto, Ottawa, Montreal, New York, or Miami may use America/Toronto or America/New_York, depending on the available setting and business preference.

Central Time

A business in Winnipeg, Chicago, Dallas, or another Central Time location may use America/Winnipeg or America/Chicago.

Mountain Time

A business in Calgary, Edmonton, Denver, or another Mountain Time location may use America/Edmonton or America/Denver.

Pacific Time

A business in Vancouver, Los Angeles, Seattle, or another Pacific Time location may use America/Vancouver or America/Los_Angeles.

Atlantic Time

A business in Halifax or another Atlantic Time location may use America/Halifax.

Newfoundland Time

A business in Newfoundland may use America/St_Johns.

How Revilope Stores Request Times

Revilope stores and processes request times using Coordinated Universal Time, commonly called UTC.

UTC provides a consistent internal reference that does not depend on the website server’s local clock display.

When Revilope shows a request in your dashboard, it converts the stored UTC time into the timezone saved to your account.

This process helps separate:

The internal scheduled moment.
The website server’s timezone.
Your personal or business timezone.
The local time displayed in Activity.

Revilope Does Not Rely on the Server Time for Display

Your Activity times should be displayed using your selected account timezone rather than the raw timezone configured on the website server.

This is important because a hosting server may use:

UTC.
A different country’s timezone.
A fixed server offset.
A timezone selected by the hosting provider.

The server’s own timezone should not determine the local time you see in your Revilope account.

How Follow-Up Delays Are Scheduled

Revilope uses relative follow-up delays.

Available delays include:

1 hour.
4 hours.
12 hours.
24 hours.
2 days.
3 days.
7 days.

The selected delay is added to the time Revilope accepts and creates the request.

Example

A BCC email is processed at 1:39 p.m. in your local timezone.

The business uses a 1-hour follow-up delay.

The request is scheduled for approximately 2:39 p.m. in the same timezone.

Internally, Revilope stores the corresponding UTC moment and displays it in your selected timezone.

The Delay Is Based on Elapsed Time

A 24-hour delay means approximately 24 hours after the request is created.

A 2-day delay means approximately 48 hours after the request is created.

A 7-day delay means approximately 168 hours after the request is created.

The delay is not based on the server reaching the same displayed clock time.

Created Time Versus Original Email Time

For BCC Review Automation, the request creation time may be slightly later than the time you sent the original customer email.

Revilope must first:

Receive the BCC copy.
Identify the business.
Confirm the sender.
Identify the customer.
Apply request eligibility checks.
Create the scheduled request.

Example

You send the original customer email at 1:39 p.m.

Revilope processes it at 1:42 p.m.

The business uses a 1-hour delay.

The request is scheduled for approximately 2:42 p.m., not 2:39 p.m.

Activity Times

Activity may display several different timestamps for one request.

Created Time

The Created time shows when Revilope recorded and accepted the request.

Scheduled Time

The Scheduled time shows when the request becomes due for outgoing processing.

Sent Time

The Sent time shows when the outgoing mail system accepted the review-request email for sending.

Each of these times should be displayed using your selected account timezone.

Changing the Timezone Changes the Display

Changing your timezone changes how stored request times appear in the dashboard.

It does not normally change the underlying moment when an already scheduled request is due.

Example

A request is scheduled internally for a specific UTC time.

Your account initially uses America/New_York.

You change the account to America/Los_Angeles.

The Scheduled time displayed in Activity changes to the equivalent Pacific Time.

The underlying scheduled moment remains the same.

Changing the Timezone Does Not Change the Follow-Up Length

A 24-hour follow-up delay remains 24 hours regardless of the timezone selected for display.

Changing the timezone does not convert:

A 1-hour delay into a 4-hour delay.
A 24-hour delay into a 12-hour delay.
A 3-day delay into a 2-day delay.

The timezone changes how the request time is presented, not the length of the selected delay.

Changing the Business Delay Is Different From Changing the Timezone

The business follow-up delay controls how long Revilope waits before sending a new request.

The account timezone controls how that scheduled moment is displayed.

These are separate settings.

Follow-Up Delay Example

Changing a business from a 24-hour delay to a 3-day delay affects the schedule calculated for future requests.

Timezone Example

Changing the account from Eastern Time to Pacific Time changes the displayed clock time for a request but does not change its actual scheduled moment.

Changing the Delay May Not Update Existing Requests

When a request is created, Revilope calculates and saves its scheduled time.

Changing the business’s follow-up delay later normally affects new requests.

Existing scheduled requests may keep their original scheduled times.

Example

A request is created using a 24-hour delay.

You later change the business to a 3-day delay.

The existing request may remain scheduled for its original 24-hour time.

New requests should use the 3-day delay.

Changing the Timezone After Scheduling a Request

Changing the account timezone after a request is scheduled should update how the scheduled moment is displayed.

It should not move the request to a different actual moment solely because the display timezone changed.

After changing your timezone:

Save the new timezone.
Refresh the Activity page.
Find an existing scheduled request.
Confirm that the time now appears in the new local timezone.
Remember that the underlying scheduled moment has not changed.

Daylight Saving Time

A named timezone allows Revilope to apply the daylight saving rules associated with that region.

Daylight saving changes can affect the local clock display even though the internally stored UTC time remains consistent.

This is one reason you should use a named timezone instead of a manually calculated UTC offset.

Requests Scheduled Across a Daylight Saving Change

A request may be created before a daylight saving transition and become due after the transition.

Because the request uses a real elapsed delay, the local clock time may appear different from what you expect when the clocks change.

Example

A request is created shortly before a seasonal clock change with a 24-hour delay.

Twenty-four real hours later, the displayed local clock time may differ by one hour because the timezone offset changed during that period.

This does not necessarily mean the request was scheduled incorrectly.

Timezone and Customer Location

Revilope uses the timezone saved to your account for dashboard display.

Revilope does not currently assign a separate timezone to each customer.

This means a customer in another region may receive the email at a different local clock time.

Example

Your account uses America/New_York.

A request is scheduled for 9:00 a.m. Eastern Time.

A customer in Vancouver may receive it at approximately 6:00 a.m. Pacific Time.

When serving customers across several timezones, consider using delays that reduce the chance of inconvenient delivery times.

Timezone and Multiple Businesses

The timezone setting is connected to your Revilope account rather than being configured separately for every business.

All business Activity times are displayed using the account timezone.

This is important for:

Agencies managing clients in several regions.
Businesses with locations in several timezones.
Teams reviewing Activity from a central office.

Choose the timezone that makes the most sense for the person or team managing the Revilope account.

Managing Businesses in Different Timezones

If your account manages businesses in different timezones, the dashboard continues displaying request times in the single timezone selected for the account.

For example:

Your account timezone is America/New_York.
You manage one business in Toronto.
You manage another business in Vancouver.
Activity for both businesses is displayed in Eastern Time.

Take this into account when comparing the displayed time with the customer’s or location’s local time.

Scheduled Sending Is Not Exact to the Second

The Scheduled time shows when the request becomes due for processing.

The outgoing email may be handed off shortly after that time rather than at the exact displayed second.

Small delays may occur because of:

Background scheduler intervals.
Server traffic.
Hosting conditions.
WordPress background processing.
Outgoing email-provider delays.
Temporary network problems.
Automatic retry processing.
Overdue-request recovery.

A request that remains Scheduled briefly after its displayed due time has not necessarily failed.

Timezone Troubleshooting

The Scheduled Time Is Several Hours Off

This usually indicates that the wrong account timezone is selected.

Open My Account.
Open the Timezone settings.
Check the selected timezone.
Compare the displayed current time with your local clock.
Select the correct timezone.
Save the setting.
Refresh Activity.

The Time Matches UTC Instead of Local Time

Confirm that your account is not set to UTC when you intended to use a regional timezone.

Select a named timezone such as America/New_York, America/Chicago, or America/Los_Angeles.

The Time Is One Hour Off

A one-hour difference may be related to:

Daylight saving time.
A fixed UTC offset being used instead of a named timezone.
The wrong regional timezone being selected.
A recently changed timezone that has not yet refreshed on the page.

Save a named regional timezone and refresh the dashboard.

The Scheduled Time Changed After Updating the Timezone

The displayed clock time changed because Revilope converted the same stored request moment into the newly selected timezone.

This does not necessarily mean the actual scheduled moment changed.

The Delay Appears Longer Than Selected

Compare the Activity Created time with the Scheduled time.

Do not compare only the original email time with the Scheduled time.

The BCC email may have taken several minutes to be received and processed before the request was created.

The Delay Appears Shorter Than Selected

Check:

The business shown in Activity.
The delay saved for that business.
Whether the request was manual.
Whether Send as Soon as Possible was selected.
The account timezone.
The Created time.

The Request Is Still Scheduled After the Due Time

Allow a reasonable background-processing period.

Then check:

The current timezone.
The Scheduled time.
The current request status.
Whether the business is active.
Whether the customer unsubscribed.
Whether other requests are also delayed.

Contact Revilope support if the request remains significantly overdue.

Account Email Address

Your Revilope account email is the primary email address connected to your login and account.

It may be used for:

Signing in.
Password resets.
Account notices.
Subscription messages.
Security-related communication.
Support communication.
Receiving test emails.

Keep the account email accurate and accessible.

Account Email Versus Authorized Sender

Your account email and authorized sender are not necessarily the same address.

Account Email

The account email is connected to your Revilope login, account notices, and test-email delivery.

Authorized Sender

An authorized sender is an email address permitted to trigger BCC requests for a business.

Changing the account email does not automatically change the business’s authorized sender list.

Changing an authorized sender does not automatically change the Revilope account email.

Account Email Versus Reply-To Address

The account email and business reply-to address are also separate.

Account Email

Receives test emails and account communication.

Reply-To Address

Receives customer replies to live review-request emails for a particular business.

Changing the business reply-to address does not change where test emails are sent.

Account Email Versus Customer Email

The customer email is the address that receives the live review request.

It is not the same as:

Your Revilope account email.
Your authorized sender.
Your business reply-to address.
Your private Revilope BCC address.

Account Email Versus Private BCC Address

Your private Revilope BCC address is generated for a specific business and is used only to trigger BCC Review Automation.

It should not be used as:

Your login email.
Your customer-service inbox.
Your account contact email.
Your reply-to address.
An authorized sender.

How to Update Your Account Email

Sign in to Revilope.
Open My Account.
Open Account Details.
Find the account email field.
Enter the new email address.
Check the spelling carefully.
Save the account details.
Confirm that you can access the new inbox.
Send a business test email to confirm that test delivery reaches the expected account address.

The exact update process may depend on the account controls available in My Account.

Use an Account Email You Control

Use an email address that:

You check regularly.
You expect to keep long term.
Can receive external email.
Is protected by a strong password.
Is accessible for password recovery.

Avoid using:

A former employee’s address.
A temporary inbox.
An address you cannot access.
A customer’s email address.
A private Revilope BCC address.

Test Email Delivery After Changing the Account Email

Because test emails are sent to your Revilope account email, send a new test after changing the address.

Save the new account email.
Return to the Revilope dashboard.
Find a business.
Select Send Test.
Open the new account inbox.
Confirm that the test email arrived.

If the test still arrives at the old address, refresh the account page and confirm that the change was saved successfully.

Account Name

Your account details may include a first name, last name, or display name.

This information is used for account administration and may appear in WooCommerce account or billing areas.

The account name is separate from the Owner or Representative Name saved inside a Revilope business.

Changing your account name does not necessarily change the name shown in customer review requests.

Owner or Representative Name

The Owner or Representative Name is configured separately for each business.

It may appear in the customer-facing template when you use:

{owner_name}

To change the customer-facing representative:

Open the Revilope dashboard.
Find the business.
Select Edit.
Update the Owner or Representative Name.
Save the business.
Send a new test email.

Password Settings

Use the Account Details area to update your Revilope password when the option is available.

Change your password when:

You suspect someone else knows it.
You reused it on another website.
A device containing the password was lost.
An employee or contractor who knew the password no longer requires access.
Your password-management practices have changed.

Choose a Strong Password

Your Revilope password should be:

Unique to Revilope.
Long enough to resist guessing.
Difficult to predict.
Stored securely.

Avoid using:

Your business name.
Your name.
Your birthday.
A common word.
A password reused from your email account.
A password shared among several employees.

Do Not Share Your Account Password

Only trusted people should have access to the Revilope account.

Do not send your password through:

Email.
Text messages.
Support tickets.
Shared documents.
Unsecured team chats.

Revilope support should not need your password to investigate an account issue.

Forgotten Password

Use the password-reset option on the Revilope login page when you cannot sign in.

Open the Revilope login page.
Select the forgotten-password option.
Enter the email address connected to your account.
Check the account inbox.
Check spam or junk if the reset email does not appear.
Open the password-reset link.
Create a new secure password.
Sign in again.

Password Reset Email Does Not Arrive

Check:

The email address entered on the reset form.
Spam.
Junk.
Promotions.
Quarantine.
Whether the inbox can receive external email.

Contact hello@revilope.com when you cannot access the account or receive the password-reset email.

Billing Address

Your WooCommerce account may contain a billing address used for subscription orders and payment records.

The billing address is separate from the business mailing address shown in Revilope review-request emails.

Billing Address

Used for account orders, payments, and billing records.

Business Mailing Address

Saved separately inside each Revilope business and may appear in customer review-request email footers.

Changing one does not automatically change the other.

Update Both Addresses When Necessary

If your business moves, review both:

The WooCommerce billing address.
The Revilope business mailing address.

Also review:

The Google Business Profile.
The Google review link.
The business website.
The reply-to address.
The business name when it includes a location.

Payment Methods

Your My Account area may allow you to review or update payment methods connected to a paid Revilope subscription.

Update your payment method when:

The card is expiring.
The card was replaced.
The card was lost or compromised.
The billing details changed.
A subscription payment failed.

Do not send complete payment-card information to Revilope support.

Orders and Subscriptions

Your My Account area may include separate sections for Orders and Subscriptions.

These areas may display:

The current Revilope plan.
The subscription status.
The recurring amount.
Order numbers.
Payment dates.
Renewal information.
Billing details.

Use the billing information shown in your account as the primary record for your subscription.

Account Settings Do Not Replace Business Settings

Your account settings apply to your overall Revilope account.

Each business still has separate settings for:

Business name.
Owner or representative name.
Website.
Reply-to email.
Mailing address.
Google review link.
Email subject.
Email message.
Review button text.
Follow-up delay.
Authorized senders.

Updating Account Details does not automatically update every business profile.

Changing Your Account Email Does Not Update Authorized Senders

If you change the email address used to sign in to Revilope, review the authorized sender list for each business separately.

The new account email is not automatically authorized to trigger BCC requests.

To use the new address as a sender:

Open the business.
Select Edit.
Add the new sender address.
Save the business.
Complete sender verification.
Send a BCC test.

Changing Your Account Email Does Not Update Reply-To Addresses

The business reply-to address must also be reviewed separately.

Do not assume customer replies will begin going to the new account email.

Update the Reply-To Email field inside each affected business when needed.

Changing Your Account Email Does Not Update Billing Automatically

Account email, billing details, and payment information may be stored in different account fields.

After changing the account email, review:

Account Details.
Billing address.
Payment method.
Subscription details.

Account Security

Your account provides access to business settings, private BCC addresses, authorized senders, customer request Activity, and subscription information.

Protect the account by:

Using a unique password.
Protecting the account email.
Signing out on shared computers.
Avoiding password sharing.
Removing access from former employees.
Reviewing unexpected Activity.
Keeping billing information current.

Shared Computers

When using Revilope on a shared or public computer:

Do not save the password in the browser.
Do not leave the dashboard open unattended.
Log out when finished.
Close the browser window.
Avoid copying private BCC addresses into unsecured documents.

Former Employees and Account Access

When an employee or contractor no longer needs access:

Change the Revilope account password if it was shared.
Remove the person’s email from authorized senders.
Review business reply-to addresses.
Review billing and account contact information.
Review recent Activity.
Remove private BCC addresses from the person’s email contacts and templates where possible.

Account Email Compromise

If the email account connected to Revilope may have been compromised:

Change the email account password.
Sign out active email sessions.
Enable or review multi-factor authentication with the email provider.
Change the Revilope password.
Review your Revilope account email.
Review recent business Activity.
Review authorized senders.
Review subscription and billing information.
Contact Revilope support.

Unexpected Account Changes

Contact Revilope support promptly when you notice:

An account email change you did not make.
A password change you did not request.
An unfamiliar business.
An unfamiliar authorized sender.
Unexpected request Activity.
An unexpected plan change.
An unfamiliar order or subscription.

Timezone Best Practices

Set the timezone before sending live requests.
Use a named regional timezone.
Confirm the displayed current time after saving.
Review Activity after changing the timezone.
Remember that the timezone controls display, not the length of the delay.
Consider customer timezones when serving several regions.
Expect daylight saving adjustments when your region observes them.
Do not compare scheduled times to the hosting server’s local time.

Account Settings Best Practices

Use an account email you can access long term.
Keep the account email current.
Use a strong and unique password.
Do not share the account password.
Review billing details after changing account information.
Remember that account email, reply-to email, and authorized sender are separate.
Send a new test after changing the account email.
Sign out on shared devices.
Review account access when staff roles change.

Timezone Checklist

The selected timezone matches the business location or account-management team.
A named regional timezone is being used.
The current local time displayed by Revilope is correct.
Created times appear correctly in Activity.
Scheduled times appear correctly in Activity.
Sent times appear correctly in Activity.
The effect of daylight saving time is understood.
Customer timezone differences have been considered.
The timezone is not being confused with the business follow-up delay.

Account Settings Checklist

The account email is correct.
The account email can receive password resets and test emails.
The account name is accurate.
The password is strong and unique.
The billing address is current.
The payment method is current when using a paid plan.
The subscription status is correct.
Authorized senders have been reviewed separately.
Business reply-to addresses have been reviewed separately.
Business mailing addresses have been reviewed separately.
Former employees no longer have access.

Troubleshooting Account Settings

The Timezone Will Not Save

Confirm that:

You selected a timezone from the available options.
You used the Save button.
Your Revilope session is still active.
The page does not display a validation error.
The browser page has been refreshed after saving.

Try signing out and back in before attempting the change again.

The Current Time Display Is Incorrect

Check:

The selected named timezone.
Whether your device clock is correct.
Whether daylight saving time recently changed.
Whether the page needs to be refreshed.

Activity Still Shows the Old Timezone

Refresh the Activity page after saving the new timezone.

Sign out and sign back in when the old display continues to appear.

Contact support if the saved timezone is correct but request timestamps continue to use another timezone.

A Test Email Goes to the Old Account Address

Confirm that the new account email was saved in Account Details.

Then:

Refresh My Account.
Confirm the new email is displayed.
Return to Revilope.
Send a new test.
Check the new inbox.

Customer Replies Go to the Account Email

Review the business’s Reply-To Email field.

The account email and business reply-to email are separate, but they may be the same when intentionally configured that way.

Edit the business and send another test after correcting the reply-to address.

BCC Requests Fail After Changing the Account Email

Changing the account email does not automatically verify it as an authorized sender.

Check the business’s authorized sender list and verification status.

The Password Change Did Not Work

Confirm that:

The current password was entered correctly when required.
The new password meets the available requirements.
The confirmation matches the new password.
The account details were saved.

Use the forgotten-password process when you cannot confirm the current password.

The Account Email Cannot Be Changed

The account may require additional verification or may be restricted by the current login state.

Contact Revilope support for help updating an inaccessible or incorrect account email.

Billing Details Do Not Match the Business Profile

Billing details and Revilope business details are maintained separately.

Update each area independently.

You Are Ready to Continue When

Your timezone matches your business or account-management location.
The local time displayed by Revilope is correct.
You understand that Revilope stores request times internally in UTC.
You understand that timezone changes affect display rather than the follow-up length.
You understand the difference between account email, authorized sender, reply-to address, and private BCC address.
Your account email is accurate and accessible.
Your password is secure.
Your billing and subscription information is current.
You know where test emails will be delivered.

Next Step

Continue to the Privacy and Email Processing section to learn what Revilope reads from BCC emails, what information is stored, how customer email addresses are protected, and what Revilope does not access.

Need Help With Your Timezone or Account?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

For a timezone issue, include:

Your Revilope account email.
The timezone currently selected.
Your correct local timezone.
The Created time shown in Activity.
The Scheduled time shown in Activity.
The time you expected to see.
The business name.
The request source.

For an account issue, include:

Your Revilope account email.
The account setting you were trying to change.
Any error message displayed.
The approximate date and time of the problem.
A clear description of what happened.

Do not send your Revilope password, email password, complete payment-card number, card security code, private BCC address, verification tokens, or unnecessary customer information.

Privacy and Email Processing

Revilope is designed to create review requests without reading or storing the contents of your original customer emails.

When you add your private Revilope address to BCC, Revilope processes only the email header information needed to identify the business, confirm the sender, identify the customer recipient, prevent duplicate processing, and schedule the separate review request.

The original email body, attachments, and conversation contents are not used to create the review request.

You can use Save Contact to store the private Revilope BCC address in your email or contacts application. The saved contact and any downloaded contact file contain the private business address and should be treated as confidential business information.

Privacy-First Email Processing

Revilope’s BCC workflow is designed around data minimization.

This means Revilope attempts to process only the information required to provide the review-request service.

The workflow does not require Revilope to operate as:

Your customer relationship management system.
Your business email inbox.
Your address-book provider.
Your document-storage system.
Your invoice archive.
Your customer-support platform.
Your Google Business Profile manager.

You continue using your existing email account and business workflow. Revilope receives the hidden BCC copy only to determine whether a separate review request should be created.

Using Save Contact does not give Revilope access to your complete contact list, email address book, or device contacts.

How a BCC Email Is Processed

You send a normal email directly to one customer.
You place the correct private Revilope address or saved Revilope contact in BCC.
The customer receives the original email through your normal email provider.
Revilope receives the hidden BCC copy in its inbound mailbox.
Revilope retrieves the header information required for processing.
Revilope identifies the business connected to the private BCC address.
Revilope checks whether the sender is authorized and verified.
Revilope identifies one eligible customer recipient.
Revilope applies duplicate, cooldown, suppression, plan, and security checks.
If eligible, Revilope creates a separate review request using the business’s saved template.
The inbound mailbox copy is deleted and expunged after processing.
The separate review request is sent after the selected follow-up delay.

Saving the Revilope address as a contact does not change how the BCC email is processed. The contact is simply a convenient way to enter the correct private address into the BCC field.

What Is an Email Header?

An email header contains technical and routing information about the message.

Header information may include:

The sender email address.
The sender display name.
The direct recipient email address.
CC recipient information when present.
The email subject.
The date and time associated with the message.
A technical message identifier.
Email routing information.
Authentication and security indicators.
Information showing whether a message appears automated, bulk, bounced, or list-generated.

Revilope uses the necessary header information to decide whether the email should create a review request.

What Revilope Reads From a BCC Email

Revilope may process the following header-derived information:

The private Revilope address that received the BCC copy.
The email address that sent the original message.
The customer email address in the To field.
Other recipient information needed to confirm that one clear customer was identified.
The message identifier used for duplicate protection.
The message date and routing information.
Authentication or delivery indicators needed for security checks.
Indicators that the message may be automated, bulk, bounced, or list-generated.

Some header information may be used only during processing, while limited operational information may be retained to create the request, prevent duplicates, apply suppression, maintain security, and record the processing result.

What Revilope Does Not Read

Revilope does not retrieve or use the contents of the original email body for the review-request workflow.

This includes:

The written message sent to the customer.
Your email signature.
Previous messages quoted in an email thread.
Invoice details written inside the email body.
Customer-service conversations.
Internal notes included in the body.
Images embedded inside the email.
Documents attached to the email.

The separate review request is created from the template saved in the Revilope business profile, not from the original email body.

Original Email Attachments

Attachments in the original customer email are not used to create the Revilope review request.

Examples include:

Invoices.
Receipts.
Contracts.
Photographs.
Medical documents.
Project files.
Spreadsheets.
PDF documents.

Revilope does not copy these attachments into the later review-request email.

The customer receives the attachment only as part of the original email sent through your business email provider.

Original Email Body Versus Review-Request Body

The original email body and the Revilope review-request body are separate.

Original Email Body

This is the normal message your business sends directly to the customer.

Examples include:

A receipt.
A completed-service message.
An invoice.
A thank-you email.
An appointment follow-up.

Review-Request Body

This is generated later from the email template saved in your Revilope business profile.

It may contain:

Your business name.
Your owner or representative name.
Your custom review-request message.
Your review button.
Your Google review link.
Your business mailing address.
An unsubscribe option.

Revilope does not forward or reproduce the original customer email when it sends the review request.

Be Careful With Email Subjects

The subject line is part of the email header rather than the message body.

Because Revilope processes header information, do not place unnecessary sensitive information in the subject line.

Avoid including:

Payment card numbers.
Bank account information.
Passwords.
Government identification numbers.
Medical diagnoses.
Detailed health information.
Private legal information.
Sensitive information about minors.
Confidential customer account details.

Use a general subject such as:

Your receipt from Greenway Dental
Your service is complete
Thank you for your visit
Your appointment follow-up

Avoid subjects such as:

John Smith’s medical diagnosis and treatment details
Full credit card information for order 1452
Private legal settlement documents

Be Careful With Display Names

Sender and recipient display names may also appear in email headers.

Do not use display names that contain unnecessary sensitive information.

For example, use:

Greenway Dental Reception

Avoid:

John Smith – Patient Receiving Specific Medical Treatment

What Happens to the Inbound Mailbox Copy?

After Revilope processes the hidden BCC copy, the inbound mailbox copy is designed to be deleted and expunged.

This applies whether the request is:

Accepted and scheduled.
Rejected because of an unauthorized sender.
Rejected because of an invalid recipient.
Skipped as a duplicate.
Blocked by the plan limit.
Blocked by customer suppression.
Rejected by another security or eligibility check.

Deleting the inbound mailbox copy does not necessarily remove limited header-derived or operational records required to manage the request and protect the service.

Your Original Sent Email Is Not Deleted

Revilope deletes only the copy received in its own inbound mailbox.

Revilope does not delete:

The copy in your Sent folder.
The customer’s copy of the original email.
Copies stored by your business email provider.
Copies stored in your customer-management system.
Copies retained by your invoicing or booking platform.

Your original email remains subject to the storage and retention settings of your own email provider and business systems.

Limited Operational Information

Revilope may retain limited information needed to operate and protect the review-request service.

This may include:

The business connected to the request.
The request source.
The customer email address in protected form.
The request status.
The request creation time.
The scheduled sending time.
The sent or failed time.
The sender address used for a BCC request.
A message identifier or protected duplicate-prevention value.
Suppression and cooldown information.
Plan-usage information.
Security and troubleshooting information.

Customer Email Address Encryption

Customer email addresses stored for Revilope requests are encrypted using AES-256-GCM encryption.

This protects the stored readable customer address from being kept as ordinary unencrypted text.

The encrypted address can be used when Revilope needs to process or deliver the scheduled customer request.

Protected Customer Matching

Revilope also creates a separate keyed comparison value for customer email addresses.

This protected value allows Revilope to check for:

Existing pending requests.
Recent requests.
Cooldown eligibility.
Customer suppression.
Duplicate manual submissions.

The comparison value allows Revilope to perform matching without relying only on the readable customer address throughout the system.

Customer Addresses Are Masked in Activity

Complete customer email addresses are not normally displayed in the Activity list.

Instead, Revilope shows a masked version similar to:

j****@example.com

Masking helps you identify the request while reducing unnecessary exposure of the full address in the dashboard.

Only trusted account users should have access to Activity, even when addresses are masked.

Why Revilope Needs the Customer Email Address

The customer email address is required to:

Deliver the review-request email.
Prevent duplicate requests.
Apply the customer cooldown.
Honour unsubscribe requests.
Display a masked identifier in Activity.
Investigate delivery or request issues.

Revilope does not require the customer’s name for the standard request workflow.

No Customer Name Personalization

Revilope does not currently require or automatically extract the customer’s first or last name from the original email.

The standard request does not include a customer-name placeholder.

This reduces the amount of customer information required to create the request.

Manual Review Request Processing

When you use Manual Review Requests, you enter customer email addresses directly into Revilope.

Revilope may:

Separate the entered addresses.
Remove repeated entries from the same submission.
Validate the email format.
Compare the customer against pending requests.
Check the customer cooldown.
Check suppression records.
Check the plan allowance.
Create a separate request for each eligible customer.

Do not paste unnecessary customer information into the manual request field.

The standard manual request field requires email addresses, not:

Customer names.
Phone numbers.
Mailing addresses.
Invoice details.
Order histories.
Payment information.
Medical information.
Private notes.

Each Customer Receives a Separate Email

When several customers are submitted manually, Revilope creates a separate request for each eligible address.

Customers do not receive one email containing the complete customer list.

This means:

One customer does not see another customer’s address.
Each customer receives a separate review request.
Each request receives its own status.
Each customer is checked separately for suppression and duplicates.

Outgoing Review-Request Processing

When the scheduled time arrives, Revilope generates a review-request email from the settings saved for the business and request.

The outgoing email contains the customer-facing information required for the request, such as:

The business name.
The email subject.
The custom message.
The review button.
The Google review link.
The reply-to address.
The business mailing address.
The unsubscribe link.

To deliver the message, the outgoing mail service receives the destination customer address and generated email content.

The receiving customer email provider also processes the message according to its own systems and policies.

Template Snapshots

When a request is created, Revilope may save a snapshot of the business information and template required to send that request later.

The snapshot helps preserve the request as it was configured when it was scheduled.

It may include:

The business name.
The owner or representative name.
The subject line.
The message body.
The review button text.
The Google review link.
The reply-to address.
The mailing address.
The selected delay.

Changing the business later may not update requests that were already created.

Customer Replies

Replies to a Revilope review request are directed to the reply-to email address saved for the business.

Customer replies are intended to go directly to the business rather than becoming part of the Revilope BCC-processing workflow.

Use a reply-to inbox that is:

Actively monitored.
Controlled by the business.
Appropriate for customer questions.
Protected with a secure password.

Do not use a private Revilope BCC address or saved Revilope contact as the reply-to address.

Unsubscribe Link Protection

Live review-request emails include an unsubscribe link for the intended customer and request.

Revilope uses signed unsubscribe links to help prevent the link information from being altered or forged.

Do not:

Edit an unsubscribe link.
Publish it publicly.
Reuse it for another customer.
Forward one customer’s live email as a template for another customer.

Suppression Records

When a customer unsubscribes, Revilope retains a protected suppression record so future review requests from the same business can be blocked.

Suppression information may be retained even when:

The original request is removed from visible Activity.
The business later submits the customer manually.
Another employee sends a BCC request.
The customer appears in a future imported list.

Suppression information is retained because removing it automatically could cause Revilope to ignore the customer’s opt-out request.

Authorized Sender Verification Tokens

When an authorized sender is verified, Revilope uses a verification token connected to the verification process.

Verification tokens are stored in hashed form rather than being stored as ordinary readable token values.

This reduces the risk associated with storing active verification secrets.

Do not share sender-verification links or tokens with people who should not be authorized for the business.

Inbound Mailbox Credentials

Revilope uses an inbound mailbox to receive and process private BCC copies.

The password used for the inbound mailbox is encrypted in storage.

Customers should never need to know or receive Revilope’s inbound mailbox password.

Do not send your own email password to Revilope support.

Your Private BCC Address

The private BCC address is not a password, but it should still be treated as confidential business information.

It identifies the Revilope business that should receive and process the hidden email copy.

Do not:

Publish it on your website.
Post it on social media.
Add it to a public directory.
Include it in a public tutorial.
Use it as a public customer-service address.
Subscribe it to mailing lists.
Share it with unrelated companies.

Save Contact and Privacy

The Save Contact button allows you to store the private Revilope BCC address in your normal email or contacts application.

The saved contact may contain:

A contact name identifying Revilope and the business.
The complete private Revilope BCC address.
Basic contact information needed by the contacts application.

Because the saved contact contains the complete private BCC address, it should be protected in the same way as the address shown in the Revilope dashboard.

Save Contact Does Not Give Revilope Access to Your Address Book

Using Save Contact does not authorize Revilope to read, copy, synchronize, or manage the other contacts stored in your email account or device.

The contact is saved or imported through your browser, device, email provider, or contacts application.

Your contacts provider may process and synchronize the saved contact according to its own settings and privacy policies.

Protect Downloaded Contact Files

Depending on your browser or device, selecting Save Contact may download a contact file.

That file contains the private Revilope BCC address.

Do not:

Upload the contact file to a public website.
Attach it to a public email or newsletter.
Post it in a public team channel.
Store it in an unrestricted public folder.
Share it with unrelated companies.
Send it to customers.

After the contact has been imported, remove unnecessary downloaded copies from shared computers or public download folders.

Use Clear Contact Names

Use a contact name that identifies the correct business or location.

Examples include:

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Oakville
Revilope BCC – Northside Auto Repair

Clear contact names reduce the chance that staff will send customer information to the wrong Revilope business address.

Do Not Edit the Private Email Address

You may rename the visible contact, but do not change the private email address stored inside it.

Do not:

Shorten the private address.
Remove characters.
Change the text after the plus sign.
Add spaces.
Replace the domain.
Create your own variation.

Changing the private address may prevent Revilope from identifying the correct business or may direct the email to an invalid destination.

Save Contacts Only for Approved Staff

Only approved staff members who need to trigger BCC review requests should receive or save the private Revilope contact.

Adding someone as an authorized sender does not automatically place the contact in their email account.

Each approved sender may need to save or import the contact separately.

Remove Contacts When Access Ends

When an employee, contractor, agency, or service provider no longer needs access:

Remove the person from authorized senders.
Ask them to remove the saved Revilope contact.
Remove the contact from shared address books when appropriate.
Remove the address from reusable drafts and templates.
Review recent Activity.

If the Private BCC Address or Contact File Is Exposed

If you believe a private BCC address or downloaded contact file was published, shared with an unauthorized person, or used unexpectedly:

Pause the affected business.
Review recent Activity.
Look for unfamiliar senders or customer requests.
Review the authorized sender list.
Remove any sender that should not have access.
Secure the related business email accounts.
Remove publicly shared copies of the contact file where possible.
Ask unauthorized recipients to delete the contact or file.
Contact Revilope support.

Revilope’s authorized sender checks provide protection, but you should still report a private BCC address or contact file that may have been exposed.

Sender Authentication and Security Checks

Revilope may use email header information to evaluate whether an inbound message appears legitimate and suitable for processing.

This may include checking for indicators associated with:

Unauthorized senders.
Failed or suspicious authentication.
Automated system messages.
Bulk or mailing-list email.
Bounce messages.
No-reply systems.
Messages that do not identify one clear customer.

These checks help reduce accidental, fraudulent, or inappropriate request creation.

Possession of a saved BCC contact alone does not authorize a person to create requests. The original email must still pass the applicable authorized-sender and eligibility checks.

No Original Email Tracking

Revilope does not track whether the customer opened your original business email.

Revilope also does not track:

How long the customer read the original email.
Whether an attachment was opened.
Whether an invoice was viewed.
Whether a receipt was downloaded.
Whether the customer replied to the original message.

No Review-Request Open Tracking

Revilope does not currently provide open tracking for review-request emails.

A Sent status does not mean that the customer opened the message.

Revilope does not currently report:

Email open rates.
The time an email was opened.
The device used to open the email.
The customer’s approximate location based on an email open.

No Review Button Click Tracking

Revilope does not currently provide click tracking for the Google review button.

A Sent request does not confirm that the customer selected the button.

Revilope does not currently report:

Whether the button was clicked.
How many times the button was clicked.
The device used to click it.
The customer’s location when clicking.

No Google Review Monitoring

Revilope does not currently connect to your Google Business Profile to monitor completed reviews.

Revilope does not know:

Whether the customer signed in to Google.
Whether the customer selected a star rating.
Whether the customer wrote a review.
What the customer wrote.
Whether the review was positive or negative.
Whether Google published or removed the review.

Revilope’s role ends with sending the review-request email and directing the customer to the Google review link supplied by the business.

What Happens When the Customer Opens Google?

When the customer selects the review button, their browser opens the Google review destination saved for the business.

Once the customer opens Google:

The customer interacts with Google’s website or application.
Google may require the customer to sign in.
Google processes the customer’s activity under Google’s own policies.
Revilope does not control the Google review page.
Revilope does not receive the completed review through the standard workflow.

Businesses are responsible for supplying the correct Google review link.

No Google Account Access

Revilope does not require access to the customer’s Google account.

Revilope does not request the customer’s:

Google password.
Google authentication code.
Google account profile information.
Google review history.

Customers should never provide their Google password to the business or Revilope.

Business Profile Information

Revilope stores the information you enter for each business.

This may include:

The business name.
The owner or representative name.
The business website.
The reply-to email address.
The business mailing address.
The Google review link.
The email subject.
The email message.
The review button text.
The follow-up delay.
The authorized sender addresses.
The private BCC address assigned to the business.

Do not place private customer information inside a business-level email template.

The same template may be sent to many customers.

Account Information

Revilope also stores information associated with your account and subscription.

This may include:

Your account email address.
Your account name.
Your selected timezone.
Your current plan.
Your request usage.
Your business and sender configuration.
Your WooCommerce orders or subscription records.
Your billing details as maintained through the account system.

Do not share your Revilope login with people who do not require access.

Activity Records

Activity records are used to show how requests were handled.

An Activity record may include:

The business.
The request source.
The masked customer address.
The status.
The created time.
The scheduled time.
The sent or failed time.
Information needed to explain a rejection or skipped request.

Removing a visible Activity record does not necessarily remove every protected operational record associated with the request.

Why Some Records May Be Retained

Revilope may retain limited information for legitimate operational purposes such as:

Honouring customer unsubscribes.
Preventing duplicate requests.
Applying customer cooldowns.
Tracking monthly request usage.
Maintaining account security.
Preventing misuse or fraud.
Troubleshooting technical issues.
Resolving billing or service disputes.
Meeting legal obligations.

Revilope does not provide a dashboard control that guarantees immediate removal of every operational, billing, security, or suppression record.

Deleting an Activity Record

Deleting or removing a request from the visible Activity list does not necessarily remove:

The customer’s suppression record.
The customer’s cooldown record.
Duplicate-protection information.
Monthly usage information.
Billing records.
Security or audit records.

Do not delete Activity expecting to make a customer immediately eligible for another request.

Deleting a Business

Deleting a business removes it from normal active use and disables its review-request workflow.

Deletion may:

Remove the business from the normal dashboard.
Disable its private BCC address.
Make existing saved contacts for that address unusable.
Cancel pending requests.
Remove active authorized sender settings.

Deleting a business from Revilope does not automatically remove the saved BCC contact from Gmail, Outlook, Apple Contacts, staff devices, or other address books.

After deleting a business, remove the old saved contact from:

Staff contacts.
Shared address books.
Reusable drafts.
Email templates.
Autocomplete suggestions when possible.
Third-party email systems.

Limited protected information may still be retained for suppression, duplicate protection, security, billing, disputes, or legal obligations.

Deleting and Recreating a Business

A recreated business may receive a different private Revilope BCC address.

Do not continue using the saved contact from the deleted business.

After recreating the business:

Remove the old saved contact.
Remove the old address from reusable drafts and templates.
Use Save Contact on the new business card.
Save the new contact with a clear business or location name.
Confirm that approved staff are using the new contact.
Send a controlled BCC test.
Review the result in Activity.

Cancelling a Subscription

Cancelling a paid subscription is not necessarily the same as deleting the complete Revilope account and every related record.

Subscription and account information may need to be retained for:

Payment records.
Tax or accounting records.
Subscription disputes.
Fraud prevention.
Customer suppression.
Legal obligations.

Cancelling a subscription does not automatically remove saved Revilope contacts from your email accounts, staff devices, or shared address books.

Contact Revilope support when you have a specific account closure or data request.

Customer Privacy Requests

A customer may contact your business with a question about a Revilope review request.

The customer may ask:

Why they received the email.
Which business submitted their address.
How to unsubscribe.
Whether another request is scheduled.
How their information is being used.

Your business should respond accurately and avoid making promises about Revilope data that you cannot confirm.

Contact Revilope support when assistance is needed.

Privacy, Access, and Deletion Questions

For questions about account information, request records, customer suppression, or possible deletion requests, contact hello@revilope.com.

Provide enough information to identify the relevant account or request, but do not send unnecessary sensitive information.

Revilope may need to verify the request before disclosing, changing, or deleting protected account information.

Your Business Remains Responsible for Customer Data

Revilope provides tools for sending review requests, but your business remains responsible for the customer information it submits.

Your business should ensure that:

The customer had a genuine experience with the business.
The customer email address was collected appropriately.
The email address is accurate.
The request is permitted under applicable rules.
The customer has not asked the business to stop contacting them.
The customer is submitted to the correct business or location.
The correct saved BCC contact is used.
Unnecessary personal information is not entered into Revilope.

Revilope Does Not Replace Legal Advice

Privacy, electronic messaging, record-retention, and review-request requirements can vary by location, business type, and customer relationship.

Revilope’s features do not replace your responsibility to understand and follow the rules that apply to your business.

Consult a qualified professional when you need legal advice about:

Customer consent.
Electronic messaging.
Privacy notices.
Data retention.
Industry-specific confidentiality requirements.
Cross-border customer data.

Businesses Handling Sensitive Information

Businesses in sensitive industries should be especially careful about what appears in email headers and customer records.

This may include:

Medical and health providers.
Legal services.
Financial services.
Schools and youth programs.
Government contractors.
Social services.

Revilope’s header-only processing reduces the amount of email content used, but email headers can still contain personal information.

Use general subject lines and avoid sensitive display names.

Use clearly named saved contacts to reduce the risk of selecting the wrong business or location.

Do Not Submit Highly Sensitive Information

Do not place the following information into Revilope forms, templates, support messages, or email headers unless it is strictly required and appropriate:

Passwords.
Authentication codes.
Payment card numbers.
Card security codes.
Banking passwords.
Government identification numbers.
Medical diagnoses.
Detailed legal records.
Private information about minors.
Complete customer databases.

Use the Minimum Information Required

For a standard manual review request, Revilope needs the customer email address.

It does not need:

The customer’s complete profile.
The customer’s transaction history.
The amount the customer spent.
The products purchased.
The customer’s payment method.
The customer’s private notes.

Providing less unnecessary information reduces privacy risk.

Secure Your Revilope Account

Your Revilope account provides access to business settings, private BCC addresses, Save Contact, authorized senders, Activity, and subscription information.

Protect it by:

Using a strong and unique password.
Protecting the account email.
Not sharing the password.
Signing out on shared devices.
Reviewing unexpected Activity.
Removing former employees from authorized senders.
Changing credentials after a suspected compromise.

Secure Your Business Email and Contacts Accounts

An authorized sender can trigger BCC review requests for the connected business.

A contacts account may also store the complete private Revilope address.

Protect every authorized email and contacts account by:

Using a strong password.
Enabling multi-factor authentication when available.
Reviewing account forwarding rules.
Removing access from former employees.
Checking for unfamiliar login activity.
Protecting shared mailbox access.
Protecting shared address-book access.
Removing outdated Revilope contacts.

Former Employees and Contractors

When someone no longer needs access:

Remove their email address from authorized senders.
Change shared passwords they may know.
Review recent Revilope Activity.
Remove private BCC addresses and saved Revilope contacts from their email accounts where possible.
Remove the contact from shared address books they should no longer access.
Remove the private address from templates and reusable drafts.
Review the business reply-to address.
Review the Revilope account password if it was shared.

Suspected Account Compromise

If you believe your Revilope account, authorized sender, or shared contacts account was compromised:

Change the affected email or contacts-account password.
Change the Revilope password.
Sign out active sessions.
Review multi-factor authentication.
Pause affected businesses.
Review recent Activity.
Remove unfamiliar authorized senders.
Review who can access the saved Revilope contact.
Remove public or unauthorized copies of the contact file.
Review account and billing information.
Contact Revilope support.

Support and Customer Information

When contacting support, provide only the information needed to investigate the issue.

Useful information may include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The request source.
The Activity status.
The approximate request date and time.
The sender address used for a BCC request.
Whether the issue involves Save Contact or a saved contact.
The email or contacts application being used.
A description of what occurred.

Do not send:

Your Revilope password.
Your email password.
Complete payment-card information.
Authentication codes.
Verification tokens.
Private BCC addresses unless specifically requested through an appropriate support process.
Downloaded contact files containing private BCC addresses.
Complete customer lists.
Original emails containing sensitive customer content.
Unnecessary attachments.

Common Privacy Questions

Does Revilope Read My Original Email?

Revilope processes the header information required for the BCC workflow. It does not retrieve or use the original email body or attachments to create the review request.

Does Revilope Forward My Original Email?

No. The review request is a separate email generated from the business template saved in Revilope.

Are Attachments Included in the Review Request?

No. Original attachments are not copied into the later review-request email.

Does Revilope Store the Complete Customer Email Address?

The customer address required for request processing is stored in encrypted form using AES-256-GCM. A separate protected comparison value is used for duplicate, cooldown, and suppression checks.

Why Is the Customer Address Masked in Activity?

Masking reduces unnecessary exposure of the complete customer address while still helping you identify the request.

Does Save Contact Give Revilope Access to My Contacts?

No. Save Contact does not give Revilope access to your complete address book or device contacts.

The contact is saved or imported through your browser, device, email provider, or contacts application.

Is the Saved Revilope Contact Private?

Yes. The saved contact contains the complete private BCC address and should be available only to approved staff.

Can I Share the Contact File With Staff?

Share it only with approved staff who need to trigger review requests for that business.

Do not publish it publicly or distribute it to unrelated people.

Can I Change the Contact Name?

Yes. You may change the visible contact name so the business or location is easier to identify.

Do not change the private email address stored inside the contact.

Does Deleting a Business Remove the Saved Contact?

No. Deleting a business from Revilope does not automatically remove the contact from Gmail, Outlook, Apple Contacts, staff devices, or other address books.

Remove the old contact manually.

Does Revilope Know What the Customer Wrote in a Google Review?

No. Revilope does not currently monitor completed Google reviews or receive the customer’s review text through the standard workflow.

Does Revilope Know Whether the Customer Clicked the Button?

No. Revilope does not currently provide review-button click tracking.

Does Revilope Know Whether the Customer Opened the Email?

No. Revilope does not currently provide review-request open tracking.

Does Deleting Activity Remove an Unsubscribe?

No. Removing a visible Activity record does not necessarily remove the protected suppression record.

Does Cancelling My Subscription Delete Everything?

Not necessarily. Limited billing, security, suppression, duplicate-protection, and legal records may need to be retained.

Can Revilope Access My Whole Email Inbox?

The Revilope BCC workflow uses the dedicated inbound mailbox that receives private Revilope BCC copies. It does not require access to your complete business email inbox.

Does Revilope Need My Business Email Password?

No. Do not send your business email password to Revilope support.

Does Revilope Need Access to My Google Business Profile?

No. You provide the Google review link. Revilope does not currently require Google Business Profile management access.

Troubleshooting Privacy Concerns

A Sensitive Subject Was Sent to Revilope

The subject line is part of the message header and may have been processed.

Update your business email process so future subjects do not contain sensitive information.

Contact Revilope support when the subject contained information that requires further review.

A Sensitive Attachment Was Included

Revilope does not retrieve or use original attachments for the review-request workflow.

The attachment may still exist in:

Your Sent folder.
The customer’s inbox.
Your email provider’s systems.
Your business records.

Manage those copies through the applicable email or business system.

The Full Customer Address Appears Somewhere Unexpected

Confirm whether the address appears in:

Your original sent email.
Your email provider.
A manual request submission result.
A browser form field.
The masked Revilope Activity list.

Contact Revilope support if the complete address appears in an area where you expected masking.

A Customer Asks Why They Received the Request

Explain that the business used Revilope to send a follow-up review request after a genuine customer interaction.

Confirm the correct business and customer record before responding.

Direct the customer to the unsubscribe option when they do not want future review requests from the business.

A Customer Asks to Be Removed

Do not submit the customer again.

Ask the customer to use the unsubscribe link or record the direct opt-out request in your own system.

Cancel pending requests where possible and contact Revilope support when assistance is required.

The Private BCC Address or Contact File Was Published

Pause the business, review Activity, secure authorized sender accounts, remove public copies of the address or file, and contact Revilope support.

A Saved Contact Was Shared With the Wrong Person

Ask the recipient to delete the contact and any downloaded contact file.

Review whether the person is listed as an authorized sender.

Pause the business and contact support when unauthorized use may have occurred.

The Saved Contact Uses the Wrong Business

Delete or correct the saved contact in every affected email or contacts account.

Use Save Contact from the correct business card.

Review recent Activity for requests connected to the wrong business or location.

An Old Contact Is Still Being Used After Business Deletion

Remove the old contact from:

Staff contacts.
Shared address books.
Autocomplete suggestions.
Email templates.
Reusable drafts.
Third-party systems.

Use Save Contact on the current business card to save the active private address.

An Unknown Sender Appears in Activity

Review the business’s authorized sender list immediately.

Remove unfamiliar senders, pause the business when necessary, and secure the related email accounts.

Also review who has access to the saved BCC contact.

A Request Was Sent to the Wrong Customer

If the request is still Scheduled, cancel it immediately where possible.

If it already reached Sent, it cannot be recalled through Revilope.

Review the source of the incorrect address and update your internal process.

Contact support when the request involved sensitive or unexpected information.

A Request Was Sent Using the Wrong Business

Pause the affected business when necessary.

Review:

The private BCC address used.
The saved contact selected.
The private address stored inside that contact.
The business selected for a manual request.
The Google review link.
The reply-to address.
The customer list.

Correct the business configuration and saved contacts, then send a test before resuming.

Privacy Best Practices

Keep sensitive information out of email subjects.
Keep sensitive information out of sender and recipient display names.
Submit only the customer email address required for a manual request.
Do not send complete customer lists to support.
Keep private BCC addresses confidential.
Keep downloaded contact files confidential.
Save contacts only for approved staff.
Use clear business and location names for saved contacts.
Do not edit the private address inside a saved contact.
Remove saved contacts when staff access ends.
Remove old contacts after deleting or recreating a business.
Use strong passwords for Revilope, authorized sender, and contacts accounts.
Remove former employees promptly.
Review unexpected Activity.
Respect customer unsubscribes.
Do not delete Activity expecting suppression to disappear.
Use the correct business, contact, and customer address.
Consult a qualified professional for legal or industry-specific privacy requirements.

Privacy and Email Processing Checklist

The business understands that Revilope processes email headers rather than the email body.
Staff know that the subject line is part of the header.
Sensitive information is not placed in subjects or display names.
Original attachments are not expected to appear in review requests.
Manual submissions contain only required customer email addresses.
Customer addresses are masked in Activity.
Private BCC addresses are not publicly shared.
Downloaded contact files are not publicly shared.
Saved contacts are available only to approved staff.
Each saved contact clearly identifies the correct business or location.
The private address inside each contact has not been edited.
Former staff no longer have access to saved Revilope contacts.
Deleted business contacts have been removed from staff systems.
Authorized sender accounts are secured.
Contacts and address-book accounts are secured.
Customer unsubscribes are respected.
Staff understand that Revilope does not track opens, clicks, or completed reviews.
Account access is limited to trusted users.
Support messages do not contain passwords, contact files, or unnecessary customer information.

You Are Ready to Continue When

You understand what Revilope reads from a BCC email.
You understand that Revilope does not retrieve the original body or attachments for the workflow.
You understand that the subject line is part of the email header.
You understand how customer email addresses are encrypted and masked.
You understand why duplicate and suppression information may be retained.
You know that Revilope does not track opens, clicks, or completed Google reviews.
You know how to protect private BCC addresses and authorized sender accounts.
You understand that Save Contact does not give Revilope access to your address book.
You know that downloaded contact files contain the private BCC address.
You know how to remove saved contacts when staff access ends or a business is deleted.
You know what information should not be sent to support.

Next Step

Continue to the Best Practices section for recommendations on choosing the right trigger email, improving request timing, training staff, protecting deliverability, and creating a consistent customer experience.

Need Help With Privacy or Email Processing?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The request source.
The approximate date and time.
The status shown in Activity.
Whether the issue involves a saved contact or downloaded contact file.
The email or contacts application being used when relevant.
A clear description of the privacy or processing concern.

Do not send your Revilope password, email password, authentication codes, complete payment-card information, private BCC address, downloaded contact file, unsubscribe link, verification token, complete customer list, original sensitive email body, or unnecessary attachments.

Best Practices

Revilope works best when review requests are sent at a natural point in the customer journey, use clear and honest wording, and are monitored through Activity.

The goal is not to send the largest possible number of requests. The goal is to create a consistent process that contacts genuine customers at an appropriate time without confusing, pressuring, or repeatedly messaging them.

The following practices can help improve your workflow, protect your business reputation, reduce unnecessary request failures, and create a better experience for customers.

Choose One Clear Trigger Point

Select one specific customer email that should trigger the review request.

Good trigger points include:

A final receipt.
A completed-service confirmation.
A project completion email.
An appointment follow-up.
An order pickup confirmation.
A delivery confirmation.
A final invoice sent after the work is complete.
A closing thank-you message.
A resolved customer-support conversation.

Do not add Revilope to every email in a customer conversation.

Choose one message that clearly represents the end of the experience or a point when the customer has enough information to provide meaningful feedback.

Do Not Trigger Requests Too Early

A customer should not receive a review request before the experience is complete.

Avoid triggering a request from:

An appointment confirmation.
A quote.
An estimate.
A deposit request.
An order confirmation sent before delivery.
A registration confirmation sent before the program begins.
An invoice sent before the work is finished.
A reminder sent before the service takes place.

Customers should have enough time to evaluate the service, product, appointment, or transaction before being asked to review it.

Do Not Wait Too Long

A request should arrive while the customer still remembers the experience clearly.

Waiting too long can cause the request to:

Feel unrelated to the original interaction.
Be ignored.
Confuse the customer.
Produce less detailed feedback.
Arrive after another unrelated customer experience.

Use the shortest delay that still gives the customer enough time to evaluate the experience.

Start With a 24-Hour Delay When Unsure

A 24-hour delay is a practical starting point for many businesses.

It gives the customer time to finish the experience while keeping the interaction recent.

It also tends to send the review request at approximately the same time of day as the original customer email.

Consider a shorter delay when the experience is brief and fully complete.

Consider a longer delay when the customer needs time to evaluate the result.

Review When Your Staff Normally Sends Emails

The follow-up delay is added to the time Revilope creates the request.

A short delay may create inconvenient delivery times when staff send emails late in the day.

For example:

A 4-hour delay from 6:00 p.m. creates a request due at approximately 10:00 p.m.
A 12-hour delay from 4:00 p.m. creates a request due at approximately 4:00 a.m.
A 24-hour delay from 3:00 p.m. creates a request due at approximately 3:00 p.m. the following day.

Review your normal customer-email schedule before selecting a short follow-up delay.

Consider the Customer’s Timezone

Revilope displays times using the timezone selected in your account.

The customer may live in another timezone.

When serving customers across several regions, consider whether a request could arrive very early in the morning or late at night.

Revilope currently uses relative delays rather than a separate timezone for each customer.

Use the Correct Business for Every Customer

Every Revilope business has its own:

Private BCC address.
Saved BCC contact.
Business name.
Google review link.
Review-request template.
Reply-to address.
Mailing address.
Authorized senders.
Follow-up delay.

Using the wrong business can direct the customer to the wrong Google Business Profile.

Before sending, confirm:

The customer visited or used the selected business.
The correct location is selected.
The correct saved Revilope contact is being used.
The complete private BCC address appears in the BCC field.
The correct manual request form is being used.

Give Every Business a Clear Name

When managing several locations or brands, include the location or distinguishing information in the Revilope business name.

Recommended examples include:

Greenway Dental – Mississauga
Greenway Dental – Oakville
Northside Auto Repair – Downtown
Northside Auto Repair – West End

Clear names reduce errors when staff save contacts, select BCC contacts, create manual requests, or review Activity.

Use Save Contact for Regular BCC Use

Each business card includes a Save Contact button next to Edit.

Use Save Contact to save the complete private Revilope BCC address in the email or contacts account used by your staff.

This is the recommended workflow because staff do not need to remember, manually type, or repeatedly copy the private address.

How to Save the Contact

Open the Revilope dashboard.
Find the correct business.
Select Save Contact.
Open the contact file or contact prompt provided by the browser or device.
Review the contact name.
Confirm that the complete private Revilope address is included.
Save or import the contact into the account used for customer emails.
Open a new email.
Open the BCC field.
Begin typing the saved contact name.
Select the correct business contact.
Confirm that the complete private address appears.

The exact saving process may vary by email provider, device, browser, and contacts application.

Save BCC Contacts With Clear Labels

Use a clear contact name that identifies the business and location.

Recommended examples include:

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Oakville
Revilope BCC – Northside Auto Repair Downtown
Revilope Reviews – Northside Auto Repair West End

Do not use one generic label such as:

Revilope

A generic contact name makes it easier for staff to select the wrong business.

Contact names should be understandable even when the employee does not have the Revilope dashboard open.

Save the Contact in the Correct Account

Save the contact in the email or contacts account used by the verified authorized sender.

A contact saved in one Google, Microsoft, Apple, device, or business account may not automatically appear in another.

If several employees send customer emails, each employee may need to use Save Contact or import the contact separately.

Test the saved contact in the BCC field before relying on it for live customer emails.

Do Not Edit the Private Address

You may rename the visible contact, but do not change the private Revilope email address stored inside it.

Do not:

Shorten the address.
Remove characters.
Change the text after the plus sign.
Add spaces.
Replace the domain.
Create a more memorable version yourself.

Changing any part of the address may prevent Revilope from identifying the correct business.

Use the Copy Icon When Needed

The copy icon remains useful when:

You have not saved the contact yet.
The saved contact is not appearing.
You are completing a controlled test.
You are temporarily using another approved email account.
You need to compare the saved address with the business card.

Copy the private BCC address from the business card instead of typing it manually.

This reduces the chance of:

A missing character.
An incorrect domain.
An accidental space.
Using the address for another business.

Keep the Private BCC Address and Contact Confidential

Your private Revilope BCC address should be used only by approved staff and systems.

The saved contact and any downloaded contact file contain the complete private address and should also be kept confidential.

Do not:

Publish the address on your website.
Publish or publicly share the contact file.
Post it on social media.
Add it to a public directory.
Use it as a customer-support address.
Subscribe it to newsletters.
Include it in public instructions.
Share it with unrelated businesses.
Send it to customers as a contact address.

If the address or contact file may have been exposed, pause the business, review Activity, and contact Revilope support.

Send to One Customer at a Time Through BCC

BCC Review Automation is designed for one original email sent directly to one customer.

The recommended structure is:

One customer in To.
No additional customers in CC.
The saved Revilope contact in BCC.

Do not place several customers in To or CC.

Use Manual Review Requests when you need to submit several eligible customer addresses.

Place Revilope Only in BCC

Do not place the private Revilope address or saved contact in To or CC.

Placing it in To may prevent Revilope from identifying the customer correctly.

Placing it in CC may expose the private address to the customer.

Confirm the Saved Contact Before Sending

Before sending a live customer email, confirm:

The saved contact name matches the intended business.
The location name is correct.
The complete private address appears in BCC.
The contact has not been manually edited.
An old contact from a deleted business was not selected.

This is especially important when the email application displays only the contact name and hides the full address.

Confirm the Actual From Address

The original BCC email must come from a verified authorized sender.

Check the actual From address before sending.

Aliases, shared mailboxes, delegated accounts, and third-party platforms may use a technical sender that differs from the address displayed in the email application.

Test each sender configuration before depending on it for live requests.

Verify Every Sender Before Staff Use It

Do not allow a staff member to begin using the saved Revilope contact until their sending address has been added and verified for the correct business.

A verified sender for one business is not automatically authorized for another business.

Review authorized senders when:

A new employee joins.
A shared mailbox is created.
The business changes domains.
An employee leaves.
An inbox is retired.
A contractor’s access ends.

Saving the contact does not authorize the employee. The sending address must still be verified.

Test Shared Mailboxes and Aliases

Shared mailboxes and aliases can behave differently depending on the email provider.

A message may be sent:

Directly from the shared mailbox.
On behalf of the shared mailbox.
From the employee’s personal business address.

Send a controlled BCC test from every method staff will use and review the result in Activity.

Also confirm that the saved Revilope contact appears in the contacts account connected to the shared mailbox workflow.

Be Careful With Third-Party Email Platforms

Invoicing systems, booking platforms, support desks, website forms, and customer-management systems may change the technical sender or classify the message as automated or bulk.

A third-party system may use:

A provider-owned sender.
A no-reply address.
A bounce-management address.
Your business address only as the reply-to address.

A saved Revilope contact does not guarantee that the third-party platform will preserve the BCC recipient or send from the verified address.

Do not assume a third-party platform is compatible with BCC automation until you have tested it.

Direct emails from a verified business mailbox provide the most predictable workflow.

Do Not Use BCC Automation for Newsletters

Revilope BCC automation is not designed for bulk email campaigns.

Do not add the saved Revilope contact to:

Newsletters.
Promotional campaigns.
Mailing-list broadcasts.
Cold outreach.
Purchased contact lists.
Automated marketing sequences.
Mass customer announcements.

Use Manual Requests for Eligible Customer Lists

Use Manual Review Requests when you have several genuine customer email addresses and no original email to send through BCC.

Before submitting a list:

Confirm that every person is a genuine customer.
Remove duplicate addresses.
Remove staff and business addresses.
Remove customers who already received a request.
Remove customers who asked not to be contacted.
Confirm that every customer belongs to the selected business.
Check your remaining request allowance.
Submit a smaller batch first when appropriate.

Enter One Manual Address Per Line

Revilope can accept addresses separated by commas, semicolons, spaces, or new lines.

Entering one customer address per line is usually the easiest format to review.

Example:

customer1@example.com

customer2@example.com

customer3@example.com

This makes spelling errors and duplicates easier to notice before submission.

Do Not Paste Unnecessary Customer Data

The standard Manual Review Requests field requires customer email addresses.

Do not paste:

Customer names.
Phone numbers.
Mailing addresses.
Order details.
Payment information.
Medical information.
Private notes.
Complete spreadsheet rows.

Use only the information required to create the request.

Send Only to Genuine Customers

Review requests should be sent only to people who had a real experience with the business.

Do not submit:

Purchased email lists.
Scraped addresses.
Unrelated prospects.
Employees who did not have a genuine customer experience.
Friends or relatives who were not customers.
Fake or temporary accounts.

Ask for Honest Feedback

Your message should invite the customer to share an honest review.

Recommended wording includes:

If you have a moment, we would appreciate your honest feedback about your experience.

Another suitable example is:

Your feedback helps us understand what we are doing well and where we can improve.

Use neutral wording that allows customers to share their genuine experience.

Do Not Ask for a Specific Rating

Avoid language such as:

Please leave us five stars.
Give us a positive review.
Only review us if you were satisfied.
Help us maintain our five-star rating.
We need a five-star review.

Customers should decide what rating and comments accurately reflect their experience.

Do Not Use Review Gating

Do not separate customers based on whether they appear satisfied before showing the Google review option.

Do not:

Send satisfied customers to Google while directing dissatisfied customers elsewhere.
Hide the review link from customers who express concerns.
Ask customers to rate the experience privately before deciding whether they may review publicly.
Request public feedback only from customers expected to leave a positive review.

Revilope’s standard review button should direct eligible customers to the Google review link supplied by the business.

Do Not Offer Incentives

Do not offer a reward in exchange for a review.

Avoid offers such as:

Discounts.
Gift cards.
Contest entries.
Free products.
Refunds.
Loyalty points.
Special treatment.

Do not offer a benefit for changing or removing a negative review.

Do Not Write the Review for the Customer

Do not provide text for the customer to copy and paste as their review.

Avoid including:

Prewritten review paragraphs.
Suggested five-star statements.
Instructions to mention specific keywords.
Scripts that describe an experience the customer did not write themselves.

The customer should write the review in their own words.

Keep the Message Short

A review request should be easy to understand quickly.

A practical structure is:

Thank the customer.
Identify the business.
Ask for honest feedback.
Explain briefly why feedback is useful.
Show the review button.
Close with the owner or representative name when appropriate.

Avoid adding unrelated promotions, long company histories, several calls to action, or excessive legal language to the main message.

Use a Clear Subject Line

The subject should tell the customer what the email is about.

Suitable examples include:

How was your experience with Greenway Dental?
We would appreciate your feedback
Share your experience with Northside Auto Repair
Thank you for choosing Greenway Dental

Avoid:

Excessive capitalization.
Repeated exclamation marks.
False urgency.
Misleading payment warnings.
Security-style warnings.
A promise of a reward.

Keep Sensitive Information Out of the Subject

The subject line is part of the email header and may be processed by Revilope.

Do not include:

Medical diagnoses.
Payment card numbers.
Bank details.
Government identification numbers.
Private legal information.
Sensitive information about minors.

Use a general customer-friendly subject instead.

Use the Supported Placeholders Correctly

Supported placeholders include:

{business_name}
{owner_name}
{business_website}
{review_button}

Enter each placeholder exactly as shown.

Do not change the spelling, brackets, capitalization, or underscores.

Send a new test after adding or changing placeholders.

Always Include the Review Button

Your review-request template should include:

{review_button}

Without this placeholder, the main review button may not appear.

Place the button after the main request text so the customer understands what will happen when they select it.

Use Clear Button Text

Recommended button text includes:

Leave a Review
Share Your Feedback
Review Us on Google
Write a Review

Avoid vague button text such as:

Click Here
Continue
Submit
Learn More

Test the Google Review Link in a Private Browser

Open the review button from a test email in a private or incognito browser window.

Confirm that:

The correct business appears.
The correct location appears.
The customer is given a clear way to leave a review.
The link does not open a general Google search.
The link does not open another business.
The link does not require access to your private business-management account.

Google may require the customer to sign in before submitting a review.

Send a Test After Every Important Change

Send a test email after changing:

The business name.
The owner or representative name.
The subject line.
The message.
The review button text.
The Google review link.
The reply-to address.
The business website.
The mailing address.

Test emails do not count toward the monthly request allowance.

Review Saved Contacts After Business Changes

Changing the business name, location, or brand in Revilope may not automatically rename contacts already saved in Gmail, Outlook, Apple Contacts, or another address book.

After a business-name or location change:

Update the business in Revilope.
Open the existing saved contact.
Rename the contact to match the new business or location.
Do not change the private email address.
Notify staff who use the contact.

You may also delete the old contact and use Save Contact again.

Replace Contacts After Deleting and Recreating a Business

A recreated business may receive a different private BCC address.

Do not continue using the contact saved for the deleted business.

After recreating a business:

Remove the old contact from staff address books.
Remove the old address from reusable drafts and templates.
Use Save Contact on the new business card.
Save the new contact under a clear business or location name.
Send a controlled BCC test.
Confirm the result in Activity.

Review Tests on Desktop and Mobile

Open the test email on a desktop computer and a mobile device.

Check:

Subject clarity.
Paragraph spacing.
Button visibility.
Button size.
Link behaviour.
Business information.
Footer information.
Overall message length.

Email applications may display fonts, spacing, and button shapes differently.

Focus on whether the message remains clear, readable, and functional.

Test the Reply-To Address

Reply to the test email and confirm that the response is addressed to the correct business inbox.

Use a reply-to inbox that:

Is actively monitored.
Belongs to the correct business.
Can receive external email.
Is appropriate for customer questions and concerns.

Do not use an abandoned employee inbox, private Revilope BCC address, or saved Revilope contact as the reply-to address.

Use an Accurate Mailing Address

Review the business mailing address shown in the email footer.

Include the appropriate:

Street address.
Unit or suite number.
City.
Province or state.
Postal code or ZIP code.
Country when appropriate.

Update the address after a business move and send a new test.

Review Activity After Your First Requests

Check Activity after:

Your first BCC request.
Your first manual request.
Saving and testing a new BCC contact.
Adding a new sender.
Testing an alias.
Testing a shared mailbox.
Changing a third-party email system.
Submitting a manual batch.
Resuming a paused business.

Do not assume a request was accepted because the original email was sent successfully.

Understand the Status Before Resubmitting

Review the request status before creating another request.

Examples include:

Scheduled means the request is waiting for its sending time.
Sending means Revilope is currently processing it.
Sent means the mail system accepted it for sending.
Failed means the outgoing handoff could not be completed after the available attempts.
Skipped Duplicate means another request already exists or was too recent.
Suppressed means the customer is blocked from receiving the request.
Unauthorized Sender means the BCC email came from an unverified sender.
Invalid Recipient means Revilope could not accept one eligible customer.
Plan Limit means there was not enough available capacity.

Do not repeatedly resubmit customers without understanding the previous result.

Respect Duplicate Protection

Duplicate Protection helps prevent repeated requests.

Do not attempt to bypass it by:

Changing email capitalization.
Adding spaces.
Using plus-address variations.
Using another known address for the same customer.
Deleting Activity records.
Creating duplicate business profiles.
Using another Revilope account.

A Skipped Duplicate result normally means the protection worked as intended.

Respect the Customer Cooldown

The standard cooldown is approximately 90 days per customer and business.

The cooldown is a minimum protection, not a recommendation to contact every customer again as soon as 90 days have passed.

Before requesting another review from a repeat customer, consider:

Whether the customer had a new and meaningful experience.
Whether the customer already reviewed the business.
Whether another request would feel excessive.
Whether enough time has passed.

Respect Every Unsubscribe

A customer who unsubscribes should not receive another Revilope review request from that business.

Do not attempt to bypass suppression by:

Using another sender.
Using Manual Review Requests.
Using another customer email address.
Using another location for the same experience.
Creating another business profile.
Creating another account.

Remove known unsubscribed customers from future source lists.

Record Direct Opt-Out Requests

A customer may reply to the business and ask not to receive more review requests.

When this happens:

Record the request in your own customer records.
Do not submit the customer again.
Review Activity for pending requests.
Cancel pending requests where possible.
Contact Revilope support when assistance is needed.

Monitor Monthly Usage

Review your available request allowance before:

Submitting a large manual batch.
Launching a new location.
Adding several staff senders.
Entering a busy season.
Changing your normal trigger email.

Remember that Scheduled requests reserve capacity before they are sent.

Submit Smaller Manual Batches First

When working with a large customer list, submit a smaller initial batch.

This allows you to confirm:

The correct business is selected.
The template is correct.
The Google review link is correct.
The sending option is correct.
The requests appear in Activity.
The account has enough capacity.

Review the result before submitting the rest of the list.

Train Staff Before Giving Them the Saved Contact

Every staff member using Revilope should understand:

Which customer email should trigger the request.
Which saved Revilope contact belongs to each business.
That the contact should be selected only in BCC.
That one customer should be placed in To.
That the sending address must be verified.
That Revilope should not be added to newsletters or bulk emails.
That the complete private address inside the contact must not be edited.
That customers who unsubscribe must not be resubmitted.
That Activity should be checked when a request is questioned.
That saved contacts and contact files must remain confidential.

Create a Simple Internal Rule

A clear internal rule reduces inconsistent use.

For example:

Add the saved Greenway Dental Revilope contact to BCC only on the final receipt email sent after the customer’s appointment is complete.

Another example:

Add the saved Northside Auto Repair Revilope contact to BCC only on the completed-service email sent when the customer picks up the vehicle.

Document Which Business Each Sender Uses

When staff manage several locations, maintain a simple internal reference showing:

The business name.
The location.
The approved sender.
The saved BCC contact name.
The selected trigger email.

Do not place the private BCC address or downloaded contact file in public or broadly shared documents.

Review Authorized Senders and Contact Access Regularly

Review the sender list and saved-contact access at regular intervals.

Remove:

Former employees.
Former contractors.
Retired inboxes.
Unused aliases.
Incorrect pending addresses.

Also remove saved Revilope contacts from:

Former employee accounts.
Retired shared mailboxes.
Unused devices.
Old address books.
Outdated email templates.

Keep only the senders and staff contacts that actively need to trigger BCC requests.

Pause a Business During Major Changes

Pause a business when live requests should stop during a major correction or transition.

Examples include:

An incorrect Google review link.
A misleading template.
A location move.
A rebrand.
A change of ownership.
A compromised sender account.
A possibly exposed private BCC address or contact file.
Unexpected request activity.

Remember that pausing cancels pending requests and releases eligible reserved capacity.

Cancelled requests do not automatically return when the business is resumed.

Test Before Resuming a Business

Before resuming:

Review the business name.
Review the Google review link.
Review the message and subject.
Review the reply-to address.
Review the mailing address.
Review the authorized senders.
Review the follow-up delay.
Review the saved BCC contact used by staff.
Confirm that the contact name identifies the correct business.
Confirm that the private address inside the contact is unchanged.
Send a test email.
Test the review button.
Resume the business.
Create a controlled BCC request.
Check Activity.

Protect Your Revilope Account

Use a strong and unique password for Revilope.

Do not share the account password through:

Email.
Text messages.
Shared documents.
Unsecured team chats.
Support requests.

Sign out after using Revilope on a shared computer.

Protect Authorized Sender and Contacts Accounts

An authorized sender can trigger review requests for the connected business.

A contacts account may also store the complete private Revilope address.

Protect each email and contacts account by:

Using a unique password.
Enabling multi-factor authentication when available.
Reviewing forwarding rules.
Removing former employee access.
Reviewing unfamiliar login activity.
Securing shared mailbox permissions.
Securing shared address-book permissions.
Removing old or unused Revilope contacts.

Use Neutral, Professional Language

The email should sound like a genuine customer follow-up.

Avoid:

Excessive excitement.
Pressure.
Guilt-based language.
Threats.
False urgency.
Repeated calls to action.
Overly promotional language.

The customer should understand who is contacting them, why they are receiving the message, and what the review button does.

Do Not Promise That a Review Will Be Published

Google controls its review platform.

Revilope cannot guarantee that:

The customer can submit a review without signing in.
Google will publish the review.
The review will remain visible.
The review will appear immediately.

Do Not Treat Sent as Delivered

Sent means the outgoing mail system accepted the request for sending.

It does not confirm:

Inbox delivery.
That the email avoided spam.
That the customer opened it.
That the customer clicked the review button.
That the customer completed a review.

Do Not Promise Review Tracking

Revilope does not currently provide:

Email open tracking.
Review-button click tracking.
Completed-review tracking.
Google review monitoring.

Do not tell staff or clients that Revilope confirms completed reviews.

Do Not Repeatedly Resend Because a Customer Did Not Review

A customer may choose not to leave a review.

Do not create repeated requests because:

The customer did not reply.
The customer did not mention receiving the email.
No new Google review appeared.
The business cannot confirm whether the email was opened.

Respect Duplicate Protection, cooldown rules, and customer choice.

Keep Customer Information Out of Templates

The business email template may be used for many customers.

Do not place customer-specific information inside the business-level template.

Avoid adding:

A customer’s name.
An invoice number.
A service detail.
An appointment date.
A payment amount.
Private notes.

Use only supported business-level placeholders.

Keep Sensitive Information Out of Support Messages

When contacting support, provide only what is needed to investigate the issue.

Useful details include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The request source.
The Activity status.
The approximate date and time.
The sender used for a BCC request.
Whether a saved contact was used.
The email or contacts application being used.
A clear description of the problem.

Do not send:

Your Revilope password.
Your email password.
Authentication codes.
Complete payment-card information.
Complete customer lists.
Private BCC addresses unless specifically required through an appropriate support process.
Downloaded contact files containing private BCC addresses.
Sensitive original email bodies.
Unnecessary attachments.

Review Your Workflow Regularly

Review your Revilope setup when:

A new employee starts.
An employee leaves.
The business changes email providers.
The business changes contacts accounts.
The business changes domains.
The business moves.
The business rebrands.
The Google Business Profile changes.
The customer workflow changes.
Requests begin arriving too early or too late.
Unexpected statuses appear in Activity.
A business is deleted and recreated.

Monthly Workflow Review

A useful monthly review may include:

Review the current plan and usage.
Review Activity for Failed requests.
Review Unauthorized Sender results.
Review Invalid Recipient results.
Review Plan Limit results.
Review unusual increases in request volume.
Confirm that authorized senders are current.
Confirm that each business remains active and accurate.
Confirm that saved contact names match the current businesses and locations.
Remove outdated contacts from staff accounts.
Send a test email when important information changed.

Best Practices for Different Business Types

Appointment-Based Businesses

Trigger the request from the post-appointment email rather than the appointment confirmation.

A 12-hour, 24-hour, or 2-day delay may be appropriate depending on the service.

Retail Businesses

Trigger the request after the purchase or pickup is complete.

Allow additional time when the customer needs to use the product before reviewing it.

Home Service Businesses

Trigger the request from the completed-service or final invoice email.

A 24-hour, 2-day, or 3-day delay may give the customer time to evaluate the work.

Automotive Businesses

Trigger the request after vehicle pickup or service completion.

Allow time for the customer to drive the vehicle and assess the result.

Professional Services

Trigger the request after a meaningful milestone or completed service.

Do not trigger from an initial consultation request, quote, or deposit invoice.

Online Orders

Do not trigger the request from the initial order confirmation if the product has not been delivered.

Use a delivery confirmation or later follow-up when available.

Programs and Events

Do not trigger the request from registration confirmation.

Use a completion or post-event email after the customer has experienced the program or event.

Common Mistakes to Avoid

Using the wrong saved Revilope contact.
Using the wrong business BCC address.
Saving several locations under the same generic contact name.
Editing the private address inside a saved contact.
Saving the contact to an account staff do not use.
Continuing to use an old contact after deleting and recreating a business.
Assuming a business-name change automatically renames saved contacts.
Publishing or publicly sharing a downloaded contact file.
Sending from an unverified address.
Placing Revilope in CC instead of BCC.
Including several customers in one BCC-triggered email.
Adding Revilope to every message in a thread.
Triggering requests before the service is complete.
Using newsletters or bulk campaigns.
Submitting purchased or scraped lists.
Asking for five stars.
Offering incentives.
Using review gating.
Resubmitting suppressed customers.
Deleting Activity to bypass cooldowns.
Assuming Sent means a review was completed.
Editing a template without sending a new test.
Changing a delay and expecting existing requests to update.
Ignoring the account timezone.
Submitting a large batch without checking plan usage.

Recommended First-Week Process

Complete one business profile.
Use Save Contact on the business card.
Save the contact in the email account used for customer messages.
Confirm that the contact appears in the BCC field.
Verify one authorized sender.
Send a test email.
Check the Google review button.
Check the reply-to inbox.
Create one controlled BCC request using the saved contact.
Confirm that it appears in Activity.
Confirm that the Scheduled time is correct.
Wait for the request to reach Sent.
Begin using the workflow with a small number of genuine customers.
Review Activity regularly.
Expand the workflow after the process is working correctly.

Recommended Staff Checklist Before Sending

The customer experience is complete.
The email is being sent to one customer.
The customer is in To.
The correct saved Revilope contact is in BCC.
The contact name matches the correct business or location.
The complete private address appears in BCC.
The correct business or location is selected.
The From address is verified.
The customer has not asked to opt out.
This is the selected trigger email.
Revilope has not already been added to another email for the same experience.

Recommended Manager Checklist

Every business has the correct Google review link.
Every business has a tested template.
Every business has a monitored reply-to inbox.
Every business has an accurate mailing address.
Every authorized sender is current.
Save Contact has been used for each business using BCC automation.
Every saved BCC contact has a clear business or location name.
Saved contacts are stored in the correct staff accounts.
The private addresses inside the contacts have not been edited.
Former staff no longer have access to saved contacts.
Deleted business contacts have been removed.
Staff know which email triggers the request.
The account timezone is correct.
The monthly plan fits the normal request volume.
Activity is reviewed regularly.
Suppressed customers are not resubmitted.
Unexpected request volume is investigated.

Deliverability Best Practices

Use a clear and recognizable business name.
Use a monitored reply-to address.
Keep the subject accurate.
Keep the message brief.
Avoid excessive capitalization.
Avoid repeated punctuation.
Avoid misleading urgency.
Avoid unrelated promotional content.
Send only to genuine customers.
Respect unsubscribes.
Avoid excessive repeat requests.

Revilope cannot guarantee inbox placement.

Customer Experience Best Practices

Send the request after the experience is complete.
Use the customer’s correct business or location.
Select the correct saved Revilope contact.
Identify the business clearly.
Ask for honest feedback.
Keep the request easy to read.
Use a clear review button.
Make replies go to a monitored inbox.
Respect the customer’s choice not to review.
Respect every unsubscribe.
Avoid repeated requests.

Security Best Practices

Keep private BCC addresses confidential.
Keep saved contacts and downloaded contact files confidential.
Save contacts only for approved staff.
Protect shared address books.
Use strong and unique passwords.
Protect authorized sender accounts.
Enable multi-factor authentication where available.
Remove former employees promptly.
Remove saved contacts when staff access ends.
Review unfamiliar Activity.
Pause a business during a suspected compromise.
Do not send passwords, contact files, or authentication codes to support.
Keep sensitive information out of email subjects.

Privacy Best Practices

Enter only the customer information needed for the request.
Keep sensitive information out of subjects and display names.
Do not paste complete customer records into Manual Requests.
Do not send complete customer lists to support.
Do not publish private BCC addresses or contact files.
Limit saved-contact access to approved staff.
Limit dashboard access to trusted users.
Respect suppression and unsubscribe records.
Maintain communication preferences in your own business systems.

Complete Best Practices Checklist

One clear trigger email has been selected.
The customer experience is complete before triggering the request.
The follow-up delay is appropriate.
The account timezone is correct.
The correct business and location are used.
Save Contact has been used for each business using BCC automation.
The saved contact clearly identifies the business or location.
The private address inside the contact has not been edited.
The saved contact is stored in the correct staff account.
The private BCC address and contact file are confidential.
The sender is verified.
Only one customer is included in a BCC-triggered email.
The template asks for honest feedback.
The template does not request five stars.
No incentive is offered.
No review gating is used.
The Google review link has been tested.
The reply-to inbox is monitored.
The mailing address is accurate.
The template has been tested on desktop and mobile.
Activity is reviewed regularly.
Duplicate results are respected.
Suppressed customers are not resubmitted.
Monthly usage is monitored.
Staff understand the workflow.
Authorized sender and contacts accounts are secured.
Old contacts are removed after staff departures or business deletion.

You Are Ready to Continue When

You have selected one clear trigger point for each business.
Your delay matches the customer experience.
Your email template is neutral, clear, and tested.
Your Google review link works.
Your authorized senders are verified.
Each business has a clearly named saved Revilope contact.
Your staff know how to select the correct contact in BCC.
Your staff understand when and how to use BCC automation.
You understand how to review Activity.
You respect duplicate protection, cooldowns, and unsubscribes.
You monitor usage, saved-contact access, and account security.

Next Step

Continue to the Troubleshooting section for step-by-step help with missing BCC requests, saved-contact problems, unauthorized senders, invalid recipients, delayed schedules, failed emails, incorrect links, and account issues.

Need Help Improving Your Workflow?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The type of customer email being used as the trigger.
The current follow-up delay.
The sender address.
Whether a saved contact was used.
The email or contacts application being used when relevant.
The request status shown in Activity.
A clear description of the workflow question.

Do not send your Revilope password, email password, authentication codes, complete payment-card information, complete customer lists, private customer records, private BCC addresses, downloaded contact files, or unnecessary sensitive information.

Troubleshooting

Use this section when a Revilope request does not behave as expected.

Most issues can be identified by checking the business configuration, the authorized sender, the customer recipient, the private BCC address, the saved Revilope contact, the selected timezone, the current plan usage, and the status shown in Activity.

Before creating another request, review the existing request carefully. Repeatedly resubmitting the same customer can create confusion and may result in additional duplicate, cooldown, or suppression records.

Start With These Basic Checks

Complete these checks before investigating a specific error:

Confirm that you are signed into the correct Revilope account.
Confirm that the correct business is active.
Confirm that the correct saved Revilope contact was selected.
Confirm that the private address inside the contact matches the business card.
Confirm that the private address has not been edited.
Confirm that the original email came from a verified authorized sender.
Confirm that one eligible customer was placed in the To field.
Confirm that the customer was not placed only in BCC.
Confirm that the account has remaining request capacity.
Open Activity and review the request status.
Confirm that the account timezone is correct.
Refresh the dashboard before repeating the request.

A BCC Request Does Not Appear in Activity

If you sent a customer email with Revilope in BCC but no request appears in Activity, check each part of the original email.

Confirm that the original customer email was sent successfully.
Open the sent email and confirm that Revilope was actually included in BCC.
Confirm that the complete private address appears in BCC.
Confirm that the saved contact belongs to the intended business.
Confirm that the address inside the contact matches the address shown on the business card.
Confirm that one customer was entered in the To field.
Confirm that no additional customers were entered in To or CC.
Confirm that the From address is listed as an authorized sender.
Confirm that the authorized sender shows as verified.
Wait several minutes for Revilope to process the inbound email.
Refresh Activity.
Clear unnecessary Activity filters.
Set the date range to include the current date.
Check for a rejected or skipped status rather than only looking for Scheduled.

The request may appear as:

Unauthorized Sender.
Invalid Recipient.
Skipped Duplicate.
Suppressed.
Plan Limit.

The BCC Email Was Sent More Than Several Minutes Ago

If the request still does not appear after a reasonable processing period:

Confirm that the saved contact was placed in BCC rather than To or CC.
Confirm that the private address was not typed manually with an error.
Confirm that the saved contact does not contain a missing character or extra space.
Confirm that your email provider did not remove the BCC recipient.
Confirm that the email was not saved as a draft instead of sent.
Confirm that the message was not recalled or cancelled by your email system.
Check whether the sender used an alias, shared mailbox, or third-party platform.
Use the copy icon on the business card and send a controlled test directly from the verified mailbox.

If a direct test works but the original workflow does not, the problem may be related to the saved contact, email platform, alias, shared mailbox, or automated sending system.

The Save Contact Button Downloads a File

This may be the expected behaviour for your browser or device.

After selecting Save Contact:

Open the downloaded contact file.
Choose the contacts account where it should be saved.
Review the contact name.
Confirm that the complete private Revilope address is included.
Save or import the contact.
Open your email application.
Create a new message.
Open the BCC field.
Begin typing the saved contact name.
Confirm that the correct contact appears.

The exact process may vary by browser, device, email provider, and contacts application.

The Save Contact Button Does Not Respond

Check:

Whether your browser blocked the download.
Whether a download notification appeared.
Whether the contact file was saved to your Downloads folder.
Whether browser pop-ups or downloads are restricted.
Whether the business card finished loading.
Whether your Revilope session expired.

Refresh the dashboard and try Save Contact again.

You can use the copy icon while resolving the Save Contact issue.

The Saved Contact Does Not Appear in the Email Application

Confirm that:

The contact was successfully saved or imported.
It was saved to the correct Google, Microsoft, Apple, device, or business contacts account.
The email application uses the same contacts account.
Contact synchronization is enabled.
The email application has been refreshed or reopened.
The contact was not saved only on another device.
The contact name was not changed to something unexpected.

Try searching the contacts application for:

Revilope.
BCC.
The business name.
The location name.

Use the copy icon on the Revilope business card while resolving the contact issue.

The Saved Contact Appears in Contacts but Not in BCC

The email application may not be using the same address book where the contact was saved.

Check:

The email account currently selected in the compose window.
The contacts account connected to that email account.
Whether contact suggestions are enabled.
Whether the contact was saved locally rather than to the cloud account.
Whether the email application needs to synchronize.

You may also open the contacts application, select the Revilope contact, and confirm that the email address appears correctly.

The Saved Contact Contains the Wrong Business Address

The contact may have been saved from the wrong business card.

Open the saved contact.
Copy or review the email address stored inside it.
Open the intended Revilope business card.
Compare the two addresses.
Delete the incorrect contact when they do not match.
Select Save Contact from the correct business card.
Save the new contact with the complete business or location name.
Send a controlled BCC test.
Check Activity.

The Saved Contact Name Is Misleading

A generic or outdated contact name can cause staff to select the wrong business.

Avoid contact names such as:

Revilope
Reviews
BCC
Main Location

Use a clear name such as:

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Oakville
Revilope BCC – Northside Auto Repair Downtown

You may rename the visible contact without changing the private email address inside it.

The Private Address Inside the Contact Was Edited

Do not attempt to repair or recreate the private address manually.

Delete the edited contact.
Open the correct Revilope business card.
Select Save Contact.
Save or import the new contact.
Confirm that the complete address matches the business card.
Send a controlled BCC test.

Do not:

Shorten the address.
Remove characters.
Change the text after the plus sign.
Add spaces.
Replace the domain.
Create your own variation.

An Old Contact Is Still Being Suggested

Email applications may remember previously used recipient addresses even after a contact is deleted.

Remove the old contact from:

The contacts application.
The email account address book.
The shared company address book.
Autocomplete suggestions when your provider allows it.
Reusable drafts.
Email templates.

Then use Save Contact on the current business card and test the new contact.

The Contact Was Saved to the Wrong Account

A contact saved to one account may not appear when composing from another account.

For example, the contact may have been saved to:

A personal Google account instead of the business Google account.
A personal Microsoft account instead of the company Microsoft account.
The device’s local contacts instead of the cloud address book.
One employee’s account instead of the shared mailbox contacts.

Delete the contact from the incorrect account when appropriate and save or import it into the account used for customer emails.

The Saved Contact Works for One Employee but Not Another

Saved contacts do not necessarily synchronize across separate employee accounts.

Confirm that each employee:

Uses an authorized and verified sending address.
Has saved or imported the correct Revilope contact.
Uses a clear business or location contact name.
Can see the complete private address in BCC.
Has tested the workflow from their own sending method.

A contact saved by one employee may not automatically appear for another employee.

The Request Shows Unauthorized Sender

Unauthorized Sender means Revilope received the BCC email but did not recognize the actual sender as verified for the selected business.

Check:

Open the business in Revilope.
Review the Authorized Senders area.
Confirm that the sender address is listed.
Confirm that its status is Verified rather than Pending.
Confirm that the sender is authorized for the business connected to the saved BCC contact.
Open the original sent email and check the actual From address.
Confirm whether an alias or shared mailbox was used.
Confirm whether a third-party system replaced the sender.
Confirm that the saved contact belongs to the correct business.

The Sender Is Listed but Still Unauthorized

The visible From address may not be the technical sender Revilope receives in the message headers.

This commonly happens with:

Email aliases.
Shared mailboxes.
Delegated sending.
Customer-management systems.
Booking platforms.
Invoice systems.
Website email tools.

Send a direct email from the verified mailbox without using the third-party system and check Activity again.

If the direct message succeeds, review how the external platform constructs its outgoing sender information.

The Sender Is Still Pending

A Pending sender has not completed verification.

Check the sender’s inbox for the verification email.

Also check:

Spam.
Junk.
Promotions.
Quarantine.
Blocked sender rules.

Complete the verification before sending another BCC request.

If the dashboard does not provide a verification resend option, contact hello@revilope.com.

The Sender Was Added to the Wrong Business

Authorized senders are connected to specific businesses.

A sender verified for one business is not automatically verified for another.

Add and verify the sender on the business whose private BCC contact is being used.

The Request Shows Invalid Recipient

Invalid Recipient means Revilope could not identify one eligible customer.

For a BCC Request

Confirm that:

One customer was placed in To.
The customer was not placed only in BCC.
The saved Revilope contact was placed in BCC rather than To.
No additional customers were placed in To or CC.
The customer address was complete.
The customer address did not contain spaces or punctuation errors.
The recipient was not one of your own business addresses.
The recipient was not an authorized sender.
The recipient was not the business reply-to address.
The recipient was not a Revilope system address.

For a Manual Request

Confirm that the address follows a valid format such as:

customer@example.com

Common invalid formats include:

customerexample.com
customer@
@example.com
customer@example
customer example.com

Correct the address before creating another request.

The Request Shows Skipped Duplicate

Skipped Duplicate normally means another request already exists or the customer was contacted recently.

Review Activity for the same customer and business.

Look for:

An existing Scheduled request.
A request currently Sending.
A recently Sent request.
The same BCC email having already been processed.
A previous manual submission.
A request within the standard cooldown period.

Do not resubmit the customer immediately.

Deleting a visible Activity record does not necessarily reset Duplicate Protection or the cooldown.

The Customer Does Not Appear in Recent Activity

Change the Activity date range to a longer period.

Also check:

Earlier Activity pages.
The correct business filter.
Both BCC and Manual request sources.
Scheduled, Sending, Sent, Failed, and Cancelled statuses.

The previous request may be outside the currently selected date range.

The Request Shows Suppressed

Suppressed means the customer is blocked from receiving another review request from that business.

This usually happens because the customer previously unsubscribed.

Do not attempt to bypass suppression by:

Using another sender.
Submitting the customer manually.
Using another customer email address.
Changing capitalization.
Adding spaces.
Creating another business profile.
Creating another Revilope account.

If the customer says the unsubscribe was accidental, contact Revilope support before attempting another request.

The Request Shows Plan Limit

Plan Limit means the request could not be accepted because the account did not have enough available capacity or another plan restriction was reached.

Check:

Your current plan.
Your monthly request usage.
The number of Scheduled requests already reserving capacity.
The number of active and paused businesses.
The number of configured authorized senders.
Your subscription status.

Remember that:

BCC and Manual requests share the same monthly allowance.
Each accepted customer counts as one request.
Scheduled requests reserve capacity before they are sent.
Unused requests do not roll over.

View Revilope Plans and Limits

The Dashboard Appears to Show Requests Remaining

Refresh the dashboard and check whether:

Another user created requests in a different session.
A recent manual batch reserved the remaining capacity.
Scheduled requests are included in the usage total.
The subscription changed plans.
The business exceeds the plan’s business limit.

A Manual Request Was Not Accepted

After submitting manual addresses, review the result shown by the form and Activity.

A manual address may be rejected because it is:

Invalid.
Duplicated in the same submission.
Already scheduled.
Within the cooldown period.
Suppressed.
A business or staff address.
Blocked by the plan limit.

One rejected address does not necessarily prevent the other valid addresses in the submission from being accepted.

Some Manual Addresses Were Accepted and Others Were Rejected

Revilope checks each address separately.

Review the result for:

The number accepted.
The number rejected.
Duplicate entries.
Suppressed customers.
Invalid formats.
Plan Limit results.

Do not submit the complete list again. Resubmitting the entire batch can cause additional duplicate results for addresses that were already accepted.

The Manual Request Was Sent Immediately

The Send as Soon as Possible option may have been selected.

Review the request’s Created and Scheduled times in Activity.

Once the request has already reached Sent, Revilope cannot recall it.

The Manual Request Used the Business Delay

The Use Saved Delay option may have been selected.

Check:

The business’s saved follow-up delay.
The request Created time.
The Scheduled time.
Your account timezone.

A Test Email Does Not Arrive

Test emails are sent to the email address connected to your Revilope account.

They are not sent to:

The authorized sender unless it is also the account email.
The business reply-to address unless it is also the account email.
A customer address.

Check:

Confirm that the business was saved.
Confirm that Send Test reported a successful submission.
Confirm the account email shown in Account Details.
Refresh the inbox.
Check spam.
Check junk.
Check promotions.
Check quarantine.
Search for Revilope.
Allow several minutes for email-provider processing.

The Test Was Marked as Sent but Did Not Arrive

A successful test result means the mail system accepted the message for sending.

It does not guarantee inbox delivery.

The email may have been:

Filtered into spam.
Placed in quarantine.
Delayed by the email provider.
Blocked by an organization’s security system.
Sent to an outdated account email address.

The Test Email Shows Old Content

Possible causes include:

The business was not saved after editing.
You opened an older test email.
You edited another business.
The newest test has not arrived yet.

Return to the business, save the changes, send another test, and compare the date and time of the messages.

A Placeholder Appears as Raw Text

If the email displays text such as {business_name} or {review_button}, Revilope did not recognize the placeholder.

Use only the supported placeholders:

{business_name}
{owner_name}
{business_website}
{review_button}

Confirm that:

The curly brackets are present.
The spelling is exact.
The underscores are present.
The capitalization matches.
No extra spaces were added inside the placeholder.

Save the business and send a new test.

The Review Button Is Missing

Check that the message includes:

{review_button}

Also confirm that:

The placeholder is entered exactly.
The Review Button Text field is not empty.
The Google review link is present.
The Google review link is complete.
The business was saved.
You opened the newest test.

The Review Button Opens the Wrong Business

The wrong Google review link may be saved in the selected business.

Confirm the business shown in Revilope.
Open the correct Google Business Profile.
Copy a fresh official review link.
Edit the Revilope business.
Replace the existing review link.
Save the business.
Send a new test.
Open the button in a private browser window.

For Google’s instructions, visit:

Create a Google Link or QR Code to Request Reviews

The Review Button Opens a General Search Page

A general Google search or Maps link may have been entered instead of the direct review link.

Replace it with the official review-request link from the correct Google Business Profile.

The Review Button Does Not Open

Check for:

An incomplete URL.
Extra spaces.
Quotation marks.
Added punctuation.
A broken line inside the URL.
Email-client link blocking.
A temporary Google issue.

Copy a new link from Google rather than attempting to repair a damaged link manually.

Google Asks the Customer to Sign In

Google may require the customer to sign in before leaving a review.

This is controlled by Google and does not necessarily mean the Revilope link is incorrect.

Revilope cannot bypass Google’s sign-in requirements.

The Reply Goes to the Wrong Inbox

The business Reply-To Email field may be incorrect.

Open the business.
Select Edit.
Review the Reply-To Email field.
Enter the monitored business inbox.
Save the business.
Send a new test.
Reply to the test.
Confirm that the response reaches the correct inbox.

Do not confuse the reply-to address with:

The Revilope account email.
The authorized sender.
The private BCC address.
The saved Revilope contact.

The Test Email Goes to the Wrong Inbox

Test emails are sent to your Revilope account email.

Changing the business reply-to address does not change the test destination.

Update the account email through Account Details and send a new test.

The Visible Business Name Is Wrong

Confirm that you sent the test or request from the correct business card.

For BCC requests, also confirm that the correct saved contact was selected.

Then review the Business Name field.

After correcting it:

Save the business.
Send a new test.
Check the visible sender name.
Check the subject and body.
Rename or replace the saved contact if its label is outdated.

The Owner or Representative Name Is Wrong

Edit the business’s Owner or Representative Name field.

Confirm that the template uses:

{owner_name}

Save the business and send a new test.

The Mailing Address Is Wrong

Edit the business’s mailing address.

Review:

Street number and name.
Unit or suite.
City.
Province or state.
Postal code or ZIP code.
Country when appropriate.

The business mailing address is separate from your WooCommerce billing address.

The Business Website Is Wrong

Update the Business Website field and send a new test.

Confirm that:

The address is complete.
The correct business website opens.
The website is not being confused with the Google review link.

The Email Formatting Looks Different in Another Email Application

Email clients render messages differently.

Minor differences may appear in:

Fonts.
Button shapes.
Spacing.
Margins.
Link styling.
Message width.

Check whether the message remains readable and functional.

Contact support when content is missing, the button is unusable, links are broken, or the layout is severely distorted.

The Email Is Going to Spam or Junk

Inbox placement is controlled by the receiving email provider and can be influenced by:

Email reputation.
Authentication.
Recipient filtering.
Message wording.
Links.
Previous recipient behaviour.
Organization-level security rules.

Improve the request by:

Using a recognizable business name.
Using a clear subject.
Keeping the message brief.
Avoiding excessive capitalization.
Avoiding repeated punctuation.
Avoiding false urgency.
Avoiding unrelated promotional content.
Sending only to genuine customers.
Respecting unsubscribes.

Revilope cannot guarantee inbox placement.

The Request Is Scheduled for the Wrong Time

Compare the Created and Scheduled times in Activity.

Check:

The follow-up delay saved for the business.
The business connected to the request.
The saved contact used for the original email.
The account timezone.
Whether the request was BCC or Manual.
Whether Send as Soon as Possible was selected.
Whether the business delay changed after the request was created.

For BCC requests, the delay begins when Revilope accepts and creates the request, not necessarily when the original email was sent.

The Scheduled Time Is Several Hours Off

The wrong account timezone is likely selected.

Open My Account.
Open Timezone settings.
Review the selected named timezone.
Compare the displayed current time with your local clock.
Select the correct timezone.
Save the setting.
Refresh Activity.

The Scheduled Time Is One Hour Off

A one-hour difference may be related to:

Daylight saving time.
A fixed UTC offset.
The wrong regional timezone.
A recently changed timezone that has not refreshed.

Use a named timezone such as America/New_York rather than a fixed offset.

The Scheduled Time Changed After Updating the Timezone

The displayed clock time changed because Revilope converted the same stored request moment into the new timezone.

This does not necessarily mean the actual sending moment changed.

The Follow-Up Delay Changed but Existing Requests Did Not

Requests may keep the scheduled time calculated when they were created.

Changing the business delay normally affects new requests.

It may not update:

Existing Scheduled requests.
Requests already Sending.
Requests already Sent.

If an existing request must be changed, cancel it where possible and create a new eligible request after updating the business.

The Request Is Still Scheduled After Its Due Time

The Scheduled time is when the request becomes due for processing.

The email may not be handed off at the exact second displayed.

Small delays can be caused by:

Background scheduling.
Server activity.
Hosting limitations.
Outgoing email-provider delays.
Temporary network problems.
Automatic retry processing.
Overdue-request recovery.

Check:

Your account timezone.
The current status.
Whether the business is active.
Whether the customer unsubscribed.
Whether the request was cancelled.
Whether other requests are also delayed.

Allow a reasonable processing period.

Contact support if the request remains significantly overdue.

The Request Is Stuck in Sending

Sending normally indicates that Revilope is attempting the outgoing email handoff.

If the status remains unchanged for an unusually long period:

Refresh Activity.
Confirm that the business is active.
Wait for any automatic retry to complete.
Check whether other requests are also affected.
Do not create another request for the same customer.
Contact support if the status does not resolve.

The Request Shows Failed

Failed means Revilope could not complete the outgoing email handoff after the available attempts.

Possible causes include:

A temporary mail-provider problem.
A hosting or server issue.
A network problem.
An outgoing email configuration issue.
A recipient-server rejection.
An invalid or unavailable customer mailbox.

Before resubmitting:

Confirm that the request has reached a final Failed status.
Confirm that it is not still retrying.
Check the customer address.
Check whether other recent requests also failed.
Review whether test emails are working.
Contact support if failures are repeated or widespread.

Several Requests Failed at the Same Time

Several failures close together may indicate a broader email or hosting issue.

Record:

The affected business names.
The approximate failure times.
The request sources.
Whether test emails also fail.
Whether every customer domain is affected or only one.

Do not recreate every request while the issue is being investigated.

The Request Shows Sent but the Customer Did Not Receive It

Sent means the outgoing mail system accepted the message for sending.

It does not guarantee inbox delivery.

Ask the customer to check:

Spam.
Junk.
Promotions.
Quarantine.
Blocked sender settings.

Also confirm:

The customer address was entered correctly.
The customer mailbox still exists.
The customer’s mailbox is not full.
The customer’s organization is not blocking external messages.

Do not repeatedly create new requests because the customer did not notice the first one.

Sent Does Not Show an Open or Click

Revilope does not currently provide:

Email open tracking.
Review-button click tracking.
Completed-review tracking.
Google review monitoring.

A Sent status does not confirm that the customer opened the email or left a review.

A Customer Says They Already Left a Review

Revilope does not currently know whether a customer completed a Google review.

Do not create repeated requests solely because Revilope cannot confirm the review.

Use your own business knowledge and respect the customer’s statement.

A Scheduled Request Was Cancelled

A request may be cancelled because:

You cancelled it manually.
The business was paused.
The business was deleted.
The customer unsubscribed.
An account or administrative action stopped it.

Review what happened before creating another request.

Do not recreate a request cancelled because of a customer unsubscribe.

A Paused Business Is Not Accepting Requests

This is expected behaviour.

When a business is paused:

New BCC requests should not be scheduled.
New manual requests should not be accepted.
Pending requests are cancelled.
Eligible reserved capacity is released.

The saved contact may still appear in staff address books, but staff should not use it while the business is paused.

Review and test the business before resuming it.

Requests Did Not Return After Resuming a Business

Requests cancelled during a pause are not automatically restored.

Create a new request only when:

The customer is still eligible.
The customer did not unsubscribe.
The request remains appropriate.
The customer is not blocked by Duplicate Protection or cooldown.

BCC Requests Do Not Work After Resuming

Check:

The business now shows as active.
The correct saved Revilope contact is being used.
The address inside the contact matches the business card.
The sender remains listed.
The sender remains verified.
The account has remaining capacity.
The customer is eligible.
The result appears in Activity.

A Business Was Deleted Accidentally

Stop using the old private BCC address and saved contact immediately.

Remove them from:

Gmail contacts.
Outlook contacts.
Apple Contacts.
Business webmail address books.
Phone contacts.
Email templates.
Reusable drafts.
Autocomplete suggestions where possible.
Internal instructions.
Third-party email systems.

Contact Revilope support promptly.

Do not assume that the deleted business can be restored.

Do not create several replacement profiles while the issue is being reviewed.

A Business Was Deleted and Recreated

The recreated business may have a different private BCC address.

The old saved contact may no longer work.

Remove the old contact from every staff account.
Remove the old address from drafts and templates.
Open the new business card.
Select Save Contact.
Save the new contact with a clear business or location name.
Confirm that the address matches the new business card.
Send a controlled BCC test.
Review the result in Activity.

The Add Business Option Is Unavailable

You may have reached the business limit included with your plan.

Review:

Your current plan.
The number of active businesses.
The number of paused businesses.
Whether an unused business should be deleted.
Whether an upgrade is required.

Paused businesses may still occupy a business slot.

An Authorized Sender Cannot Be Added

You may have reached your plan’s authorized sender limit.

Review:

Verified senders.
Pending senders.
Former employee addresses.
Retired inboxes.
Unused aliases.

Remove unnecessary senders or move to a plan with more sender capacity.

The Same Sender Is Used for Several Businesses

The same email address may need to be added and verified separately for each business.

Review your plan and business sender setup carefully.

Also confirm that the sender has saved the correct contact for each business or location.

The Account Timezone Will Not Save

Confirm that:

You selected a timezone from the available list.
You selected Save.
Your account session has not expired.
No validation error appears.
The page was refreshed after saving.

Sign out and sign back in before trying again.

Activity Still Shows the Old Timezone

After changing the timezone:

Confirm that the new timezone appears in My Account.
Refresh the Activity page.
Clear any browser cache affecting the page.
Sign out and sign back in.

Contact support if the saved timezone is correct but Activity continues displaying another timezone.

The Account Email Cannot Be Changed

Confirm that:

The new email address is valid.
The email address is not already connected to another account.
The account page was saved.
Your session has not expired.

Contact support when the account email is inaccessible or cannot be updated through My Account.

Password Reset Email Does Not Arrive

Check:

The email address entered on the reset form.
Spam.
Junk.
Promotions.
Quarantine.
Whether the inbox can receive external messages.

Wait several minutes before requesting another reset.

Contact support if you cannot access the account or receive the reset email.

The Password Change Does Not Work

Confirm that:

The current password is correct when required.
The new password meets the displayed requirements.
The confirmation matches the new password.
The account details were saved.

Use the password-reset process when the current password is unavailable.

An Upgrade Does Not Appear

Review:

The order status.
The subscription status.
Whether payment completed successfully.
Whether you are signed into the correct account.
Whether the dashboard needs to be refreshed.

Do not purchase the same plan repeatedly while the original payment is being reviewed.

Contact support with the order or subscription number.

A Payment Failed

Open My Account and review the subscription and payment method.

Confirm that:

The card has not expired.
The billing address is correct.
The payment method is active.
The card provider is not blocking the payment.
The subscription provides an option to retry or renew.

Do not send payment-card details by email.

The Subscription Shows On Hold or Inactive

An inactive subscription may restrict new request creation or reduce available plan limits.

Review:

The payment status.
The subscription status.
The saved payment method.
Any renewal action shown in My Account.

Confirm that the subscription returns to Active before relying on paid-plan limits.

Usage Did Not Return After Cancellation

Allow time for the request to reach its final Cancelled status.

Then:

Refresh the dashboard.
Review the usage summary.
Confirm that the request had not already reached Sent.
Confirm that the cancellation was successful.

Contact support if eligible cancelled requests continue reserving capacity for an extended period.

A Failed Request Still Appears to Use Capacity

Confirm that the request has reached a final Failed status and is not waiting for a retry.

Refresh the plan summary after the final status appears.

The Request Count Increased Before Sending

This is expected when the request has been accepted and Scheduled.

Scheduled requests reserve capacity before the sending time arrives.

The Request Count Did Not Increase

The request may have been:

Skipped Duplicate.
Suppressed.
Unauthorized Sender.
Invalid Recipient.
Plan Limit.

Review Activity for the actual result.

A Customer Unsubscribed Accidentally

Do not remove or bypass the suppression yourself.

Ask the customer to contact the business or Revilope support.

Contact hello@revilope.com with enough information to identify the business and request.

Do not promise that suppression will be removed.

A Customer Still Received a Request After Unsubscribing

Check:

The time the customer unsubscribed.
The time the request reached Sending or Sent.
Whether the email had already been handed off.
Whether the request came from another business profile.
Whether the message was a normal business email rather than a Revilope review request.

An email already handed off before the unsubscribe may not be recallable.

A Customer Received the Wrong Business Request

This normally means the wrong business profile, private BCC address, or saved contact was used.

Review:

The business shown in Activity.
The saved contact selected in the original email.
The private address stored inside the contact.
The business selected for the manual request.
The Google review link saved for that business.

Correct or delete the saved contact in every affected staff account.

Use Save Contact from the correct business card.

Pause the affected business if the incorrect setup could continue creating requests.

A Customer Received a Request at the Wrong Time

Review:

The Created time.
The Scheduled time.
The Sent time.
The business delay.
The business identified by the saved BCC contact.
The account timezone.
The customer’s own timezone.
Whether a manual request was sent as soon as possible.

Revilope does not currently assign an individual timezone to each customer or restrict sending to business hours.

The Original BCC Email Contained Sensitive Information

Revilope does not retrieve or use the original email body or attachments for the review-request workflow.

However, the subject line, sender, recipient, and other header information may be processed.

If sensitive information appeared in the subject or display names:

Update your internal email process.
Use general subject lines in the future.
Contact support if the information requires further review.

The Private BCC Address or Contact File Was Exposed

If the private BCC address or downloaded contact file was published or shared without permission:

Pause the affected business.
Review recent Activity.
Look for unfamiliar senders or recipients.
Review the authorized sender list.
Remove unauthorized senders.
Secure related business email and contacts accounts.
Remove public copies of the address or contact file where possible.
Ask unauthorized recipients to delete the contact or file.
Contact Revilope support.

Possession of the contact alone does not automatically authorize a sender, but the address should still be treated as confidential.

A Saved Contact Was Shared With the Wrong Person

Ask the recipient to delete:

The saved contact.
The downloaded contact file.
Any copy placed in a shared address book.
Any draft or template containing the private address.

Review whether the person is listed as an authorized sender.

Pause the business and contact support when unauthorized use may have occurred.

An Unknown Sender Appears in Activity

Review the authorized sender list immediately.

Then:

Pause the business when necessary.
Change the password of the affected email account.
Sign out active email sessions.
Review forwarding rules.
Enable or review multi-factor authentication.
Remove unfamiliar senders from Revilope.
Review who has access to the saved BCC contact.
Contact support.

An Unknown Business or Plan Change Appears

Secure the Revilope account immediately.

Change the Revilope password.
Secure the account email.
Review recent businesses.
Review authorized senders.
Review Activity.
Review orders and subscriptions.
Review who has access to saved business contacts.
Contact Revilope support.

Information to Collect Before Contacting Support

Providing clear details can help support investigate the problem more efficiently.

Include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The request source.
The status shown in Activity.
The Created time.
The Scheduled time.
The Sent or Failed time when available.
The sender address used for a BCC request.
The selected account timezone.
Whether a saved contact or copied address was used.
The visible name of the saved contact.
The email or contacts application being used.
Whether an alias, shared mailbox, or third-party platform was used.
A clear description of what you expected.
A clear description of what actually happened.

Information Not to Send to Support

Do not send:

Your Revilope password.
Your email password.
Authentication codes.
Complete payment-card numbers.
Card security codes.
Banking passwords.
Verification tokens.
Downloaded contact files containing private BCC addresses.
Complete customer lists.
Unnecessary customer records.
Sensitive original email bodies.
Unnecessary attachments.

Troubleshooting Checklist

The correct Revilope account is being used.
The correct business is active.
The correct saved Revilope contact was selected.
The contact name identifies the correct business or location.
The private address inside the contact matches the business card.
The private address has not been edited.
The saved contact was placed in BCC.
The customer was placed in To.
Only one customer was included in the BCC email.
The actual From address is authorized.
The sender is verified.
The customer email address is valid.
The customer is not suppressed.
The customer does not already have a pending request.
The customer is not within the cooldown period.
The account has available request capacity.
The account timezone is correct.
The request status has been reviewed in Activity.
The dashboard has been refreshed.
The existing request was not resubmitted prematurely.

Saved Contact Troubleshooting Checklist

Save Contact was used from the correct business card.
The contact was saved or imported successfully.
The contact was saved to the correct email or contacts account.
The contact appears in the email application.
The contact name includes the business or location.
The complete private address appears in BCC.
The address matches the current business card.
The private address was not manually edited.
An old contact from a deleted business was not selected.
Outdated autocomplete suggestions were removed when possible.
Each staff member tested the contact from their own account.

Quick Status Troubleshooting

Scheduled: Confirm the Scheduled time and allow a reasonable processing period.
Sending: Wait for the outgoing attempt or retry to finish.
Sent: Check spam and filtering, but remember delivery is not guaranteed.
Failed: Confirm the final status before considering another request.
Cancelled: Determine why it was cancelled before recreating it.
Skipped Duplicate: Find the existing or recent request and do not resubmit.
Plan Limit: Review usage, scheduled capacity, business limits, sender limits, and subscription status.
Suppressed: Respect the unsubscribe and do not attempt another request.
Unauthorized Sender: Verify the actual From address for the business connected to the saved contact.
Invalid Recipient: Correct the customer recipient structure or email format.

You Are Ready to Continue When

You know how to locate the request in Activity.
You understand the request status.
You have checked the business, sender, recipient, saved contact, private BCC address, timezone, and plan usage.
You know how to compare a saved contact with the current business card.
You know how to replace an incorrect or outdated saved contact.
You understand whether the issue requires a corrected new request or no further action.
You have not attempted to bypass duplicate or suppression protections.
You have collected the relevant details before contacting support.

Next Step

Continue to the Quick Reference Checklist for a condensed setup and sending checklist that can be used by business owners, managers, and staff.

Still Need Help?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include the business name, request status, approximate date and time, request source, sender address when applicable, selected timezone, whether a saved contact was used, the email application being used, and a clear explanation of the issue.

Do not send passwords, authentication codes, complete payment-card details, downloaded contact files, complete customer lists, or unnecessary sensitive customer information.

Quick Reference Checklist

Use this checklist as a quick reference when setting up a business, saving your private Revilope contact, sending review requests, training staff, checking Activity, or troubleshooting a problem.

Revilope works best when each business is configured correctly, its private BCC address is saved under a clear contact name, one verified sender emails one genuine customer, and the correct saved Revilope contact is placed in BCC.

Initial Account Setup Checklist

Your Revilope account email is correct and accessible.
Your account password is strong and unique.
Your timezone matches your business or account-management location.
The local time displayed in your account is correct.
Your current plan supports the number of businesses you need.
Your current plan supports the number of authorized senders you need.
Your monthly request allowance is suitable for your expected volume.

Timezone Checklist

Open the Timezone area in My Account.
Select a named regional timezone.
Save the setting.
Confirm that the displayed local time is correct.
Remember that the default timezone is America/New_York.
Remember that timezone settings control how timestamps are displayed.
Remember that changing the timezone does not change the length of a follow-up delay.
Consider the customer’s timezone when serving several regions.

New Business Setup Checklist

The business name matches the public-facing company or location name.
The owner or representative name is correct.
The business website is correct.
The reply-to email address is monitored.
The business mailing address is complete and accurate.
The Google review link belongs to the correct business and location.
The email subject is clear and accurate.
The review-request message asks for honest feedback.
The review button text clearly explains what it does.
The follow-up delay matches the customer experience.
At least one authorized sender has been added.
The business has been saved.
Save Contact has been selected on the business card.
The contact was saved or imported into the email account used for customer messages.
The saved contact name clearly identifies the business or location.
The private address inside the contact has not been edited.

Save Contact Checklist

Open the Revilope dashboard.
Find the correct business card.
Select Save Contact next to Edit.
Open the contact file or contact prompt provided by your browser or device.
Confirm that the contact name identifies the correct business or location.
Confirm that the complete private Revilope address is included.
Save or import the contact into the account used for customer emails.
Open a new email.
Open the BCC field.
Begin typing the saved contact name.
Select the correct contact.
Confirm that the complete private address appears in BCC.

Saved Contact Naming Checklist

Use clear contact names such as:

Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Mississauga
Revilope BCC – Greenway Dental Oakville
Revilope Reviews – Northside Auto Repair

Avoid generic names such as:

Revilope
Reviews
BCC
Main Location

Saved Contact Security Checklist

The contact is available only to approved staff.
The contact was saved to the correct business email or contacts account.
The downloaded contact file is not publicly shared.
The contact file is not stored in a public or unrestricted folder.
The contact has not been sent to customers.
The private email address inside the contact has not been changed.
Former employees no longer have access to the contact.
Old contacts are removed when a business is deleted or recreated.

Multiple Business and Location Checklist

Each separate company, brand, or review location has its own business profile.
Each profile has the correct Google review link.
Each profile has a clear name that includes the location when necessary.
Each business has its own private Revilope BCC address.
Save Contact has been used separately for each business.
Each saved BCC contact includes the business or location name.
Each saved contact contains the address for the matching business card.
Staff know which saved contact belongs to each location.
Staff do not use one location’s contact for another location.
Manual requests are submitted through the correct business.
Activity is filtered by business when investigating a request.

Google Review Link Checklist

The link was copied from the correct Google Business Profile.
The link is a direct review link rather than a general Google search.
The correct business name appears when the link opens.
The correct location appears.
The link works in a private or incognito browser window.
The link was tested from a Revilope test email.
The link does not open another business or location.

Authorized Sender Checklist

The sender address is listed under the correct business.
The sender status shows Verified.
The actual From address matches the verified address.
The sender was tested from the same email application staff will use.
The sender has access to the correct saved Revilope contact.
Aliases and shared mailboxes were tested separately.
Third-party systems were tested before live use.
Former employees and retired inboxes have been removed.
Saved contacts have been removed from former employee accounts where possible.
The account remains within its authorized sender limit.

Authorized Sender Verification Checklist

The sender email address was entered correctly.
The sender checked the correct inbox.
Spam and junk folders were checked.
Promotions and quarantine folders were checked.
The verification link was opened by the intended sender.
The Revilope dashboard was refreshed afterward.
The sender now shows as Verified.

Email Template Checklist

The subject identifies the purpose of the email.
The message thanks the customer.
The message identifies the business clearly.
The message asks for honest feedback.
The wording does not pressure the customer.
The wording does not request a five-star rating.
No reward or incentive is offered.
No review gating is used.
The message is short and easy to understand.
The review button appears in a logical position.
The reply-to address is monitored.
The mailing address is accurate.

Supported Placeholder Checklist

Use only these supported placeholders:

{business_name}
{owner_name}
{business_website}
{review_button}

Confirm that:

Each placeholder uses curly brackets.
The spelling is exact.
The underscores are present.
No spaces were added inside the brackets.
{review_button} appears in the message.
A new test was sent after changing placeholders.

Review Button Checklist

The message contains {review_button}.
The Review Button Text field is not empty.
The button text is clear.
The Google review link is complete.
The button appears in the test email.
The button works on desktop.
The button works on mobile.
The button opens the correct Google review page.

Recommended Review Button Text

Leave a Review
Share Your Feedback
Review Us on Google
Write a Review

Test Email Checklist

The business was saved before the test was sent.
The test was sent from the correct business card.
The test arrived at the Revilope account email.
The subject includes a test indicator.
The business name is correct.
The owner or representative name is correct.
The message formatting is readable.
The review button appears.
The review button opens the correct Google page.
The reply-to address is correct.
The mailing address is correct.
The message was reviewed on desktop and mobile.

Remember that test emails:

Do not count toward your monthly request allowance.
Do not create a normal customer Activity record.
Do not replace a live BCC workflow test.

Follow-Up Delay Quick Reference

1 hour for short, completed experiences.
4 hours for same-day follow-ups.
12 hours when the customer needs more time, while carefully considering overnight delivery.
24 hours as a practical general starting point.
2 days when the customer needs time to evaluate the result.
3 days for services or products requiring several days of use.
7 days when meaningful evaluation requires a longer period.

Delay Selection Checklist

The customer experience is complete before the request is triggered.
The customer has enough time to evaluate the service or product.
The request will not arrive unreasonably late at night.
The request will not arrive before delivery, pickup, or service completion.
The customer’s likely timezone has been considered.
The business’s normal email-sending time has been considered.
The selected delay has been saved.

Remember that:

The delay begins when Revilope accepts and creates the request.
The delay does not necessarily begin at the exact moment the original email was sent.
Changing the business delay normally affects new requests.
Existing scheduled requests may keep their original scheduled times.
Revilope does not currently provide exact calendar-date scheduling.
Revilope does not automatically skip weekends or holidays.

BCC Request Checklist

Before sending a customer email with Revilope in BCC, confirm:

The customer experience is complete.
This is the selected trigger email for the business.
One customer is entered in To.
No additional customers are entered in To or CC.
The correct saved Revilope contact is entered in BCC.
The saved contact name matches the correct business or location.
The complete private address appears in BCC.
The private address inside the contact has not been edited.
An outdated contact from a deleted business was not selected.
The Revilope contact is not entered in To or CC.
The From address is verified for the correct business.
The customer has not asked to stop receiving review requests.
The customer has not already been submitted for the same experience.
The account has remaining request capacity.

Correct BCC Email Structure

From: A verified authorized sender.
To: One genuine customer.
CC: No additional customers.
BCC: The saved Revilope contact for the correct business.

Do Not Use BCC Automation For

Newsletters.
Marketing broadcasts.
Bulk promotional campaigns.
Purchased contact lists.
Scraped email addresses.
Cold outreach.
Several customers in one message.
Appointment confirmations sent before the appointment.
Quotes or estimates sent before work begins.
Order confirmations sent before delivery.

BCC Processing Checklist

After sending the original email:

Wait several minutes for processing.
Open Activity.
Confirm that the business connected to the saved contact appears.
Confirm that the customer address is represented correctly in masked form.
Review the request source.
Review the request status.
Confirm that the Scheduled time matches the expected delay.

Manual Request Checklist

The correct business is selected.
Every address belongs to a genuine customer.
Every customer belongs to the selected business or location.
Duplicate addresses were removed.
Staff and business addresses were removed.
Known unsubscribed customers were removed.
Known recent recipients were removed.
The account has enough request capacity.
The sending option was reviewed carefully.

Manual Address Formatting Checklist

Manual addresses may be separated by:

Commas.
Semicolons.
Spaces.
New lines.

For easier review, enter one address per line.

Do not include:

Customer names.
Phone numbers.
Mailing addresses.
Invoice details.
Payment information.
Medical information.
Complete spreadsheet rows.

Manual Sending Option Checklist

Select Send as Soon as Possible when the request should enter the outgoing queue without the saved delay.
Select Use Saved Delay when the business’s normal follow-up delay should apply.
Review the selected option before submitting.
Check the Created and Scheduled times in Activity afterward.

Manual Batch Checklist

Start with a smaller batch when using a new business or template.
Confirm that the first batch appears correctly in Activity.
Confirm that the correct business was selected.
Confirm that the Google review link is correct.
Confirm that the request timing is correct.
Review accepted and rejected counts.
Do not submit the complete batch again if only some addresses were rejected.

Activity Checklist

The correct date range is selected.
The correct business filter is selected.
The correct status filter is selected.
The customer’s masked address has been reviewed.
The request source is correct.
The Created time is reasonable.
The Scheduled time matches the expected delay.
The Sent time is reviewed when available.
The selected account timezone is correct.

Status Quick Reference

Scheduled means the request was accepted and is waiting for its sending time.
Sending means Revilope is currently processing the outgoing email.
Sent means the outgoing mail system accepted the message for sending.
Failed means the outgoing handoff could not be completed after the available attempts.
Cancelled means the request was stopped before sending.
Skipped Duplicate means an existing, repeated, pending, or recent request was detected.
Plan Limit means the account did not have enough available capacity or another plan limit was reached.
Suppressed means the customer is blocked from receiving the request.
Unauthorized Sender means the BCC email came from an unverified or unapproved address.
Invalid Recipient means Revilope could not identify or accept one eligible customer.

Scheduled Status Checklist

The business is correct.
The Created time is correct.
The Scheduled time matches the selected delay.
The request is not duplicated.
The business remains active.
The account timezone is correct.

A Scheduled request may remain in that status briefly after its due time because processing is not guaranteed to occur at the exact displayed second.

Sending Status Checklist

Wait for the outgoing attempt to complete.
Refresh Activity after a reasonable period.
Do not create another request for the same customer.
Check whether other requests are also delayed.
Contact support if the status remains unresolved for an unusually long time.

Sent Status Checklist

Confirm the Sent time.
Remember that Sent means the mail system accepted the email.
Do not assume the customer received it in the inbox.
Do not assume the customer opened it.
Do not assume the customer clicked the review button.
Do not assume the customer submitted a Google review.

Revilope does not currently provide:

Email open tracking.
Review-button click tracking.
Completed-review tracking.
Google review monitoring.

Failed Status Checklist

Confirm that the request reached a final Failed status.
Confirm that it is not still retrying.
Check the customer email address.
Check whether other recent requests also failed.
Check whether test emails are working.
Do not repeatedly resubmit the customer.
Contact support when failures are repeated or widespread.

Cancelled Status Checklist

Determine why the request was cancelled.
Check whether the business was paused or deleted.
Check whether the customer unsubscribed.
Check whether the request was manually cancelled.
Confirm whether reserved plan capacity was released.
Do not recreate a request cancelled because of suppression.

Skipped Duplicate Checklist

Review recent Activity for the customer and business.
Look for a Scheduled request.
Look for a request currently Sending.
Look for a recent Sent request.
Check whether the same source email was processed previously.
Check whether the customer is within the standard cooldown period.
Do not resubmit the customer immediately.

The standard cooldown is approximately 90 days per customer and business.

Deleting visible Activity does not necessarily remove duplicate or cooldown protection.

Suppressed Status Checklist

Do not create another BCC request.
Do not create another manual request.
Do not use another authorized sender.
Do not alter the email address.
Do not use another business profile to bypass suppression.
Remove the customer from future source lists.
Contact support only when the customer clearly reports an accidental unsubscribe or asks to resubscribe.

Unauthorized Sender Checklist

The sender is listed under the correct business.
The sender status is Verified.
The actual From address matches the verified address.
The saved contact belongs to the correct business.
The private address inside the contact matches the business card.
An alias or shared mailbox was not substituted unexpectedly.
A third-party system did not replace the sender.

Invalid Recipient Checklist

One customer was entered in To.
No additional customers were entered in To or CC.
The customer was not placed only in BCC.
The saved Revilope contact was placed only in BCC.
The email address is complete.
The email address contains the at symbol.
The domain is complete.
The recipient is not an authorized sender.
The recipient is not the business reply-to address.
The recipient is not a Revilope system address.

Plan Limit Checklist

Review the current plan.
Review monthly request usage.
Include Scheduled requests when reviewing available capacity.
Review the number of businesses.
Review the number of authorized senders.
Review the subscription status.
Refresh the dashboard.
Upgrade when more capacity is required.

View Revilope Plans and Limits

Plan Quick Reference

Starter: $0 per month, 1 business, 5 monthly requests, and 1 authorized sender.
Pro: $29 per month, 1 business, 100 monthly requests, and 1 authorized sender.
Pro Plus: $49 per month, up to 3 businesses, 350 monthly requests, and 3 authorized senders.
Agency: $99 per month, up to 10 businesses, 1,500 monthly requests, and 10 authorized senders.

Remember that:

BCC and Manual requests share the same monthly allowance.
Each eligible customer counts as one request.
Scheduled requests reserve capacity.
Test emails do not count.
Unused requests do not roll over.
All businesses share the account’s total monthly allowance.

Before Upgrading Checklist

Confirm that the account regularly needs more requests.
Confirm that another business slot is required.
Confirm that additional authorized senders are required.
Review the plan details and price.
Confirm that the billing information is correct.
Review the account after payment completes.

Before Downgrading Checklist

Compare the new business limit with the number of existing businesses.
Include paused businesses in your review.
Compare the new sender limit with the configured senders.
Review normal monthly request volume.
Review Scheduled requests.
Decide which businesses and senders must remain.
Remove outdated saved contacts from staff systems when necessary.
Tell staff which business contacts will remain active.

Before Cancelling a Paid Plan Checklist

Review all Scheduled requests.
Review the current businesses.
Review authorized senders.
Remove private BCC addresses and saved contacts from future staff workflows.
Remove outdated contacts from shared address books and templates.
Review the cancellation details shown in My Account.
Understand that cancelling a subscription is not necessarily the same as deleting all account data.

Pause a Business Checklist

Pause a business when:

The location is temporarily closed.
The review link is incorrect.
The template requires an important correction.
The business is changing ownership or identity.
The private BCC address or contact file may have been exposed.
An authorized sender may be compromised.
Unexpected request Activity is being investigated.

Before pausing:

Review Scheduled requests.
Notify staff who use the saved contact.
Tell staff not to use the contact while the business is paused.
Understand that pending requests will be cancelled.
Understand that eligible reserved capacity will be released.
Understand that cancelled requests will not automatically return after resuming.

Resume a Business Checklist

The business name is correct.
The Google review link works.
The subject and message are correct.
The reply-to address is monitored.
The mailing address is accurate.
The follow-up delay is appropriate.
The authorized senders are current and verified.
The saved contact name matches the current business or location.
The private address inside the contact matches the business card.
An old contact from a deleted business is not being used.
A fresh test email was reviewed.
The business was resumed.
A controlled BCC request using the saved contact was checked in Activity.

Delete a Business Checklist

Confirm that the business is no longer needed.
Use Pause instead when the business may return.
Review pending requests.
Confirm that pending requests should be cancelled.
Inform staff who use the BCC address or saved contact.
Remove the saved contact from Gmail, Outlook, Apple Contacts, and other address books.
Remove the private address from templates, drafts, and third-party systems.
Remove outdated autocomplete suggestions where possible.
Remove downloaded contact files that are no longer needed.
Treat deletion as potentially permanent.

Deleted and Recreated Business Checklist

Do not continue using the old saved contact.
Remove the old contact from every staff account.
Remove the old address from templates and reusable drafts.
Open the newly created business card.
Select Save Contact.
Save the new contact with a clear business or location name.
Confirm that the new address matches the current business card.
Tell staff to use the new contact.
Send a controlled BCC test.
Review the result in Activity.

Privacy Checklist

Staff understand that Revilope processes email header information.
Sensitive information is kept out of email subjects.
Sensitive information is kept out of sender and recipient display names.
The original email body is not used to create the review request.
Original attachments are not copied into the review request.
Manual submissions contain only required email addresses.
Customer addresses appear masked in Activity.
Private BCC addresses are kept confidential.
Saved contacts and downloaded contact files are kept confidential.
Save Contact is used only by approved staff.
Shared contacts accounts are secured.
Dashboard access is limited to trusted users.
Customer unsubscribes are respected.

Privacy Quick Reference

Revilope uses the required email header information to identify the business, sender, customer, and source message.
Revilope does not use the original email body to create the request.
Revilope does not copy original attachments into the request.
Inbound BCC mailbox copies are deleted and expunged after processing.
Customer email addresses are stored in encrypted form.
A separate protected comparison value supports duplicate, cooldown, and suppression checks.
Customer addresses are masked in the visible Activity list.
Revilope does not require the customer’s name for the standard workflow.
Save Contact does not give Revilope access to your complete address book.
The saved contact contains the complete private BCC address.
Your email or contacts provider may synchronize the saved contact according to its own settings.

Customer Communication Checklist

The customer had a genuine experience with the business.
The request is sent after the experience is complete.
The request asks for honest feedback.
The request does not ask for a specific rating.
No incentive is offered.
No review gating is used.
The customer is free to ignore the request.
The unsubscribe option remains available.
The customer is not repeatedly contacted.

Staff Training Checklist

Every staff member using Revilope should know:

Which email should trigger the request.
Which saved Revilope contact belongs to each business or location.
How to find the contact by typing its name in BCC.
How to confirm that the complete private address appears.
That Revilope belongs only in BCC.
That one customer should be in To.
That the sender must be verified.
That saving the contact does not authorize an unverified sender.
That the private address inside the contact must not be edited.
That newsletters and bulk campaigns should not use the contact.
That unsubscribed customers must not be resubmitted.
That Activity should be checked before resending.
That private BCC addresses and contact files must remain confidential.
That old contacts must be removed after a business is deleted or recreated.

Monthly Maintenance Checklist

Review the current plan and monthly usage.
Review Scheduled requests.
Review Failed requests.
Review Unauthorized Sender results.
Review Invalid Recipient results.
Review Plan Limit results.
Review unexpected increases in request volume.
Review the authorized sender list.
Remove former employees and unused inboxes.
Remove saved contacts from former employee accounts where possible.
Confirm that every business remains accurate.
Confirm that each saved contact name matches the current business or location.
Remove contacts belonging to deleted or replaced businesses.
Confirm that Google review links still work.
Confirm that reply-to inboxes are monitored.
Send a new test when important information changed.

Security Checklist

The Revilope account uses a strong, unique password.
The account email is protected.
Authorized sender accounts use strong passwords.
Contacts and address-book accounts are protected.
Multi-factor authentication is enabled where available.
Shared mailbox permissions are reviewed.
Shared address-book permissions are reviewed.
Email forwarding rules are reviewed.
Former employees no longer have access.
Private BCC addresses are not publicly available.
Saved contacts and contact files are not publicly available.
Unexpected Activity is investigated promptly.
The business is paused during a suspected compromise.

Quick Troubleshooting Checklist

When something does not work, check:

The correct Revilope account.
The correct business.
The business is active.
The correct saved Revilope contact was selected.
The contact name matches the intended business or location.
The private address inside the contact matches the business card.
The private address was not edited.
The actual From address.
The sender verification status.
The customer recipient format.
The customer’s duplicate and suppression status.
The current plan usage.
The account timezone.
The request status in Activity.

Saved Contact Troubleshooting Checklist

Save Contact was selected from the correct business card.
The downloaded contact file was opened.
The contact was saved or imported successfully.
The contact was saved to the correct Google, Microsoft, Apple, device, or business account.
The email application uses the same contacts account.
Contact synchronization is enabled.
The email application was refreshed or reopened.
The contact appears when its name is entered in BCC.
The contact name clearly identifies the business or location.
The complete private address appears in BCC.
The private address matches the current business card.
The private address has not been edited.
An outdated autocomplete suggestion was not selected.
An old contact from a deleted business was not selected.

Missing BCC Request Checklist

Confirm the original email was sent.
Confirm the saved Revilope contact was included in BCC.
Confirm the complete private address appears in BCC.
Confirm the saved contact belongs to the correct business.
Confirm the customer was in To.
Confirm only one customer was included.
Confirm the sender is verified.
Wait several minutes.
Refresh Activity.
Clear Activity filters.
Look for rejected or skipped statuses.
Use the copy icon for a controlled test when the saved contact may be incorrect.

Wrong Business Request Checklist

Review the business shown in Activity.
Review the saved contact selected in the original email.
Open the contact and review the private address inside it.
Compare that address with the intended business card.
Review the Google review link saved for the business.
Delete or rename misleading contacts.
Use Save Contact from the correct business card.
Review recent requests that may have used the wrong contact.
Pause the business when incorrect requests may continue.

Wrong Scheduled Time Checklist

Compare the Created time with the Scheduled time.
Confirm the business follow-up delay.
Confirm the correct saved BCC contact was used.
Confirm that the contact belongs to the intended business.
Confirm whether the request was BCC or Manual.
Confirm whether Send as Soon as Possible was selected.
Confirm the account timezone.
Consider daylight saving time.
Remember that BCC processing may occur after the original email was sent.

Customer Did Not Receive a Sent Request Checklist

Confirm the customer email address.
Ask the customer to check spam.
Ask the customer to check junk.
Ask the customer to check promotions.
Ask the customer to check quarantine.
Confirm that the mailbox is active.
Confirm that the mailbox is not full.
Do not repeatedly resend the request.

Exposed Contact or BCC Address Checklist

Pause the affected business.
Review recent Activity.
Review authorized senders.
Remove unauthorized senders.
Secure related email and contacts accounts.
Remove public copies of the address or contact file.
Ask unauthorized recipients to delete the contact or file.
Review who has access to shared address books.
Contact Revilope support.

Support Request Checklist

When contacting Revilope support, include:

Your Revilope account email.
The business name.
The request source.
The status shown in Activity.
The Created time.
The Scheduled time.
The Sent or Failed time when available.
The sender address used for a BCC request.
The selected timezone.
Whether a saved contact or copied address was used.
The visible name of the saved contact.
The email or contacts application being used.
Whether an alias, shared mailbox, or third-party system was used.
What you expected to happen.
What actually happened.

Do Not Send to Support

Your Revilope password.
Your business email password.
Authentication codes.
Verification tokens.
Complete payment-card numbers.
Card security codes.
Banking passwords.
Downloaded contact files containing private BCC addresses.
Complete customer lists.
Sensitive original email bodies.
Unnecessary attachments.

Complete Pre-Send Checklist

The customer is genuine.
The customer experience is complete.
The correct business is selected.
The correct review link is saved.
The template has been tested.
The sender is verified.
The customer is not suppressed.
The customer does not already have a pending request.
The customer is not within the cooldown period.
The account has available request capacity.
The request timing is appropriate.
The correct BCC or manual workflow is being used.
The correct saved Revilope contact is selected for a BCC request.
The saved contact name matches the business or location.
The complete private address appears in BCC.
The private address inside the contact has not been edited.

Complete Post-Send Checklist

The request appears in Activity.
The correct business appears.
The request source is correct.
The masked customer address is correct.
The status has been reviewed.
The Created time is reasonable.
The Scheduled time is correct.
The timezone is correct.
No duplicate request was created.
No further action is taken unless the status requires it.

Revilope Quick Facts

Revilope turns eligible customer emails into separate Google review requests.
BCC automation works through a private address assigned to each business.
Save Contact allows that private address to be stored under a recognizable business or location name.
Save Contact does not give Revilope access to your complete address book.
The saved contact contains the complete private BCC address and should remain confidential.
The original email body and attachments are not used to create the request.
BCC requests require a verified authorized sender.
Saving the contact does not authorize an unverified sender.
Manual requests can be created from the signed-in dashboard.
Each eligible customer receives a separate email.
Available delays are 1 hour, 4 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 2 days, 3 days, and 7 days.
The standard customer cooldown is approximately 90 days per business.
BCC and Manual requests share the monthly allowance.
Scheduled requests reserve capacity.
Test emails do not count toward the monthly allowance.
Unused monthly requests do not roll over.
Sent means the outgoing mail system accepted the request for sending.
Sent does not guarantee inbox delivery.
Revilope does not currently track opens, clicks, or completed Google reviews.
Customer unsubscribes apply to future Revilope requests from that business.
Pausing a business cancels pending requests.
Deleting a business disables its private BCC workflow.
Deleting a business does not automatically remove its saved contact from staff accounts.
A recreated business may receive a new private BCC address and require a new saved contact.

Final Readiness Checklist

Your account timezone is correct.
Your business information is complete.
Your Google review link has been tested.
Your authorized sender is verified.
Your template asks for honest feedback.
Your template includes the review button.
Your reply-to inbox is monitored.
Save Contact has been used on the business card.
The contact was saved to the correct email or contacts account.
The saved contact clearly identifies the business or location.
The complete private address appears when the contact is selected in BCC.
The private address inside the contact has not been edited.
The private BCC address and contact file are stored securely.
Your staff understand the one-customer BCC workflow.
Your staff know how to select the correct saved contact.
Your follow-up delay is appropriate.
Your first test email was reviewed.
Your first controlled BCC request using the saved contact appeared in Activity.
Your plan has enough request capacity.
Your team understands duplicate protection and suppression.
Your team knows when to check Activity.

You Are Ready to Use Revilope When

You can identify the correct business and saved Revilope contact.
You know how to use Save Contact from the business card.
You can confirm that the private address inside the contact matches the business.
You know how to remove or replace an outdated contact.
You can confirm that the sender is verified.
You know which customer email should trigger a review request.
You know how to create a manual request.
You understand the available follow-up delays.
You know how to interpret every Activity status.
You understand that duplicate and suppression protections must not be bypassed.
You understand how requests affect monthly usage.
You know where to update your timezone and account information.
You know what information Revilope processes from BCC emails.
You know how to protect private BCC addresses and contact files.
You know how to contact support safely.

Need Help?

Contact Revilope support at hello@revilope.com.

Include your account email, business name, request source, Activity status, approximate date and time, sender address when applicable, selected timezone, whether a saved contact was used, the email or contacts application being used, and a clear description of the issue.

Do not send passwords, authentication codes, complete payment-card information, downloaded contact files, complete customer lists, private customer records, or unnecessary sensitive information.